Quarterlytics / Communication Services / Specialty Retail / N Brown Group plc

N Brown Group plc

bwng · LSE Communication Services
Claim this profile
Ticker bwng
Exchange LSE
Sector Communication Services
Industry Specialty Retail
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2018 Annual Report · N Brown Group plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Powered
by People

N Brown Group plc 
Annual Report & Accounts 2018

An expert in fashion 
that fits and flatters, 
N Brown is one of  
the UK’s leading  
online retailers.  
Our key retail brands  
are JD Williams, 
Simply Be and  
Jacamo. 

We are all about democratising 
fashion and are size inclusive, 
focusing on the needs of 
underserved customer groups – 
size 20+ and age 50+. We offer  
an extensive range of products, 
predominantly clothing, footwear 
and homewares, and our Financial 
Services proposition allows 
customers to spread the cost  
of shopping with us.

We are headquartered in 
Manchester where we design, 
source and create our product 
offer and we employ over 2,600 
people across the UK.

Highlights

REVENUE – CONTINUING 
OPERATIONS (£M)

20181

922.2

(52 week 2017:1 £887.7m)
(53 week 2017: £900.7m)

ADJUSTED2 PRE-TAX PROFIT – 
CONTINUING OPERATIONS (£M)

STATUTORY PROFIT  
BEFORE TAX (£M)

20181

20181

81.6

(52 week 2017:1 £80.6m)
(53 week 2017: £82.6m)

16.2 

(52 week 2017:1 £55.6m)
(53 week 2017: £57.6m)

ADJUSTED2 EARNINGS PER SHARE 
– CONTINUING OPERATIONS (P)

STATUTORY EPS  
(P)

20181

2018

23.06

(52 week 2017:1 22.18p)
(53 week 2017: 22.74p)

4.41 

(52 week 2017:1 15.10p) 
(53 week 2017: 15.67p)

NET ASSETS (£M)

DIVIDENDS PER SHARE (P)

2018

2018

459.6 

(2017:1 £478.2m)

14.23 

(2017:1 14.23p)

1 

 In the current year we are reporting on  
the 52 week period to 3rd March 2018.  
In FY17, the statutory result reported on 
the 53 week period to 4th March 2017.  
In order to provide a meaningful 
comparison, all FY17 P&L financial 
movements are reported on a 52 week 
basis, excluding the 53rd week, unless 
otherwise stated. The 53 week statutory 
results for FY17 are set out on page 85, 
together with an assessment of how the 
52 weeks result for the comparative 
period has been derived. All comparative 
balance sheet figures are reported as at 
the year-end date and cash flow figures 
are for the 53 week statutory period.
2  Defined as excluding exceptionals and 
unrealised FX movement and therefore 
represents the underlying trading 
performance.

CONTENTS

Strategic report 
IFC  Highlights
1  Powered by People
12  At a Glance
14  Chairman’s Statement
16  Market Review
18  Business Model
20  Chief Executive’s Review
22  Our Strategy
24  Key Performance Indicators
28  Risk Management
30  Principal Risks and Uncertainties
34  Performance Review
40  Chief Financial Officer’s Review
44  Corporate Social Responsibility

Governance 
52  Governance Overview
54  Board of Directors
56  Directors’ Report
60   Corporate Governance Statement
63  Audit Committee Report
66   Nomination and Governance Committee Report
67  CSR Committee Report
68  Directors’ Remuneration Report

Financial statements 
85  Independent Auditor’s Report
91   Consolidated Income Statement
91   Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
92  Consolidated Balance Sheet
93   Consolidated Cash Flow Statement
95   Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity
96  Notes to the Group Accounts
124 Company Balance Sheet
125  Company Statement of Changes in Equity
126  Notes to the Company Accounts
131 Shareholder Information

View online 
ar2018.nbrown.co.uk

Everyone at 
N Brown plays  
a role in delivering 
world-class 
fashion that fits. 

We couldn’t do what we do 
without the passion, energy  
and dedication of our people  
to deliver fantastic products and 
a great service to our customers.

Our people are what defines 
our business. They live and 
breathe our GUSTO values 
every day and are our single 
most important asset. 

Everything we achieve as a 
business, we are achieving 
together. We would like to 
recognise and thank our 
colleagues for working so hard 
to make this happen, and we 
are pleased to introduce you  
to some of our great people  
in this report. 

Angela Spindler
Chief Executive Officer

@nbrownplc

1

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Powered by People 
continued

2,600  
colleagues 
across  
the UK.

With the passion, 
energy and 
dedication to 
deliver fantastic 
products and a 
great service to 
our customers. 

2

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Everyone  
plays a role  
in delivering 
world-class 
fashion that fits.

#proudtobeNBrown

3

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Powered by People 
continued

The  
spark

behind a modern online 
department store

Relaunching the JD Williams brand

Our influencers 
A group of editors and influencers 
designed to inspire our customers 
by sharing their life moments. Made 
up of top lifestyle journalists, and 
fashion and home bloggers, they 
are here to share their tips and tricks 
with the JD Williams customers 
across all our channels, from the 
Life.Style magazine to the weekly 
blogs on our site.

Midster report
Last summer we commissioned  
our third state of the nation  
report, in association with YouGov, 
surveying over 2,000 women aged 
45+. The report looked into body 
confidence, style and shopping 
behaviours, as well as women’s 
attitudes towards key life moments 
such as relationships, dating, 
healthy living, life adventures  
and work-life balance.

Online stats
We have seen good growth in  
our social media figures since the 
launch of The Lifestore. With over 
178,000 Facebook followers, and 
engagement growing over 20%, 
this is just one way we are 
increasing engagement with  
our customers online.

+20%

Online engagement growth

178,000

Facebook followers

4

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018JD WILLIAMS 
REVENUE (%)

 3.2%

Becki

Beth

Jane

The people behind  
the new brand

Q:  Why did you feel compelled  
to create the Midster report?

Q:  Tell us about the JD Williams 

product offering

A: Beth – Middle age is no longer that 
middle ground between young and old 
– it is a vibrant stage of life that is now 
starting to be recognised as a distinct, 
exciting phase full of new possibilities. 
These days, women are better defined 
by their attitudes, passions, interests and 
ambition, rather than just a number, so  
we wanted to lift the lid on this and talk 
openly about these subjects.

Q:  What was the thinking behind  
the repositioning of the brand?

A: Beth – We recognised that women  
in their 40s and 50s were misunderstood 
and underserved. Contrary to beliefs, 
these women are entering the happiest 
years of their lives – “middle” aged does 
not imply “crisis”! They’ve reached a 
stage in their lives where they know 
themselves better than ever and they 
feel less guilty about looking after 
themselves a little more. We listened  
to our customers’ needs and wanted  
to empower them and bring to them  
a brand which inspires them to live life  
to the full on their own terms.

 More detail p36

A: Jane – The product has been built 
around the unique attitude and needs  
of the 45+ woman – we design specifically 
with ‘Her’ in mind and we understand our 
customers’ bodies in a way that other 
retailers don’t. We take into account  
the way bodies change with age and 
provide clothes that are on trend and  
in fashion but are relevant to her. We 
consider all occasions and we design to 
offer solutions to the challenges women 
face as they grow older, considering fabric, 
sleeve length and styling details to help 
her look and feel great.

Q:  What has the reaction been  

to the relaunch?

A: Becki – The reaction from our customers 
has been overwhelmingly positive – one of 
our customers said “the fact that I can buy 
homewares, wide-calf boots, clothes, 
underwear – everything under one roof and 
the new fresh look makes me look and feel 
more positive”. For us, it’s about ensuring 
that these women are represented – and 
celebrated! We’re really pleased with the 
performance since we relaunched the 
brand – excluding the drag from recently 
migrated Fifty Plus customers, JD Williams 
revenue was up double digit for the year  
as a whole.

5

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Powered by People 
continued

Gareth

Ross 

Mandy

85.8%

Customer satisfaction score

Over

2000

user experience tests  

The people shaping 
customer experience

Q:  How will Simply Be Perks  
increase brand loyalty?

business, alongside a significant cost saving 
versus ad hoc market research agency fees.

A: Mandy – We wanted to let our 
customers know how important they  
are to us and give them something back 
as a thank you for their loyalty. We offer 
rewards designed to fit our customers 
perfectly by using internal data to tailor 
rewards to a customer’s lifestyle and 
known buying preferences, such as 
beauty products, or discounts on certain 
products. Our simple opt-in rewards 
programme encourages long-term  
loyalty by giving everyone, not just high 
spenders, monthly perks. How and what 
we reward our customers is central to  
the rewards programme and having 
data-driven decisions underpin our 
programme has helped us to exceed our 
members’ expectations. Our Simply Be 
customers are highly digital so it was  
also important that we developed the 
functionality for our customers to view 
their rewards, interact with the Perks hub 
and redeem their rewards via all our online 
channels, including our Simply Be app. 

Q:  What insights have you gained from 
your customer panels and User 
Experience (UX) labs? 

A: Gareth – Our customer panels  
are a great way to gain real customer 
opinions and insights on a whole host  
of topics; from our product offering  
to feedback on our latest TV ad. Based  
on the findings we have driven a 
number of actions throughout the 

A: Ross – The user experience labs we run 
give us a much deeper understanding of 
how our customers use our websites and 
apps. The tools on our sites allow us to 
conduct hundreds of experiments to 
scientifically prove which experiences 
improve satisfaction and ultimately revenue.

Q:  How popular has the delivery 
subscription service been?

A: Mandy – We are really pleased with  
the uptake of our delivery subscription.  
We launched the offer for our Jacamo 
customers over a year ago and we’ve  
seen a double-digit increase in both order 
frequency and net sales per customer. We 
are always looking for ways to improve our 
offering for our customers and this has been 
another successful step in delivering the best  
possible service to our customers.

Q:  What have the upgrades to the  

Simply Be app meant for customers?

A: Ross – The subsequent releases to our  
iOS and Android Simply Be apps have meant 
that we can continue to improve our offering, 
including features such as recently viewed 
items and predictive search, and ultimately 
the experience for our customers. With an 
App store rating of 4.8 out of 5, we are seeing 
the results of these improvements first hand. 
By investing in our in-house app development 
capabilities we can embed fortnightly releases 
to improve the functionality and features of 
our apps and roll out onto our other brands.

6

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018The  
passion

behind delivering  
the best customer 
experience

Driving sales by refining  
the customer experience
Improving our app offering 
We have seen some encouraging 
results with our Simply Be iOS and 
Android apps, with over 100,000 
downloads across both platforms. 
In February, we launched the 
JD Williams app; our first app on 
our own platform and an important 
step in bringing our technology 
capabilities in-house.

Launch of Simply Be Perks 
After seeing positive results from 
the initial pilot of our new rewards 
programme, Simply Be Perks, we 
launched to our whole Simply Be 
customer base in April 2018. 
Designed to engage with our 
customers on a personal and 
emotional basis, driving loyalty 
based upon a genuine value 
exchange, we have created a new 
experience to increase brand love 
and advocacy with our customers.

Customer panels and UX 
labs allowing agile ways  
of learning
A combination of user experience 
labs and testing, and our customer 
panels, which we have across all 
three of our Power Brands, allow 
us to easily and quickly gain real 
customer insights and the ability 
to test and learn in an agile way.

Capturing customer loyalty 
with delivery subscriptions 
With a delivery subscription 
available on five of our key brands 
entitling customers to 12 months 
unlimited next day or nominated 
delivery for £9.95, we are seeing 
encouraging results demonstrating 
the loyalty we are driving through 
this offer.

7

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018+550bps

Financial Services gross margin

120bps

Improvement in arrears rate

FINANCIAL 
SERVICES (%)

 3.5%

Revenue growth

Powered by People 
continued

Stuart
Chris

Chris

The people behind  
Financial Services

Q:  How has the quality of the 

customer loan book changed  
this year?

A: Stuart – The quality of our book has 
improved during each of the past few 
years, which you can see through our 
provision and arrears rates. We’ve 
improved our lending decisions, which 
has significantly reduced the number  
of first time credit defaulters and our 
fraud rates, and at the back end of the 
book we’ve been proactive in helping 
customers in financial difficulties, in 
many cases reducing or freezing the 
interest we charge them during this 
process. All of these we’ve been doing 
for several years now, and we continue 
to benefit from these actions.

Q:  Could you tell us more about  
the changes you made to 
minimum payment changes,  
and what you saw as a result?

A: Chris – We are always trying to find 
ways to give our customers more choice 
and flexibility in how they shop with us 
and how they manage their finances. 
With the uncertain economic outlook we 
anticipated that pressure on household 
incomes was likely to increase. To ease 
this pressure, we took the decision to 
reduce the minimum payment required 
for the personal credit account. 

 More detail p39

8

Most of our customers pay more than the 
minimum payment in any case, but, as we all 
know from a personal perspective, there are 
times of the year when we all want to spread 
the costs a bit more.

A: Stuart – The customer take up was 
greater than we expected, and the area 
where we saw the biggest effect – which 
was a positive for both customers and us  
as a business – was in arrears, with far more 
customers paying the minimum charge  
and therefore not getting behind on  
their payments.

Q:  How are you using new technology in 
Financial Services, and how important 
is this going forward?

A: Chris – I view this as an important and 
also really exciting part of my role. There is 
so much to be gained – be that in terms of 
efficiencies, growth opportunities or just 
working smarter – from using innovative 
new technologies. I’m particularly excited 
about the latest developments in FinTech, 
for instance how AI is being used and the 
increased access to data across the banking 
industry. All of these developments should 
allow us to further improve the experience 
and ease of shopping for our customers.

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018The 
expertise

behind informed  
decisions

Driving innovation  
in Financial Services
Lower interest rate trials
This year we’ve run several 
risk-based variable interest rate 
trials, all in preparation for the full 
rollout of variable APR with our 
new Financial Services systems. 
This new platform went live on 
High & Mighty in July and will  
be rolled out to our other brands 
going forward, starting with 
Fashion World in the second  
half of FY19. 

In late FY17 we introduced lower 
headline rates for new customers 
on our Power Brands, which 
continues to see encouraging 
results. This year we also trialled 
risk based pricing for a subset of 
existing credit customers to gain 
learnings on customer behaviour 
and outcomes before our full 
system is rolled out.

Minimum payment changes
At the end of the first half we 
reduced our minimum payment 
requirement from 5% to 4%.  
We did this to give customers  
even more flexibility to manage 
their finances. We saw a significant 
effect on Financial Services gross 
margin, as a result of a better than 
expected reduction in the number 
of customers getting into financial 
arrears, a positive dynamic.  
Our overall approach to credit 
customer risk management and 
lending remains unchanged.

Technological innovation
We continue to innovate and use 
emerging technologies to further 
improve our Financial Services 
capabilities. Working with partners, 
we’re now trialling using virtual 
interviews and utilising social data  
to access richer information which 
we could use for lending decisions. 
We’ve also gone live with a trial 
using Artificial Intelligence (AI) in our 
credit and fraud decision making.

9

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Powered by People 
continued

The  
energy

behind our 
international  
expansion

Our new approach is successfully  
accelerating our growth in the USA

Focusing our marketing 
investment on  
digital channels
We have served US customers  
for several years, under both the 
Simply Be and JD Williams brands. 
This year we changed our marketing 
approach in the country, significantly 
reducing our use of paper and  
mail order marketing techniques,  
and instead focusing on digital 
marketing channels such as social 
media, influencers and further 
investment in our online content  
and user experience. 

The launch of Global  
Ship Anywhere
We’ve recently gone live with a 
technology solution which will enable 
us to serve customers anywhere in the 
world. This third-party solution allows 
for currency and language translation 
and is an important next step in our 
international ambitions.

New international 
partnerships with  
Zalando, Navabi, Namshi,  
Lamoda and THE ICONIC
Our partnerships involve us selling 
capsule collections of Simply Be,  
and in some cases Jacamo, through 
other retailers’ sites. This allows us  
to generate higher revenue and grow 
our brand awareness whilst providing 
an important income stream of the 
future. Last year we went live on 
ASOS and Tesco, and this year we’ve 
launched on Zalando, Navabi, 
Namshi, Lamoda and THE ICONIC.

10

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Jen

Arieta

Rich

Simon

The people 
driving our 
international  
growth

 More detail p38

US 
revenue 
+21% in 
the second 
half

Constant currency terms

Q:  What role do you see  

influencers playing in growing  
US brand awareness?

A: Arieta – Influencers, be they bloggers, 
vloggers or Instagrammers, are becoming 
an increasingly important part of our 
marketing mix. They provide us with  
the opportunity to get huge reach  
and become part of our customers’ 
conversations. Working in partnerships 
with influencers provides us with a highly 
engaged and in-tune audience to spread 
the word of our brands. We try to make 
sure that everyone we work with,  
whether they’re our models, stylists  
or photographers, is socially connected 
with our customers.

Q:  Looking forward, what’s in store 
overseas in the coming year?

A: Rich – This year was an opportunity  
to test marketing messages, channels 
and above all new content. We also 
created our first bespoke collection 
specifically for our US customers. We 
worked with specific US models and 
influencers and created content that was 
shot, produced and created for the local 
audience. In addition, it is important for 
customers, influencers, celebrities and 
members of the media to ‘touch and feel’ 
our product. With this in mind we will be 
creating experiential activities that will 
showcase our fashion credentials and 
demonstrate our expertise in fit.

Q:  What will Global Ship  

Anywhere give the business?

A: Jen – The release was an important 
milestone for us as it opens the door to 
so many countries that we haven’t been 
able to serve before. Using a third-party 
solution improves the efficiency, and also 
reduces the risk for us. We’re looking 
forward to getting valuable insight into 
where in the world our brands resonate 
best with customers, which will then 
enable us to invest more time and  
efforts into these countries.

Q:  How are your partnerships  

going, and how do you see this  
area developing in the future?

A: Simon – We’re really pleased with 
performance so far, and partners are 
keen to work with us – plus size is one of 
the fastest growing parts of the clothing 
market globally, and we believe – and our 
customers tell us – that we understand  
fit better than anyone. Selling capsule 
collections through partners is therefore 
a win-win – they get a great plus-size 
brand to offer their customers, and we 
earn incremental revenue and grow 
brand awareness. We’re delighted with 
the partners we’ve started working with 
over the past year and are speaking to 
quite a few more, so I think this will 
continue to be a growth area for us.

11

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018At a Glance

What we do

Power Brands

An online department store, offering style for 45-plus customers 
and their families, with ranges for women, men, home and kids. 
Focusing on shape and fits that flatter, we create unique silhouettes, 
rather than scaling patterns; we use real bodies, rather than static 
mannequins; we design our products to fit – a unique and age 
appropriate point of view to empower women to feel their best. 

REVENUE GROWTH (%)

REVENUE PERFORMANCE (M)

 3.2%

£163.4m

Simply Be has empowered women for over a decade to express 
their true selves through perfect-fitting style, whatever their shape, 
whatever their size. The brand is gaining significant momentum 
both here in the UK as well as in the US market. 

REVENUE GROWTH (%)

REVENUE PERFORMANCE (M)

 16.3%

£132.8m

A modern, challenger brand with a strong digital offer, Jacamo 
wants men of all shapes and sizes to look good and to enjoy 
fashion to express their own style. Collections are available  
in a market-leading range of sizes, from Small to 5XL.

REVENUE GROWTH (%)

REVENUE PERFORMANCE (M)

 5.1%

£68.6m

Revenue growth percentages are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

12

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018We are structured in a matrix  
approach, buying by product  
category and marketing by 
brand. This allows us to run a 
portfolio of brands effectively 
and efficiently. All of our brands 
sell a wide range of clothing  
and homewares products.

Our three Power Brands are our  
growth engines; here we aim to gain  
new customers and grow market share. 
Our Secondary Brands are also in  
growing markets, however they are  
more niche and we therefore aim to  
grow share of existing customer spend. 

Our Traditional Segment has an online 
penetration of just under 40%, with online 
growing as a channel and offline (catalogues) 
declining significantly. Going forward, we will 

focus our efforts on the online channel 
within Traditional, and would expect the 
offline element to therefore reduce over 
time. This will ensure that we continue to 
offer customers a great product offering, 
whilst allowing us to generate efficiencies. 

Our Financial Services business operates 
across all brands, with the younger brands 
typically having a higher penetration of 
sales sold through credit. 

Secondary Brands

Traditional Segment

Secondary Brands focus on distinct 
customer niches which are not served  
by our Power Brands. These brands  
have significant customer loyalty, good 
growth prospects and are increasingly 
online. We view our Power Brands as 
having the greatest growth potential 
medium term, however, and therefore  
our focus here is predominantly on  
our existing customers.

REVENUE GROWTH (%)

 3.8%

REVENUE PERFORMANCE (M)

£149.2m

The titles in this segment are focused  
on serving our loyal, traditional and 
typically more mature customers. These 
customers tend to prefer paper-based 
marketing, such as catalogues and 
direct-mail offers. This is an attractive  
and accessible market, underserved  
by other retailers, and whilst not  
a future growth driver we generate  
a good financial return.

REVENUE GROWTH (%)

 3.3%

REVENUE PERFORMANCE (M)

£138.6m

Financial Services

An important part of our overall proposition, strengthening customer 
loyalty and enabling our retail business to thrive. In order to offer our 
customers excellent convenience and flexibility, we allow customers to  
either pay us immediately or utilise a credit account for their purchases, 
spreading the cost of their purchases over time.

Revenue growth percentages are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

REVENUE GROWTH (%)

 3.5%

REVENUE PERFORMANCE (M)

£269.6m

13

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Chairman’s Statement

A year of significant 
market share gains

Against a challenging 
sector backdrop we 
delivered a good set of 
figures, with particularly 
strong performances 
from both Simply Be and 
Financial Services. I would 
like to thank all our 
colleagues across the 
business for their 
continued passion  
and dedication. 

ANDREW HIGGINSON 
Chairman

A STRONG POWER  
BRAND PERFORMANCE:

+8.0%

Revenue increase

+2.4%

Increase in active  
customers

FINANCIAL SERVICES 
PERFORMANCE DRIVEN  
BY ONGOING GOOD QUALITY OF 
THE CUSTOMER LOAN BOOK:

+3.5%

Financial Services  
revenue

STRONG  
ONLINE METRICS:

+10%

Online revenue yoy

76%

Of all traffic from  
mobile devices

All figures presented on this page are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

14

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Looking back on the year 
This year has seen the business make 
further good progress with the strategy 
Angela put in place when she joined, with 
continued strong growth in the Power 
Brands, online penetration and market 
shares. The backdrop remains challenging, 
and was particularly competitive in the 
second half, and we are not immune to 
this. Financial Services provides the Group 
with additional resilience, however, and this 
can be seen in the financial performance 
this year. 

Dividend 
We recognise the importance of cash returns 
to our shareholders. Against a backdrop of 
continued investment in the business to 
ensure future sustainable growth, we are 
pleased to be recommending an unchanged 
dividend on last year. 

Board changes 
This year has seen further changes to  
the Board, as it continues to evolve, in line 
with the changing shape of the business. 
As announced in last year’s report, Fiona 
Laird stepped down from the Board in 
January, following her appointment to 
the Board of Newell Brands Inc in the USA. 
At the same time, I was very pleased to 
welcome two new Non-Executive Board 
members, Gill Barr and Michael Ross. Both 
bring with them very relevant expertise 
and knowledge, and have already added 
valuable insight to the Group. 

Gill is a Non-Executive Director of 
PayPoint plc and Wincanton plc, and a 
Trustee Director of Willis Towers Watson’s 
master trust, LifeSight Ltd. She is also the 
Chair of the Customer Challenge Group 
for Severn Trent Water Plc. She was 
previously Group Marketing Director  
of The Co-operative Group, Marketing 
Director of John Lewis and also spent  
time at Kingfisher Plc in a variety of  
senior strategy, marketing and business 
development roles. 

Michael Ross is the Co-founder and Chief 
Scientist of DynamicAction, a leader in big 
data analytics and AI for retail. He is also  
a Non-Executive Director of Sainsbury’s 
Bank, and sits on the commercial 
development board at the Turing Institute. 
He was previously the co-founder and 
CEO of figleaves.com. Michael started his 
career at McKinsey consulting in the early 
days of the internet.

Reflecting on my time as Chairman
After serving nearly six years as Chairman, 
I am stepping down in order to pursue 
opportunities in Private Equity. The Board 
has recruited Matt Davies, who joined us as 
Non-Executive Director and Chairman Elect 
in February, and will take over as Chairman 
when I step down on 1 May 2018. 

Over the five years I have been with  
the Group it has been through an 
unprecedented period of transformation. 
This change programme has not been 
without its challenges, and there have also 
been external shocks and legacy issues we 
have needed to deal with along the way. 

One of the biggest changes over the  
past few years has been in people, with 
the vast majority of both the Board and 
the Operating Board joining the Group 
over the past five years. This has been  
an important step forward in ensuring  
that the Group has the expertise and 
experience to guide it on its path to an 
online retail model, driven by customers 
but fuelled by technology. 

There has been material people change 
throughout the business, with many new 
colleagues joining, bringing new skills and 
capabilities. Much has been done to follow 
our customers as technology has changed 
the way people shop and interact with 
retailers. This affects everything in the 
business from how we buy and source 
product, to how we sell and distribute  
to our customers. We have also made 
strides increasing the transparency of our 
Financial Services business and obtaining 
our full authorisation from the FCA.

People change is never an easy aspect of any 
business transformation and I would like to 
thank all colleagues for their passion, energy 
and dedication to the Group throughout my 
tenure. As the title of this report says, 
N Brown is truly ‘powered by people’. 

I have thoroughly enjoyed my time at 
N Brown. It has been a privilege to Chair 
the Group and I look forward to following 
its progress in the coming years under 
Matt’s excellent leadership. 

Andrew Higginson 
Chairman

Welcoming  
Matt Davies  
as Chairman

We are delighted to welcome  
Matt Davies to N Brown. Matt is a 
first-class retailer and brings a wealth 
of experience of retail and online 
businesses. He will be a strong 
addition to the N Brown Board, 
bringing knowledge, leadership and 
customer focus. He has a proven track 
record of value creation across retail 
and online.

Matt was CEO of Tesco UK and ROI 
until the end of April 2018, having 
been appointed in May 2015. During 
his time at Tesco he successfully led 
the turnaround of the UK business. 
Prior to Tesco, Matt was CEO of 
Halfords from 2012 to 2015 and 
Finance Director (2001-2004) and 
CEO (2004-2012) of Pets at Home. 

“ I am delighted and excited 
to be taking on this role.  
I am really looking forward 
to working with Angela, 
her team and my fellow 
Non-Executive Directors to 
further develop and grow 
the N Brown business.”

Matt Davies 
Incoming Chairman

15

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Market Review

Good performance  
in a challenging market

Global trends
The global economic backdrop remains 
uncertain, with the transition and exit from 
the EU the biggest uncertainty at present. 
Exiting the EU presents our business with 
some potential challenges, particularly in 
terms of reliance of EU workers through 
our distribution network. We are working 
to ensure that the impact to our customers 
and our business is minimised as much  
as possible. 

Demographic trends 
Improvements in healthcare and lifestyle 
are resulting in an ageing UK population, 
with 18% of the population aged 65+ 
according to latest figures from ONS. 
Obesity levels have steadily increased over 
the last 15 years, and with latest reports 
from the Health Survey for England 
showing the highest levels in 55-64 year 
olds, our size and age inclusive approach 
are important differentiators which benefit 
from these population trends. 

Trends

The market remains highly 
competitive, with retailers facing 
cost pressures from high inflation 
as a result of the depreciation  
of sterling following the EU 
referendum, and households 
carefully managing their 
disposable income. The health 
and beauty sector is expected  
to continue to see an uplift as 
consumers seek to find small, 
inexpensive luxury purchases.

Retail 
Health and beauty gaining 
momentum in a highly 
competitive market.

How we are responding

Opportunities for growth

Continuing to invest in great  
value products.

Continuing to improve our health 
and beauty offering by partnering 
with new brands.

+60bps

Ladieswear market share

We already benefit from strong 
customer loyalty, driven by our  
fit specialism and, for some 
customers, personal shopping 
account. The launch of delivery 
subscriptions and other loyalty 
drivers such as Simply Be Perks 
should further strengthen 
customer loyalty. By increasing 
our third-party brand and 
product offering, we are widening 
share of basket to sectors which 
are seeing the biggest growth 
and offering customers even  
greater choice.

16

Macro-
economic 
trends
High inflation  
leading to  
economic  
pressures.

How we are responding

We continue to aim to mitigate 
input costs as much as possible, 
working closely with our suppliers 
and moving supply nearer to the 
UK in some cases.

We hedge our dollar buying 
requirements on a rolling basis,  
to give us clarity over our  
buying rates.

Our International business 
provides a small natural hedge 
which is a key area of focus as one 
of our strategic growth levers.

Online
Shopping globally  
is increasingly 
online; the British 
Retail Consortium 
estimates that over 
20% of all non-food 
retail spending now 
takes place online.

How we are responding

Continuous improvements  
to customer experience, for 
example through personalisation 
and app development.

Our new web platform will further 
improve our trading agility.

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Trends

Consumer spending has been 
under pressure due to falling  
real wage growth for some time, 
and this is widely expected to 
continue. Inflationary pressures 
remain across the retail sector. 
Exchange rates have stabilised 
somewhat since the EU 
referendum however remain 
unpredictable going forward. 

Opportunities for growth

The introduction of the UK Living 
Wage has resulted in some cost 
increases, particularly in our 
distribution centre, however 
unlike many of our competitors 
we don’t have a large store 
estate, which puts us in a 
relatively stronger position. Our 
personal credit account facility 
enables customers to spread  
the cost of their purchases over 
time, which is a helpful customer 
service proposition, particularly 
when real household incomes  
are under pressure. 

Trends

Despite GlobalData reporting 
that online growth will fall  
year-on-year in the next five 
years, this is merely due to 
penetration saturating as the 
growth of online will see sales 
making up over one fifth of the 
retail market by 2023. Online 
expenditure for the clothing and 
footwear market is set to increase 
by almost 40% between 2018 and 
2023, a promising outlook as our  
online penetration increases.

Opportunities for growth

As an online retailer, we continue 
to make improvements to win 
more share online and to further 
improve the customer experience. 

73%

demand was generated online

 More detail p39

Trends

The retail credit market continues  
to grow year-on-year, with data from 
the Finance and Leasing Association 
revealing that the market grew by  
9% in 2017. The competition which  
the retail credit market faces from 
other lending products means we  
are continuing to look at ways to 
improve our offering and innovate 
within this space. 

Opportunities for growth

Ahead of our new Financial Services 
system being rolled out across our 
brands we have been trialling offering 
lower interest rates for new customers 
on our three Power Brands, which  
has performed well. We are also 
continuing to optimise the customer 
purchase journey, for both cash and 
credit customers. 

Consumer 
credit 
Continuing 
improvement  
in the quality  
of our customer 
loan book.

How we are responding

Our new financial services system  
will allow us to charge variable  
interest rates reflective of individual 
customers’ risk profile, which, in turn, 
will make us more competitive in our 
credit offering.

We constantly monitor the health  
of our customer loan book, and have 
seen the quality of the book improve 
further this year. 

Ethical sourcing 

SOURCING BREAKDOWN FY18

As a business our key territory still 
continues to be China, particularly 
for homewares. For clothing, our 
buying trends are moving the mix 
closer to home.

This enables improved in-season 
flexibility and planning, delivering 
shorter lead times and providing key 
seasonal products to the customer 
at the right time.

Excludes direct 
dispatch products. 

China
UK
India
Pakistan
Bangladesh
ROW
Sri Lanka
Turkey
Hong Kong
Thailand

17

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Business Model

Creating value

Inputs 

Core activities 

Brand portfolio
We operate a trusted family of retail brands, 
focused on fashion that fits. Our primary 
growth drivers are our Power Brands – 
JD Williams, Simply Be and Jacamo.  
We sell ladieswear, menswear, footwear, 
homewares and gifting across our brands.

 – 3 Power Brands
 – Secondary Brands
 – Traditional Segment

£652.6m 

Total brand portfolio revenue 2018

Engaged customer base
Strengthening customer loyalty and  
gaining new customers is crucial for 
sustainable growth. We put the customer  
at the centre of every decision we make.

+3.6%

Active customers

N Brown people
Without our people and relentless enthusiasm 
and passion we couldn’t do what we do.  
They are our single most important asset. 

2,600

People employed across the UK

Systems and infrastructure
Ongoing development and investment  
in our systems and infrastructure remains 
crucial against a competitive sector. Our IT 
investment approach this year has been to 
prioritise and focus on the developments  
that deliver the highest returns, such as 
Global Ship Anywhere and mobile apps. 

76% (+5ppts)

Traffic from mobile devices

Retail products
Without great products we have nothing. Our fit  
specialism, at great value for money, is our USP.

Marketing

In-house 
design team

RETAIL
RETAIL

Sourcing and  
merchandising

Quality 
and fit

Financial Services
Our Financial Services offer enables customers  
to spread the cost of their purchase over time.

Cash 
customers

Modernising 
our offer

FINANCIAL

Credit  
customer base

18

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018GUSTO shapes our culture. GUSTO celebrates 
positive attitudes and behaviours. GUSTO is  
how we do things around here.

– Glow with pride

– Understanding is everything

– Saving makes sense

– Togetherness is crucial 

– Opportunity exists everywhere 

Value 

Financial outputs 

Retail products

£652.6m 

Total product revenue 2018

+4.1%

Increase in revenue

Percentage 
of product 
revenue

Value back to shareholders
Our shareholders are very important to us, and we  
value the support and input they give us. We are 
focused on a progressive dividend policy.

  More detail p22

  More detail p34

14.23p

Dividend to shareholders

Value back into business  
to drive future growth
We invest into our business to ensure that we can drive 
profitable, sustainable growth in the years ahead. 

£39.2m

Capex in 2018

JD Williams 
Simply Be 
Jacamo 
Secondary Brands 
Traditional Segment 

25%
20%
11%
23%
21%

Non-financial outputs

Customer satisfaction
We’re proud to make great products that people  
love. Our clothes generate a feel-good factor for  
our customers.

Financial Services

£269.6m 

Total Financial Services  
revenue 2018

+3.5%

Increase in revenue

Responsibility
We believe we should be a major force for good as  
well as a major force in fashion. It’s a huge responsibility, 
and a purpose way beyond profit.

All People
Dignity and  
respect through 
people

Every 
Product
Responsible

One Planet
Ways of working

Revenue growth percentages are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

19

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Chief Executive’s Review

Focused on our 
growth strategy

Our strategy continues  
to deliver results, with  
market share gains in the  
UK, US revenue up 21%  
in the second half, new 
partnerships underway  
and almost three quarters  
of our revenues now  
coming online. 

ANGELA SPINDLER 
Chief Executive

KEY HIGHLIGHTS:

+17%

Power Brand online  
revenue growth

+21%

US H2 revenue growth,  
constant currency

Revenue growth percentages are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

20

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Overview
We continue to benefit from the significant 
changes made to the business over the 
past four years, and these, together with 
a strong performance in our Financial 
Services business, enabled us to deliver a 
good performance for the year as a whole, 
in a challenging market. 

I am delighted to be reporting profit 
growth, with Simply Be the standout 
brand. The second half in particular was 
difficult for the fashion sector. A good 
performance in Financial Services 
provided the Group with resiliency to 
enable us to continue to invest in our 
customer offer, successfully driving 
revenue and market share growth. 

Power Brands continued to outperform, 
with revenue up 8.0%. Within this, 
JD Williams revenue was up 3.2%. There 
was a headwind from migrated Fifty Plus 
customers; excluding these, JD Williams 
revenue was up a double-digit percentage. 
Simply Be was up 16.3% and Jacamo up 
5.1%. We saw a good performance across 
all categories, with Footwear and 
Accessories a standout performer. 

We continue to deliver strong online 
metrics, with online revenue up 10%  
and online revenue of Power Brands  
up 17%. Online penetration was 73%,  
up 4ppts, with 76% of all traffic coming 
from mobile devices. 

We had a strong Financial Services 
performance, driven by continued 
improvement in the quality of the loan 
book, together with a reduction in  
arrears, partly as a result of minimum 
payment changes. 

Technology and innovation 
Our systems investment programme 
remains on track. We are pleased with the 
performance of the High & Mighty and US 
sites, which are both on the new Hybris 
platform. Since the sites go-live we have 
been releasing regular updates to add 
further functionality and optimise 

Our strategic drivers:

performance. We are targeting the 
second half of FY19 for Fashion World to 
migrate onto the new platform. We will 
optimise the timing of these migrations 
to mitigate any commercial risk.

At the start of the new financial year we 
went live with Global Ship Anywhere. This 
is the key enabler for wider international 
growth outside of our current US and 
Ireland sites. This functionality translates 
currency and overlays our site with local 
delivery and payment options.

We have seen some encouraging results 
with our Simply Be iOS and Android 
apps, with over 100,000 downloads 
across both platforms. Update releases 
to our apps have enabled us to continue 
to improve our offering, including 
features such as recently viewed items 
and predictive search, further improving 
the experience for our customers. Our 
App store rating is currently 4.8 out of 5. 
In February, we launched the JD Williams 
app; our first in-house developed app,  
an important step in bringing our app 
development capabilities in-house.  
By investing in our in-house development 
capabilities we can embed fortnightly 
releases to improve the functionality and 
features of our apps and plan to roll out 
apps onto our other brands in the future.

Outlook
The market backdrop remains 
challenging and as competitive as ever. 
We will continue to invest in our product 
proposition and service offering, to 
ensure we further strengthen customer 
loyalty. We have an industry-leading fit 
specialism and market leading position 
in our plus-size niche. We will continue to 
work with passion, energy and relentless 
focus to further build on this position. 

Angela Spindler
Chief Executive

Product
Fantastic quality and fit fashion, home 
ranges, and relevant financial services 

People
Obsessed with customers, enriched 
with data and powered by technology

Price
Great prices and flexible ways to pay

Place
Whatever you want, wherever you are, 
whenever you want it, we make it easy

Growth levers

Gain share in the UK
We are focused on continual improvement 
in our customer experience, further 
development of our product offer and 
enhancing our brand cut-through. This 
growth lever is further driven by increasing 
the number of third-party brands on our 
websites, many of which are extended to 
larger sizes on an exclusive basis, offering 
more choice to our customers. 

During the year we gained market share in 
the UK in both ladieswear and menswear. 
We continue to improve the flexibility of 
our supply chain, reducing lead times and 
our speed to market. Our websites offer 
customers a wide range of brands, allowing 
them to shop for every occasion; we have 
recently added brands including Monsoon, 
Quiz, Jack & Jones, Ted Baker, Lyle & Scott, 
Radley and Superga. 

International expansion
The USA is our first priority, however, we 
also intend to expand to other countries, 
initially through Global Ship Anywhere 
technology, which recently went live. 
In order to achieve our international 
ambitions we will leverage our current 
organisational capabilities and embed 
a global culture throughout our business. 
US revenue accelerated through the year, 
growing by 21% in the second half, driven 
by our new digital-first marketing approach 
and enabled by our new web platform.

Partnerships
This includes selling capsule ranges on 
other retailers’ sites, on both a wholesale 
and marketplace basis. We also see a 
significant growth opportunity in influencer 
marketing, working together with bloggers 
and opinion formers to enable our brands 
to reach new audiences and further 
strengthen customer engagement.

During the second half we went live on  
ASOS and Zalando, and have recently signed 
partnership deals with THE ICONIC (Australia) 
and Lamoda (Russia). All of our partnerships 
involve us selling capsule collections of our 
brands on our partners’ sites. We are pleased 
with the performance to date.

We have increased our use of influencer 
marketing, most notably in the USA.  
These activities have been very successful 
in strengthening our customer relationships, 
increasing our share of voice and driving 
sales. Examples of recent influencer 
collaborations include Sarina Novak  
(@SarinaNovak; 372k followers) who worked 
with us on the Simply Be USA relaunch, 
La’Tecia Thomas (@lateciat; 806k followers) 
for our Swim and Spring Break campaigns 
and Kelly Augustine (@kellyaugustineb;  
63k followers) for our Valentine’s Day activity.

21

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Our Strategy

Four drivers 
of success

Our vision

To be the globally  
loved experts in  
fashion that fits.

Our mission

We’ll do this by helping 
our customers look and  
feel amazing through  
our trusted family  
of fashion brands.

Product
Fantastic quality 
and fit fashion, 
home ranges,  
and relevant 
financial services

Price
Great prices  
and flexible  
ways to pay

Relevance
Great product is the lifeblood of our business – it is the 
absolute core of what we do.

Progress 2017
We strive to continuously improve our product offering, 
both in terms of our retail and Financial Services products. 
All product categories saw positive revenue growth, a 
good result, with Simply Be the standout brand. We have 
continued to invest in our product design capabilities, and 
are also moving to 3D product fitting to further improve 
our fit specialism. 

Priorities 2018
We will roll out 3D fitting across womenswear, cementing 
our differentiated position. Menswear delivered a good 
performance however we see scope for further growth in 
this category. In Financial Services, we plan to go live with 
full variable APR in the second half, a significant milestone. 

Associated risks
•  Failure to change
•  Competition
•  Regulatory environment

KPIs

5.6%

Ladieswear 
market share,  
size 16+

2.7%

Menswear  
market share, 
chest size 44”+

27.1%

Group returns 
rate (rolling  
12 months)

Relevance
Value and convenient ways to pay are both as important  
to customers as they have ever been.

Progress 2017
The second half of the year saw a challenging retail market 
backdrop. The strong performance of Financial Services 
allowed us to strategically choose to invest more than 
initially planned in promotions during this period, 
successfully driving both revenue and market share.

Priorities 2018
We continue to ensure that our price points are 
competitive with the mid-market, offering great value 
products throughout the size range. In Financial Services, 
our new platform will give customers more flexible, 
personalised payment options. 

Associated risks
•  Failure to change
•  Competition

KPIs

85.8%

Customer 
satisfaction 
rating, UK CSI

122k

New credit 
recruits (Rollers, 
last six months)

KPIs on this page are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

22

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
 
People
Obsessed with 
customers,  
enriched with  
data and powered 
by technology

Relevance
Without our people and their relentless enthusiasm and 
passion we couldn’t do what we do. They are our most 
important asset.

Progress 2017
We continued to develop our internal talent and hire  
great new people to our business. We launched our  
new intranet and an online leadership development  
hub. Our colleague satisfaction rating reached another 
record high. 

Priorities 2018
We will continue to focus on developing our talent, 
rewarding achievement and instilling a global culture 
throughout the business. 

Associated risks
•  People
•  Competition

KPIs

85.8%

Customer satisfaction  
rating, UK CSI

Place
Whatever you  
want, wherever  
you are, whenever 
you want it, we 
make it easy

Relevance
Customers shop how and when they want, and it is our job 
to exceed their expectations.

Progress 2017
Our speed of delivery improved further, by over 15% year 
on year. We rolled out delivery subscription offers across 
our largest five brands, with positive customer reception. 
We launched our new web platform in the UK for the first 
time, on our High & Mighty site, an important milestone. 

Priorities 2018
We will continue the rollout of our new web platform, with 
Fashion World migrating in the second half. We recently 
went live with Global Ship Anywhere, an important 
enabler for our international growth ambitions. 

Associated risks
•  Failure to change
•  Competition
•  People
•  Cyber security

KPIs

73%

Online 
penetration

5.3%

Conversion  
rate

4.45m

Active customer 
accounts

KPIs on this page are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

23

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
Key Performance Indicators

Measuring progress 
against our strategy

Customers 

ACTIVE CUSTOMER  
ACCOUNTS (m)

+3.6%

POWER BRAND ACTIVE 
CUSTOMERS (m)

GROWTH OF OUR MOST  
LOYAL CUSTOMERS (%)

CUSTOMER SATISFACTION 
RATING (%)

+2.4%

-380bps

+210bps

2017

2018

4.30m

4.45m

2017

2018

2.17m

2017

+3.6%

2.22m

2018

-0.2%

2017

2018

83.7%

85.8%

Relevance to strategy

Relevance to strategy

Relevance to strategy

Relevance to strategy

Definition
The number of customer 
accounts which made a retail 
purchase in the last 12 months. 
The figures include all brands 
aside from Figleaves, which  
is managed separately to  
the Group. 

Performance
We saw a good performance 
in customer metrics, with a very 
strong first half, and then a 
softer second half against 
both a tough comparative and 
competitive backdrop. In line 
with our strategy we continue 
to prioritise new customer 
recruitment to our Power 
Brands, as they represent 
our biggest future growth 
opportunity.

Outlook
We will continue to attract new 
customers to our business 
through our product offering, 
marketing campaigns and 
customer service proposition. 

Definition
The number of Power Brand  
(JD Williams, Simply Be and 
Jacamo) customer accounts 
which made a retail purchase  
in the last 12 months. 

Definition
We define our most loyal 
customers as those who have 
purchased from us in each of 
the last four clothing seasons.

Definition
Our latest overall customer 
satisfaction score, as measured 
independently by the UK 
Customer Services Institute. 

Performance
As with the revenue 
performance, Simply Be was the 
standout performer, with active 
customer growth of over 20% 
The migration of the Fifty Plus 
title into the JD Williams brand 
(these customers are included 
within the JD Williams customer 
file) was a headwind to this 
metric, as expected. 

Performance
After a very strong performance 
last year, driven by the recovery 
in our Traditional segment,  
the number of our most loyal 
customers was broadly flat  
year on year. Given the difficult 
comparatives, and a challenging 
trading backdrop, particularly  
in the second half, this is a  
solid performance. 

Performance
Our most recent rating was 
85.8%. This places us second-
highest in the non-food retail 
sector, behind only Amazon. 
Our score is almost 4ppts higher 
than the retail sector average. 

Outlook
The conversion rate of recently 
migrated Fifty Plus customers 
has been below expectations, 
due to the more conservative 
fashion choices of this group. 
Actions are being taken to 
address this, primarily through 
website personalisation, and the 
early signs are encouraging. We 
therefore expect this headwind 
to reduce in FY19. 

Outlook
Further strengthening customer 
loyalty is a key business focus. 
We do this by a continuous 
improvement approach to our 
product offering, service and 
delivery proposition. Recent 
launches such as delivery 
subscriptions and the Simply Be 
loyalty scheme are both designed 
to further strengthen loyalty. 

Outlook
Customer satisfaction is driven 
by a wide range of factors, such 
as product quality, our value for 
money, our service proposition 
and how we respond when 
things go wrong. We interact 
with our customers through a 
variety of channels every day to 
ensure we are doing the best job 
we can to delight our customers.

Risk
•  Failure to change
•  Competition
•  People
•  Business interruption

Risk
•  Failure to change
•  Competition
•  People

Risk
•  Failure to change
•  Competition

Risk
•  Failure to change
•  Competition
•  People
•  Regulatory environment

KPIs on this page are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

24

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Product

LADIESWEAR MARKET  
SHARE SIZE 16+ (%)

MENSWEAR MARKET SHARE 
CHEST 44"+ (%)

GROUP RETURNS RATE 
(ROLLING 12 MONTHS) (%)

+60bps

+30bps

+30bps

2017

2018

5.0%

2017

2018

5.6%

2.4%

2017

2018

2.7%

26.8%

27.1%

Relevance to strategy

Relevance to strategy

Relevance to strategy

Key to Strategic Drivers

  Product

  Price

  People

  Place

Definition
Our market share in UK 
Ladieswear, in size 16 and 
higher. Market share is 
calculated using internal and 
Kantar data, and these figures 
relate to the 52 weeks ending 
11 February. 

Definition
Our market share in UK 
Menswear, in chest size 44" and 
higher. Market share is calculated 
using internal and Kantar data, 
and these figures relate to the 
52 weeks ending 11 February. 
Last year’s figure has been 
restated; on review they 
understated our market share. 

Performance
Against a challenging market 
we were pleased to grow our 
market share. This performance 
was driven by Simply Be. 

Performance
Against a challenging market 
we were pleased to grow our 
market share. This performance 
was driven by Jacamo. 

Outlook
The trading backdrop remains 
challenging. Against this, it is 
important that we focus on our 
fit USP, ensuring that we continue 
to offer customers the best 
choice of products to fit and 
flatter them, whatever their size. 

Outlook
We continue to see an 
opportunity to grow our market 
share in menswear age 45 and 
above, through the menswear 
offering within JD Williams. 

Definition
The amount, measured in value, 
of products which are returned 
to us by customers, over the last 
12 months.

Performance
We saw a slight increase in our 
returns rate, after several years 
of declines. The main driver of 
this was the relative performance 
of womenswear, together with 
the increase in participation of 
sub-categories such as third-
party brands and occasionwear, 
as these all naturally incur higher 
returns rates. These factors were 
partially offset by the ongoing 
increase in the proportion of cash 
customers, as these customers 
naturally have a lower returns rate 
than credit account customers. 

Outlook
Our returns rate remains below 
the industry average, and over 
the medium term is linked with 
customer satisfaction of our 
product offering, including fit, 
quality and value for money. 

Risk
•  Failure to change
•  Competition
•  People

Risk
•  Failure to change
•  Competition
•  People

Risk
•  Failure to change
•  Competition

KPIs on this page are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

25

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
Key Performance Indicators 
continued

Online

ONLINE PENETRATION  
(%)

ONLINE PENETRATION  
OF NEW CUSTOMERS (%)

CONVERSION RATE  
(%)

TRAFFIC FROM MOBILE 
DEVICES (%)

+4ppts

+4ppts

-30bps

+5ppts

2017

2018

69%

2017

2018

73%

77%

81%

2017

2018

5.6%

5.3%

2017

2018

71%

76%

Relevance to strategy

Relevance to strategy

Relevance to strategy

Relevance to strategy

Definition
The percentage of sales, 
excluding stores and 
International, which comes  
to us online. Our second  
largest channel is through  
our contact centre. 

Definition
The percentage of sales from 
new customers, excluding stores 
and International, which comes 
to us online. 

Definition
The percentage of website 
sessions which result in an order 
being placed.

Definition
The percentage of our total 
online traffic which comes 
from either a smartphone  
or a tablet device.

Performance
Online penetration was 74% in 
the second half, and for the year 
as a whole online revenue was 
up 10%. Some customers are 
unlikely to ever migrate online; 
we estimate that these account 
for roughly half of the non-
online proportion. 

Performance
This metric now exceeds 80%, 
demonstrating the online nature 
of our business. By brand, 
JD Williams again saw the most 
significant increase, from 80% 
to 95%. 

Performance
At 5.3% our conversion rate 
remains materially above the 
industry standard. The ongoing 
increase in mobile devices as a 
proportion of traffic represents 
a drag on overall conversion 
rates; we were pleased to drive 
an increase in the conversion 
rate for smartphones year 
on year. 

Performance
Mobile devices include both 
smartphones and tablets; of 
these, smartphones remain  
the device of choice for 
customers, with web sessions 
here increasing by 44% to 
account for 54% of all traffic.

Outlook
We continue to invest in both 
our online platform, through 
both systems investments and 
in hiring and developing digital 
talent. The online penetration of 
new customers is an important 
leading indicator for overall 
future penetration. 

Outlook
Our new customer recruitment 
campaigns focus primarily on 
online shoppers, and within our 
brand portfolio we continue  
to prioritise our three Power 
Brands, which are all 
predominantly online. We 
would therefore expect this 
metric to continue to increase 
looking forwards. 

Outlook
The continued increase in share 
from mobiles represents a drag 
to the overall conversion rate. 
We are focused on increasing 
the conversion rate of each 
device type.

Outlook
We adopt a ‘mobile first’ 
approach to all of our digital 
improvements, and expect the 
trend of customers shopping 
more and more on their 
smartphones to continue.  
During the year we upgraded our 
Simply Be app and launched new 
Simply Be USA and JD Williams 
apps. We also continue to drive 
further improvements in mobile 
optimisation through our 
in-house digital marketing team. 

Risk
•  Failure to change
•  Competition
•  People
•  Cyber security

Risk
•  Failure to change
•  Competition
•  People
•  Cyber security

Risk
•  Competition
•  People
•  Cyber security

Risk
•  Competition
•  People
•  Cyber security

KPIs on this page are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

26

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
 
 
 
Financial Services

ARREARS RATE  
(>28 DAYS) (%)

-120bps

PROVISIONS RATE 
(%)

-330bps

NEW CREDIT RECRUITS 
(ROLLERS) 

-5%

2017

2018

9.9%

8.7%

2017

2018

10.8%

2017

2018

7.5%

129,000

122,000

Relevance to strategy

Relevance to strategy

Relevance to strategy

Definition
Arrears over 28 days are defined 
as customer debts with two or 
more missed payments. 

Definition
Closing bad debt provision  
as a percentage of gross  
trade receivables. 

Definition
The number of new customers 
opening a credit account and 
rolling a balance in the last 
six months. 

Key to Strategic Drivers

  Product

  Price

  People

  Place

Performance
We saw another strong 
performance in arrears rate, 
down 120bps year on year 
against a 100bps decline in the 
prior year. This was driven by 
the continued improvement  
in the quality of our customer 
loan book, together with the 
reduction in our minimum 
payments, which had a positive 
effect on the number of 
customers going into arrears. 

Performance
The provision rate was 7.5%, 
down 330bps versus last year. 
As in FY17, this benefited from 
the sale of some high risk 
payment arrangement debt, 
which we were able to sell for 
a slightly better rate than book 
value. It also benefitted, to a 
lesser extent, from the minimum 
payment changes and the 
underlying improvement in 
the quality of the book.

Performance
Although over the long term  
we aim to increase new credit 
rollers, the key enabler of this will 
be our new Financial Services 
products which are not yet fully 
live. We saw growth in this 
metric during the first half, and 
then a decline in the second half, 
due to the wider challenging 
market backdrop. For the year as 
a whole we added 257,000 new 
credit rollers, an increase on the 
prior year. 

Outlook
We expect a broadly steady 
arrears rate over the coming year.

Outlook
IFRS9 comes into effect in FY19, 
which will significantly change 
our provision rate accounting. 
You will find more details on this 
within the Financial Review on 
page 43.

Outlook
We continue to trial variable 
interest rates for new 
customers; the results of these 
trials to date are encouraging. 

Risk
•  Failure to change
•  Competition
•  People
•  Cyber security

Risk
•  Failure to change
•  Competition
•  People
•  Regulatory environment

Risk
•  Failure to change
•  Competition
•  People
•  Regulatory environment

KPIs on this page are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

27

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
Risk Management

Protecting the integrity  
of our business strategy

Risk management 
In accordance with the UK Corporate 
Governance Code, the Board of Directors 
is responsible for maintaining sound risk 
management and internal control systems. 
As the pace of change within the Group 
increases, the limitations inherent in any 
system of internal control are likewise 
enhanced and no system can provide 
absolute assurance against material 
misstatement, loss or failure. 

The Board has, therefore, established 
a continuous process for identifying, 
evaluating and managing the significant risks 
facing the Group. This process is intended to 
provide reasonable assurance regarding its 
commercial operations as well as compliance 
with all relevant laws and regulations.

Against this background, and with the 
commercial uncertainty arising from the 
approaching Brexit, the Group’s internal 
auditors facilitated two Board level risk 
assessments and one risk appetite session 
during the financial year. The aim was to 
ensure that key business developments 
and emerging risks are appropriately 

factored into the risk management 
process to enhance strong decision 
making by the Board. 

All members of the Executive Board of 
Directors (including the Chief Executive and 
Chief Financial Officers) identified, ranked, 
scored and reviewed the key risks facing 
the business and appraised the structure of 
internal controls. The Board members also 
identified and considered their appetite for 
risk in each of the identified areas and 
proposed additional activities and controls 
to mitigate the risks and bridge the gaps 
between risk and appetite.

The Audit Committee was provided 
with and discussed the outputs from this 
process which were also used by internal 
audit as a key driver in developing the 
annual internal audit plan.

Internal audit also undertook an enterprise 
wide mapping of key processes and 
activities across all departments and 
business functions to assess the level of 
risk within each activity. The output from 
this process was also reflected in the 
annual audit plan.

The Group’s Three Lines of Defence model, 
which documents the internal and external 
sources of assurance provided across the 
business, was maintained by internal audit. 
The adequacy of coverage over corporate 
risks at operational, oversight and assurance 
lines of defence was reviewed and the 
output from this process reported to  
the Audit Committee. Appropriate 
responsibilities and accountabilities for 
assurance at first line have been set to 
ensure that there is ownership of the actions 
required to mitigate risk across the business.

Monitoring of key compliance policies  
and regulatory requirements is now 
established and provides assurance over 
Financial Services and GDPR. The Financial 
Services Compliance team and the Data 
Governance team both play key roles in 
the mitigation of regulatory risks across 
the business. 

Risk Committee
Operational management is asked to 
present on a cyclical basis on the progress 
of agreed actions against the major risks 
identified by the risk management 

Principal risk rating matrix

I

N
A
T
R
E
C
T
S
O
M
L
A

D
O
O
H
I
L
E
K
I
L

E
R
A
R

 8

 7

5

1

2

 3

 6

4

Top principal risks

1. Business change

2. Competition

Key strategic  
priorities affected 

Change in year

3. Regulatory environment

4. Taxation

N/A

5. Cyber security

6. Business interruption

N/A

7. IT systems

8. Consumer confidence

LOW

IMPACT

HIGH

Key to Strategic Drivers

  Product

  Price

  People

  Place

28

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
process. The output is shared with the 
Executive Board and Audit Committee.

In the opinion of the Board, appropriate 
internal financial, operational and 
compliance controls are in place throughout 
the Group, the most significant of which 
have been specifically highlighted in this 
report. The Group has a well-defined 
organisational structure, with clear lines  
of responsibility and explicit authority 
delegated to divisional boards and 
executive management. The Group also 
has a comprehensive financial reporting 
system with good communication of plans, 
budgets and monthly results to relevant 
levels of management and the Board.

The Group has complied, and continues  
to comply, with the provisions of the  
UK Corporate Governance Code on  
risk management and internal controls. 
There is an ongoing process in place for 
identifying, evaluating and managing the 
significant risks facing the Group that has 
been in place throughout the year and to 
the date of this report. The process has 
been reviewed by the Committee and  
the Board and accords with guidance 
appended to the Code.

The principal risks which the Group has 
identified, together with actions to mitigate 
those risks, are set out in this report.

Risk appetite
The Group’s framework for managing its 
consideration of risk appetite forms part  
of the risk management process described 
above. Risk appetite was considered by 
the Executive Board members during the 
year and was used to drive and inform  
the actions undertaken in response to  
the principal corporate risks identified. 
Within this framework, the Group’s 
appetite for risk is defined with reference 
to the expectations of the Board for both 
commercial opportunity and internal 
control and is used to inform the Group’s 
annual internal audit plan.

The Group’s appetite for the principal  
risks facing the business is detailed in the 
adjacent risk appetite graph. A calibration 
model of one to five has been used to 
illustrate the range of risk appetite for 
each type of risk. The Group has a  
minimal risk appetite for areas of statutory 
compliance but is willing to accept greater 
risk to achieve its objectives, compete and 
drive the business forward.

A continuous process for identifying risks

The Directors have 
overall responsibility 
for ensuring that  
the Group maintains  
a sound system of 
internal control.

BOARD OF 
DIRECTORS

OPERATIONS

Risk Committee

Focuses on reviewing 
management’s activities 
to continually monitor and 
manage the risks identified. 
The output from the Risk 
Committee is shared with  
the Audit Committee and  
the full Board.

Audit Committee

Receives and reviews reports 
from senior management to 
consider whether significant 
financial, compliance and 
operational risks are being 
identified, evaluated, 
managed and controlled 
and whether any significant 
weaknesses exist which need 
to be addressed. The Audit 
Committee report is set out  
in pages 63 to 65.

RETAIL

Board 
Committees

Risk appetite

Business change

Competition

Regulatory environment

Consumer confidence

Taxation

Cyber security

Business interruption

IT systems

Minimal

Cautious

Balanced

Material

Aggressive

29

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Principal Risks and Uncertainties

Identify, evaluate and manage  
risks facing the Group

KEY RISK
Business change

KEY RISK
Competition

DESCRIPTION
Business change plans are unsuccessful in delivering  
the best course of action to achieve successful competition 
and growth.

DESCRIPTION
Failure to compete effectively through Retail, Customer 
Service and Financial Services propositions.

STRATEGIC DRIVERS

STRATEGIC DRIVERS

CHANGE FROM LAST YEAR

CHANGE FROM LAST YEAR

ASSOCIATED KPIS

ASSOCIATED KPIS

1   2   3   4   5   6   7   8   9   12   13   14

1   2   3   4   5   6   7   8   9   10   11   12   13   14

POTENTIAL IMPACT ON BUSINESS
The capacity of the Group to achieve desired change is necessary  
to remain competitive and improve market position. The Group’s 
continuous change programmes are intended to deliver incremental, 
value added change to ensure that growth plans are achievable.

The potential consequences of not achieving change goals include: 
Loss of competitive position, underachievement against growth 
targets, inefficient returns on investment and constrained ability  
to respond to market forces.

POTENTIAL IMPACT ON BUSINESS
Competing effectively across the key areas of Product, Financial 
Services and Customer Services remains a key driver of growth 
through customer recruitment and retention. Potential consequences 
of increased competition include: loss of market share, erosion of 
margins and a fall in customer satisfaction scores. 

Given the current macro-economic uncertainty arising from Brexit, 
the need to remain competitive is further heightened in order to 
deliver business growth.

MITIGATION
•  Continuous, agile IT change 

processes through the Digital 
Launchpad initiative. 

•  Cultural change group to drive 
internal and cultural change.
•  Continued focus on removal of 
barriers to loyalty through the 
development of the customer 
service experience.

•  Customer Insights team 

ensures up to date information 
on customer trends and 
expectations.

•  Cross-functional programme 
to reduce process complexity 
and drive digital growth.

WHAT WE HAVE DONE 
IN 2017/18
•  Successfully transitioned to 
continuous IT improvement 
processes.

•  Successfully recruited new 
Directors for Strategy, HR,  
IT and Supply Chain.

•  Introduced Group Behaviours  

to complement the 
embedded Group Values.
•  Achieved a record Customer 
Satisfaction Index rating for 
the second year running, 
ranking second in the UK  
retail sector.

MITIGATION
•  Customer Insight team uses 
the Customer Services Index 
to drive continuous 
improvement programme.

•  Developed dedicated 

processes for the US business 
to drive growth. 

•  Benchmarking against 
competitor activity.

•  Continuous improvement  

in IT systems. 

•  Agile trade and supply 

capabilities to respond to 
Brexit impacts and macro-
economic changes. 

•  Hedging of foreign exchange 
rate exposure to provide 
certainty over input costs.

WHAT WE HAVE DONE 
IN 2017/18
•  JD Williams brand relaunched 
to ensure fresh and distinct 
appeal to target 
demographics. 

•  Increased social media 

presence and PR activity for 
Simply Be and Jacamo.

•  Launched variable APR trials.
•  Increased functionality to 
deliver globally through 
Global Ship Anywhere.

•  Opened new US based office 
to spearhead US expansion.

30

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
 
 
 
Key to KPIs

Key to Strategic Drivers

1   Active customer accounts
2   Power Brand active customer accounts

8   Online penetration

9   Online penetration of new customers

3   Growth of our most loyal customers

10   Conversion rate

4   Customer satisfaction rating

11   Traffic from mobile devices

5   Ladieswear market share size 16+

12   Arrears rate (>28 days)

6   Menswear market share chest 44”+

13   Provision rate

7   Group returns rate

14   New credit recruits (rollers)

  Product

  Price

  People

  Place

KEY RISK
Regulatory environment

KEY RISK
Taxation

DESCRIPTION
Failure to ensure the Group complies with existing  
and emerging regulation.

DESCRIPTION
Uncertainty over the outcome of disputes with HMRC 
covering VAT and historic approach to Corporation Tax. 

STRATEGIC DRIVERS

STRATEGIC DRIVERS
N/A

CHANGE FROM LAST YEAR

CHANGE FROM LAST YEAR

ASSOCIATED KPIS

4   13   14  

ASSOCIATED KPIS
N/A

POTENTIAL IMPACT ON BUSINESS
Forthcoming GDPR regulation and changes to the industry wide 
regulatory environment following the FCA’s ongoing thematic reviews 
are a key consideration for the Group. 

Potential impacts arising from changes in regulation are: increased 
costs, erosion of margins and potential fines or reputational damage  
if response plans are not achieved.

POTENTIAL IMPACT ON BUSINESS
Current cases for Corporation Tax and VAT partial exemption are 
ongoing and will go to tribunal in FY2018/19.

Potential impacts from unfavourable outcomes include increased VAT 
and Corporation Tax charges resulting in decreased future cash flows. 

MITIGATION
•  Proactive engagement  

with HMRC.

•  The Group employs Leading 

WHAT WE HAVE DONE 
IN 2017/18
•  Continued work on the tax 
case with leading advisors.

Tax Counsel and other 
providers of external 
expertise. 

•  Partial but not full provision 
against litigation outcomes.

WHAT WE HAVE DONE 
IN 2017/18
•  Strengthened the governance 

of Financial Services with 
appointment of a non-
executive as chair of key 
governance committee.

•  Ongoing project to implement 

GDPR compliance in the 
Group due to be completed 
on time for go-live date. 

•  Introduction of a Data 
Governance function.
•  External validation of the 

GDPR project.

MITIGATION
•  Financial Services Governance 

Committees oversee all 
changes and improvement to 
Financial Services processes.

•  Information Security team 
responsible for ensuring 
compliance with data security 
provisions of GDPR.

•  In-house Customer Service 
team specialising in the 
treatment of vulnerable 
customers.

•  Continued active membership 
of the British Retail Consortium 
and the Finance and Leasing 
Association.

•  Pro-active engagement with 
the FCA and other regulatory 
bodies.

31

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
Principal Risks and Uncertainties 
continued

KEY RISK
Cyber security

KEY RISK
Business interruption

DESCRIPTION
Malicious activity leading to significant loss of data or 
disruption to trading and potentially impacting income, 
profitability, customers and the Group reputation.

STRATEGIC DRIVERS

DESCRIPTION
A significant event impacts the ability of the Group  
to continue trading. 

STRATEGIC DRIVERS
N/A

CHANGE FROM LAST YEAR

CHANGE FROM LAST YEAR

ASSOCIATED KPIS

8   9   10   11   12  

ASSOCIATED KPIS

1  

POTENTIAL IMPACT ON BUSINESS
Increased online presence and reliance on digital systems raises  
the importance of cyber security to the Group. Forthcoming  
GDPR regulations increase the Group’s focus in this area.  
Potential impacts on the business include:

•  Loss of customer data
•  Business interruption
•  Potential fines or reputational damage if regulatory response plans 

are delayed or not adequate

MITIGATION
•  An enhanced Security 

Operation Centre monitors, 
manages and responds to 
cyber security attacks.

•  Group Cyber Security team 
designs and implements 
security controls.

WHAT WE HAVE DONE 
IN 2017/18
•  Continual IT patching and 
strengthened network 
anomaly detection.

•  Developed capability for 

improved threat intelligence.

•  Increased resource for the 
in-house Information  
Security team.

•  Set up Data Governance team.
•  Further improvements to 
vulnerability management.

POTENTIAL IMPACT ON BUSINESS
Business interruption events are an ever present possibility for  
the Group. Potential impacts are broad ranging and include:

•  Disruption to trade and customer service
•  Impact on revenue, margin or reputation

MITIGATION
•  The business continuity plan 
provides a framework to 
manage business 
interruptions.

•  Third party service providers 

WHAT WE HAVE DONE 
IN 2017/18
•  Completed an independent 
assessment of business 
continuity arrangements  
at N Brown.

have business continuity plans.

•  Crisis plans have been  

•  Crisis management plans 

provide recovery objectives 
for key business areas. 
•  Our systems programme 

includes further migration to 
cloud based systems which 
increases resilience.

further developed in each 
functional area.

•  Crisis management was 
invoked to successfully 
respond to the Manchester 
Arena bombing in May 2017 
which caused a building used 
as the N Brown contact centre 
to be closed for an extended 
period. People were 
successfully relocated to 
ensure business continuity  
and there was no impact on 
customer service.

32

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
Key to KPIs

Key to Strategic Drivers

1   Active customer accounts
2   Power Brand active customer accounts

8   Online penetration

9   Online penetration of new customers

3   Growth of our most loyal customers

10   Conversion rate

4   Customer satisfaction rating

11   Traffic from mobile devices

5   Ladieswear market share size 16+

12   Arrears rate (>28 days)

6   Menswear market share chest 44”+

13   Provision rate

7   Group returns rate

14   New credit recruits (rollers)

  Product

  Price

  People

  Place

KEY RISK
IT systems

KEY RISK
Consumer confidence

DESCRIPTION
Residual dependence on legacy IT systems leads to lack of 
agility to respond to changing market conditions.

DESCRIPTION
Changes in company strategy or adverse market conditions 
lead to a loss of confidence in the Group to deliver on 
customer expectations.

STRATEGIC DRIVERS

STRATEGIC DRIVERS

CHANGE FROM LAST YEAR

CHANGE FROM LAST YEAR

ASSOCIATED KPIS

1   2   4   10

ASSOCIATED KPIS

1   2   3   4   5   6   10   11   14

POTENTIAL IMPACT ON BUSINESS
Modern IT systems offer increased functionality and allow  
for greater agility in response to changing market conditions.  
In addition, ongoing maintenance and support costs within the  
legacy IT infrastructure represent a cost headwind. Potential impacts 
arising from continued dependence on legacy IT systems include 
inefficient return on investment, loss of market share and reduced 
customer satisfaction.

POTENTIAL IMPACT ON BUSINESS
Increasing competition amongst digital retailers coupled with an 
uncertain economy post Brexit means that consumer confidence in 
the business is a crucial element in driving growth. Potential impacts 
arising from a loss of confidence by customers include reduction in 
revenue, market share or profits, declining customer satisfaction 
ratings and loss of reputation.

MITIGATION
•  New continuous IT change 

process in place. 

•  Focus on agile methodologies 
to ensure prioritisation of key 
business improvements. 

•  Tactical process 

implementation to decrease 
reliance on older, less flexible 
IT systems. 

•  Continued use of outsource 

provider for IT legacy 
architecture support.

WHAT WE HAVE DONE 
IN 2017/18
•  Delivered core Fit 4 the Future 

program functionality. 
•  Introduced continuous IT 
improvement program. 
•  Reduced dependence on 

legacy product management 
platform though a 
combination of new process 
and tactical IT changes. 
•  Continued migration from 
legacy systems to cloud  
based systems.

WHAT WE HAVE DONE 
IN 2017/18
•  JD Williams brand relaunched 
to ensure fresh and distinct 
appeal to target customers. 

•  Increased social media 

presence and PR activity for 
Simply Be and Jacamo. 

•  Launched variable APR trials. 
•  Continued expansion of 

USA business.

•  Introduced new sales channels 
through use of marketplace.

MITIGATION
•  Customer Insight team 

tracking customer behaviours 
and expectations. 
•  Benchmarking against 
competitor activity in 
marketing, product offering 
and pricing strategy. 

•  Continuous improvement 

in IT systems. 

•  Agile trade and supply 

capabilities to changing trends 
or macro-economic shifts.
•  Credit proposition provides 
customers with payment 
flexibility. 

•  Proactive engagement  
with FCA to ensure  
continuous compliance  
in financial services.

33

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
 
 
 
Performance 
Review

Our performance in detail:

Power Brands continued to 
outperform, in line with our 
strategy. Simply Be was once 
again the standout brand,  
up 16.3%.

KPIs on this page are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

34

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Simply Be

+16.3%

Product revenue increase,  
52 vs 52 weeks

JD Williams

+3.2%

Product revenue increase,  
52 vs 52 weeks

Jacamo

+5.1%

Product revenue increase,  
52 vs 52 weeks

KPIs on this page are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

35

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Performance Review  
continued

JD Williams

JD Williams saw a good 
performance, with the 
brand relaunch in the 
second half driving a 21% 
increase in new customers. 

JD Williams brand relaunch in Autumn 
Winter a great success

Online revenue up 19%

Actions taken to address lower 
response rates from Fifty Plus 
customers; initial results encouraging

‘The Cut’ range significantly 
outperformed expectations

JD Williams App now live

3.2%

Revenue increase  
to £163.4m

Overall revenue performance was 
impacted by the migration of the Fifty Plus 
title; excluding this dynamic, JD Williams 
revenue was up double-digit. JD Williams’ 
product revenue was £163.4m, up 3.2% 
year on year. We experienced lower than 
forecast response rates from the recently 
migrated Fifty Plus customers during the 
second half. If Fifty Plus customers are 
excluded, JD Williams saw revenue up 
double-digit for the year as a whole. 

The lower response rates from migrated 
Fifty Plus customers reflects their fashion 
attitude rather than their channel 
preference. They are online shoppers, 
however, they typically purchase less 
contemporary fashion items, and the 
relaunched JD Williams site did not 
therefore resonate with them as effectively 
as anticipated. Actions have been taken to 
address this, most importantly through 
personalising the site for this customer 
group to ensure that they are presented 
with the most appropriate product selection 
given their preferences. Whilst it is still very 
early days, the initial results are encouraging. 

During the Autumn Winter season  
we relaunched the JD Williams brand 
proposition, launching JD Williams “The 
Lifestore”. The JD Williams Lifestore brand 
aims to celebrate the attitudes, interests 
and ambitions of our female customers 
and positions the brand as a modern 
online department store for the 45–60 
year-old woman. The brand relaunch was  
a success, with a 13% increase in brand 
awareness during the season, a significant 
increase in social media fans (up 19% on 
Facebook and 58% on Instagram) and 
website sessions up materially. 

The JD Williams’ Don’t Tell Me I Can’t 
partnership with Time Inc, which offered 
four women the chance to be mentored 
by experts in a new career, culminated  
in a 200-strong customer event held at 
Manchester’s Lowry Theatre. The 
partnership was all about encouraging 
women to embrace new life adventures 
and highlighting that age is not a barrier  
to pursuing your dreams.

KPIs on this page are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

36

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Simply Be

Simply Be continues to  
go from strength to 
strength, with revenue  
up 16.3% and active 
customers up over 20%. 

16.3%

Revenue increase to £132.8m

Jacamo

Jacamo caters for 25-45 
year-old men of all body 
shapes and sizes, from 
small to 5XL. 

Extended our relationship with Freddie 
Flintoff, and further improved the 
fashionability of the range

The first brand to launch delivery 
subscription, Jacamo Unlimited, to 
great customer response 

Jacamo product revenue was up 5.1%  
to £68.6m, with active customer growth 
up high single-digits. Jacamo had a good 
performance during the year. Continuing 
the trend seen during the second half of 
FY17, total revenue was diluted by the 
reduction in sales of some larger ticket 
electrical goods; this dynamic was  
most notable during the first half  
of the financial year. 

Championing curves and size inclusivity, 
holding a Curve Catwalk and London 
Fashion Week ‘Rules Rewritten’ protest

Launch of Simply Be’s loyalty scheme, 
Perks, to great customer reaction

Further improvements to the Simply Be 
app, and Simply Be USA app launched 

The brand is the go-to destination for 
fashionable size 12-32 customers, offering 
a range of own brands and third-party 
brands, often available in larger sizes on  
an exclusive basis, reinforcing our plus-size 
credentials. As part of our continued 
championing of size inclusivity and body 
confidence, we recently held a Curve 
Catwalk on the eve of London Fashion 
Week. This was led by models and 
influencers including Tess Holliday, Hayley 
Hasselhoff and Felicity Hayward. The  
show was shoppable and streamed on  
the Simply Be site, backed by significant 
social media activity and had a total media 
reach of over 10 million people.

We have recently rolled out our  
Simply Be loyalty scheme, ‘Perks’, which 
gives customers personalised rewards  
in return for engagement. This rewards 
programme initially went live to a small 
group of customers in October, with the 
average number of sessions and demand 
both up double-digit compared to 
non-members. The rewards programme 
harnesses customer data, offering 
members personalised rewards, from both 
Simply Be and third-party partners, to suit 
their buying preferences and behaviours.

Our new Spring Summer campaign,  
called ‘Rules Rewritten’, includes a fashion 
TV ad which is proudly unapologetic, 
championing women’s natural beauty  
and reflecting all women’s shapes and sizes.  
As part of the campaign launch, we held  
a London Fashion Week ‘Rules Rewritten’ 
protest, with a group of lingerie-clad 
models, ranging from size 12 to 26,  
led by Hayley Hasselhoff. The protest 
encouraged everyone to celebrate  
curves and had strong traction with  
our customers across social media. 

Alongside our successful partnership  
with brand ambassador Freddie Flintoff, 
we also teamed up with Tom Morgan  
from television show The Undateables to 
promote our Jacamo own-brand summer 
range, with Tom posing for a series of 
untouched images to encourage all  
men to be comfortable in their own skin. 

Our Spring Summer campaign, called  
‘Live Your Moment’, features world class 
high jumping champion Mike Edwards  
and celebrity chef Tommy Banks, who 
became Britain’s youngest Michelin star 
chef at just 24. ‘Live Your Moment’ is 
based around men’s lives being made  
up of amazing moments.

5.1%

Revenue increase  
to £68.6m

KPIs on this page are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

37

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Performance Review  
continued

Secondary 
Brands

Secondary Brands focus 
on distinct customer 
niches which are not 
served by our Power 
Brands. The largest brand 
here is Fashion World. 

Launch of Figleaves turnaround plan, 
led by its new management team

Fashion World saw revenue growth in 
the first half, followed by a decline in the 
second half, as we diverted marketing 
investment into the Power Brands

High & Mighty live on new web 
platform, including new Financial 
Services system

Secondary Brands revenue decreased by 
3.8% to £149.2m. The largest brand within 
this, Fashion World, was up in the first half 
but down double-digit in the second half, 
as we diverted marketing investment into 
our Power Brands. 

Figleaves revenue was down low single-
digit as expected, with the brand part-way 
through its turnaround, led by its new 
management team. We remain confident 
in the long-term success of this business. 

The remaining two brands within this 
category are High & Mighty and Marisota. 
High & Mighty, the smallest brand by 
some measure, was down double-digit, 
driven by disappointing footfall in its small 
store estate. Marisota was broadly flat, 
and is increasingly used as a product 
brand through JD Williams. 

Traditional 
segment

Actions to improve performance of 
Traditional titles successful

Focus going forward on the online 
channel within our Traditional titles

After a decline in the previous year,  
we successfully drove growth in the 
Traditional segment, with revenue growth 
of 3.3% year on year. This represents 
market share gains, against a structurally 
declining market overall. 

Our Traditional segment has an online 
penetration of just under 40%, with  
online growing as a channel and offline 

(catalogues) declining significantly. Going 
forward, we will focus our efforts on the 
online channel within Traditional, and would 
expect the offline element to therefore 
reduce over time. This will ensure that  
we continue to offer customers a great 
product offering, whilst allowing us to 
generate efficiencies. 

In line with this strategy, during the  
second half we commenced the closure  
of the small Bath office where House of 
Bath, the largest brand in this segment, 
has been managed from historically. The 
buying, merchandising and marketing 
operations for House of Bath will now  
be managed by our central teams based  
in Manchester. This will both reduce 
operating costs and improve the 
marketing efficiency across the  
Traditional customer group. 

International
USA
US revenue was £17.2m, up 10.9% year  
on year (up 6.5% in constant currency 
terms). Revenue growth accelerated as  
we progressed through the year, with 21.3% 
constant currency growth in the second half, 
as our new marketing strategy delivered as 
expected. We remain very confident in our 
growth opportunity in the USA. 

Read more about what we’re doing  
to grow the USA on page 10.

Ireland
Ireland delivered revenues of £17.5m,  
up 8.9% year on year, or 2.7% in constant 
currency terms. 

KPIs on this page are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

38

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Financial 
Services

Gross margin up 550bps, driven by 
the continued improvement in the 
underlying quality of the loan book, 
a reduction in minimum payments 
and the effect of other initiatives  
such as our trials on variable APR 

Reduced minimum payment rate in 
order to give our customers greater 
choice of flexibility in managing their 
finances. This benefitted the arrears 
and gross margin performance  
during the year

Read more about the innovation  
we’re driving in Financial Services 
on page 8

Financial Services delivered a good 
performance during the year, driven by 
continued improvement in the quality  
of the customer loan book together with 
some initiatives launched during the year. 
Financial Services revenue was up 3.5% 
year on year. Within this, interest 
payments were up mid single-digit, 
whilst non-interest lines were down  
high single-digit.

Gross margin was up 550bps year on year 
to 61.2%. There are three broadly equal 
drivers of this increase: the continued 
improvement in the underlying quality  
of the loan book, a change we made to 
minimum payments at the end of the first 
half, and the effect of other initiatives  
such as our trials on variable APR. 

We saw a good performance in both 
credit arrears and provision rate, driven  
by both the underlying quality of the book 
and the change in minimum payments, as 
discussed in the KPI section on page 27. 

Given continued cost of living pressures  
and in order to give our customers greater 
choice of flexibility in managing their 
finances, we made the decision to reduce 
our minimum payment rate from 5% to  
4% during the period. The change had a 
positive impact on the number of customers 
who were in arrears, down 6%. In addition, it 
also meant that those customers who didn’t 
change their monthly payment paid above 
the minimum amount, which will result in 
these customers paying off their balances 
faster. We have seen a 10% increase in the 
proportion of customers who pay above the 
minimum amount, to approximately 60% of 
our customer base. The change in minimum 
payments did result in a cash flow headwind 
in the year, with the average proportion of 
customer balances being paid each month 
decreasing by 1ppt. 

The cash flow impact is expected to 
normalise over the next 12 months. 

During the second half of the year we 
commenced our variable rate trials for 
new customers and a small proportion  
of our existing customer base. Whilst  
the trials are still ongoing, early indications 
are positive and approximately 50% of 
trial customers have seen a rate decrease.

During the first half we announced  
a potential customer redress related  
to historic general insurance products. 
This was as a result of identifying flaws  
in certain products which were provided 
by a third-party insurance underwriter 
and sold by the Group to its customers 
between 2006 and 2014 and followed  
a review prompted by an industry-wide 
request from the FCA that firms ensure 
that general insurance products and 
add-ons offer value for their customers. 
The vast majority of these products were 
sold to the Group’s customers in the 
period leading up to, and including, 2011. 
Sales of the relevant products ceased in 
early 2014. As a result we incurred an 
exceptional cost of £40m in the first  
half. We continue to explore mitigating 
actions to reduce the overall net cost 
although we expect these actions to take 
some time to be resolved. We expect 
the vast majority of the cash flow impact 
to occur during FY19.

Stores

In June 2017 we announced the closure  
of five dual fascia Simply Be and Jacamo 
stores as a result of weak high-street 
footfall, both current and predicted, 
together with significant future business 
rate increases for some stores. Together 
these five stores contributed £5.0m 
revenue but accounted for the £2.0m 
operating loss of our store estate in FY17. 
The store closures were completed at the 
end of the first half and resulted in an 
exceptional cost of £13.8m.

The performance of our store estate, in 
both revenue and profit terms, declined 
materially in the second half of the year, 
resulting in a negative profit contribution  
for the year as whole. This weakness in 
trading was driven by disappointing  
footfall, in line with the wider UK high  
street performance. We remain focused  
on addressing this underperformance to 
ensure that our store estate does not 
represent a drag to Group profitability 
going forward. 

Overall, revenue from our store estate was 
£19.9m (FY17: £23.1m). We currently have 
20 stores open, split 12 dual Simply Be and 
Jacamo stores (FY17: 15), and eight High  
& Mighty stores (FY17: eight). 

KPIs on this page are stated with reference to 2017 52 week numbers. See page 42.

39

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Chief Financial Officer’s Review

A good trading  
performance

A good performance 
in a challenging retail 
market, with Simply Be 
the standout brand.

CRAIG LOVELACE 
Chief Financial Officer

KEY HIGHLIGHTS:

£364.8m

Power Brand product revenue

£269.6m

Financial Services revenue

£652.6m

Product revenue

£922.2m

Group revenue 

40

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Revenue by brand

Revenue, £m
JD Williams

Simply Be

Jacamo

Power Brands

Secondary Brands

Traditional Segment

Product total

Financial Services
Group 

Revenue by category

£m
Ladieswear

Menswear

Footwear & Accessories

Home & Gift
Product total

FY18 
(52 weeks)
163.4

FY17 
(52 weeks)
158.3

132.8

68.6

364.8

149.2

138.6

652.6

269.6
922.2

114.2

65.3

337.8

155.2

134.2

627.2

260.5
887.7

FY18 
(52 weeks)
267.6

FY17 
(52 weeks)
256.5

89.2

74.9

220.9
652.6

85.8

69.0

215.9
627.2

Change
+3.2%

+16.3%

+5.1%

+8.0%

-3.8%

+3.3%

+4.1%

+3.5%
+3.9%

Change
+4.3%

+4.0%

+8.6%

+2.3%
+4.1%

Revenue by brand and category on a statutory basis for 2017 is shown in note 4 on page 104.

Group revenue was up 
3.9% to £922.2m, with 
Product revenue up 4.1% 
to £652.6m and Financial 
Services revenue up 3.5% 
to £269.6m.

2017 53 week year
In the current year we are reporting on  
the 52 week period to 3 March 2018.  
In FY17, the statutory result reported on the 
53 week period to 4 March 2017. In order to 
provide a meaningful comparison, all FY17 
P&L financial movements are reported on  
a 52 week basis, excluding the 53rd week, 
unless otherwise stated. This is to improve 
the comparability of information between 
reporting periods for one-off factors which 
impact upon IFRS measures and aid the 
user of this report.

The 53 week statutory results for FY17  
are set out on page 42, together with an 
assessment of how the 52 weeks result for 
the comparative period has been derived. 
All comparative balance sheet figures are 
reported as at the year-end date and cash 
flow figures are for the 53 week statutory 
period. Where applicable, the 53rd week’s 
known result has been used as the basis  
for the adjustment to provide the 52 week 
results, although a degree of judgement 
has been applied in deriving certain 
operating costs in respect of the final week.

Fulfilment costs, and therefore from a 
product gross margin perspective, P&P 
income is effectively recorded as 100% 
gross margin. This dynamic represented  
a 30bps headwind for FY18 product gross 
margin, of which the vast majority was 
incurred during the second half. 

Revenue by brand is shown in the  
table above. A detailed discussion of 
performance by brand is contained  
within the performance review on  
pages 34 to 39.

For the 52 weeks to 3 March 2018,  
Group revenue was £922.2m and PBT  
was £16.2m. This compares to a statutory 
result for the 53 weeks to 4 March 2017  
of Group revenue of £900.7m and PBT of 
£57.6m. Group revenue for the 53rd week 
ending 4 March 2017 was £13m, whilst 
Group adjusted and statutory PBT was £2m. 

Revenue performance by category is also 
shown in the table above. 

Ladieswear grew by 4.3%, with our own 
brand ladieswear outperforming, as our 
new design capabilities continue to yield 
results, driven by the strong performance 
of Simply Be. 

Revenue performance
Group revenue was up 3.9% to £922.2m, 
with Product revenue up 4.1% to £652.6m 
and Financial Services revenue up 3.5% 
to £269.6m.

Postage & Packaging (P&P) income is 
included within the Product revenue 
figures. During the year we increased  
the number of free delivery promotions. 
This represented a headwind to Product 
revenue, of 20bps in H1 and 50bps in H2. 
Delivery costs are within Warehouse and 

Footwear and accessories performed 
particularly well, with revenue growth  
of 8.6% in the year, again driven by  
our expanded design capabilities. 
Menswear saw Jacamo once more  
outperform, as expected. 

Home and Gift revenue was up 2.3%.  
Our strategy in Home remains unchanged 
– we aim to recruit new customers to our 
Fashion offering, but then see customers 
also buying Homewares. 

Gross margin
Product cost of goods sold (COGS) were 
£312.1m, compared to £284.1m in FY17. 
Product gross margin was 52.2%, down 
250bps yoy. The gross margin movement 
was primarily a result of FX pressures which 
resulted in a 280bp headwind either directly 
due to changes in US dollar exchange rates 
or indirectly due to our cost pressures on 
our sterling denominated suppliers who  
buy their materials in foreign currency.  
In addition, promotional activity to drive 
revenue and market share gains against a 
challenging sector backdrop in the second 
half resulted in a 50bp decrease. 

Our gross bad debt charge declined by 
12.3% to £99.5m (FY17: £111m). This bad 
debt charge, together with a small number 
of other financial services costs, resulted in 
a Financial Services gross margin of 61.2%, 
up 550bps year on year. There are three 
broadly equal drivers of this increase: the 
continued improvement in the underlying 
quality of the loan book, a change we 
made to minimum payments at the end  
of the first half, and the effect of other 
initiatives such as our trials on variable APR. 

Warehouse and fulfilment costs 
increased by 7.8% to £85.8m. This was 
driven both by volumes, which were  
up 3% year on year, together with 
inflationary cost increases in both fuel 

41

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Chief Financial Officer’s Review 
continued

and labour, and further investment in  
our delivery offering, partially offset by 
continued efficiencies. The increase in 
Warehouse and Fulfilment was greater 
during the first half, at +11.3%, compared 
to the second half increase of +4.7%. 

Marketing costs were up 0.9% year  
on year, significantly below the rate of 
product revenue growth as we drove 
efficiency. The increase in Marketing costs 
was broadly consistent across the two 
halves. In the second half specifically, 
roughly two-thirds of the increase in 
marketing costs relates to a step up  
in marketing costs in the USA. 

Admin and payroll costs increased by  
5.3%, weighted towards the first half as we 
incurred some dual running costs relating to 
our IT systems development, and increased 
payroll costs as we invested in recruiting 
talent and developing our people. 

Adjusted EBITDA1 increased by 2.3%  
to £118.6m, with Adjusted EBITDA1  
margin broadly flat at 12.9% (FY17 13.1%). 
Depreciation and Amortisation increased 
by 1.9% reflecting recent investments 
made in the business. This increase was 
lower than guidance due to timing 
between FY18 and FY19. Overall, 
adjusted1 operating profit before 
exceptional items was £90.5m, up 2.5% 
year on year, with adjusted 1 operating 
margin broadly flat at 9.8%. Statutory PBT 
was down 71.9% to £16.2m, as a result of 
the exceptional costs incurred during the 
year, together with an unrealised FX 
movement of negative £8.5m. 

Net finance costs
Net finance costs were £8.9m, up 15.6% 
compared to FY17, due to the increase in 
net debt driven by good growth in our 
customer loan book.

Exceptional items
Exceptional costs of £56.9m were primarily 
incurred during the first half. We incurred 
£40.0m of exceptional costs for customer 
redress for historic insurance products.  
This is discussed on page 39. We incurred 
£13.8m of store closure exceptional costs. 
These are discussed on page 39. Finally, 
during the year we incurred £3.1m of costs 
relating to our ongoing historic tax cases. 

Taxation 
The effective underlying rate of 
Corporation tax is 23.3% (53 weeks to 
FY17: 23.1%). The overall tax charge was 
£3.7m (53 weeks to FY17: £13.3m charge). 

42

Operating performance

£m
Product revenue

Financial Services revenue

Group Revenue2

Product gross profit

Product gross margin

Financial Services gross profit

Financial Services gross margin

Group Gross Profit3

Group Gross Margin %

Warehouse & fulfilment4

Marketing & production4

Admin & payroll4

Total operating costs

Adjusted EBITDA

Adjusted EBITDA margin

Depreciation & amortisation4

Adjusted1 Operating Profit

Adjusted1 Operating Margin

Net Finance costs

Adjusted1 PBT

Exceptional items

Unrealised FX movement
Statutory PBT

FY17 
(52 weeks)
627.2

Change
 (52 vs 52 weeks)
+4.1%

FY17 
(53 weeks)
635.9

FY18
652.6

269.6

922.2

340.5

52.2%

165.1

61.2%

505.6

260.5

887.7

343.1

54.7%

145.2

55.7%

488.3

54.8%

55.0%

(85.8)

(164.0)

(137.2)

(387.0)

118.6

12.9%

(28.1)

90.5

9.8%

(8.9)

81.6

(56.9)

(8.5)
16.2

(79.6)

(162.5)

(130.3)

(372.4)

115.9

13.1%

(27.6)

88.3

9.9%

(7.7)

80.6

(25.2)

0.2
55.6

+3.5%

+3.9%

-0.8%

-250bps

+13.8%

+550bps

+3.6%

-20bps

+7.8%

+0.9%

+5.3%

+3.9%

+2.3%

-20bps

+1.9%

+2.5%

-10bps

+15.6%

+1.3%

-71.9%

264.8

900.7

347.7

54.7%

147.5

55.7%

495.2

55.0%

(81.3)

(165.4)

(130.6)

(377.3)

117.9

13.1%

(27.6)

90.3

10.0%

(7.7)

82.6

(25.2)

0.2
57.6

1  Before exceptionals costs and unrealised FX movement.
2  52 week revenue has been calculated by excluding the actual revenue recorded for the 53rd week.
3  52 week cost of sales has been approximated by applying the full year gross margin percentage to 52 week revenue.
4  Approximation of variable and semi-variable costs has been made on a time apportionment basis. Certain fixed costs 

such as audit fee and depreciation/amortisation are deemed to be incurred on an annual basis and as such are 
consistent with those costs recorded for the 53 week period.

Balance Sheet refinancing

On 4 May 2018 the Directors completed  
the process for new Balance Sheet 
financing facilities.

Previously, our total funding of  
£405m was made up of a Revolving 
Credit Facility (RCF) of £125m and  
a securitisation facility against our 
customer loan book of £280m. Given  
the size of our loan book, at almost 
£600m (net), and the improvement in  
its quality since the previous refinancing 
exercise in 2015, there was opportunity 
to increase headroom.

Our new financing facilities are made  
up of a £500m securitisation facility and 
an extension of our £125m RCF, and are 
secured until September 2021. Our new 
RCF facility, whilst unchanged in size, 
includes a material change in the 
leverage covenant. This was previously 
based upon a Group EBITDA to Group 
Net Debt ratio, however the calculation 
now excludes the securitisation debt 
from Group Net Debt entirely.

The pricing of our new Balance Sheet 
financing facilities is comparable with 
previous facilities, with the increase  
in costs due to higher debt levels,  
as reflected in our interest guidance 
for FY19.

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018IFRS 9

IFRS 9 replaces the current standard 
IAS 39 and is effective from FY19 
onwards. IFRS 9 significantly increases our 
provision for receivables. Importantly, it 
has no cash flow impact and neither does 
it materially change how we operate our 
Financial Services business. There are two 
main areas where the two standards 
differ in approach: 

•  Under IAS 39, a provision is only  
made where there has been  
objective evidence of impairment, 
such as a customer falling into arrears 
or moving onto a payment plan.  
A large proportion of customers are 
therefore not included in the provision 
calculation. Under IFRS 9, a provision 
will be made to some extent against 
every credit customer, including those 
customer balances which are up to 
date and trading normally.

•  Under IAS 39 there is no 

macroeconomic overlay in our 
provision calculation, whilst under 
IFRS 9 we are required to reflect the 
impact of potential changes in the 
macroeconomic environment and  
the impact they could have on our 
customer loan book. 

Our modelling and analysis is still being 
finalised ahead of the new standard 
coming into effect in FY19. However, we 
currently estimate that the provision rate 
could increase from the 7.5% reported in 

FY19 guidance

FY18 to a maximum of 27%. We would, 
therefore, expect to see an increase  
of up to £120m in the provision, and  
a reduction in net assets of the same 
amount in FY19.

One of the final aspects of the modelling 
and analysis being done relates to 
whether or not undrawn credit- balances 
should be included or excluded from the 
calculation of the provision. We have  
now agreed the treatment that these 
balances should be excluded from the 
provision, however the quantification of 
the impact is still being finalised with our 
auditor. The exclusion of undrawn credit 
balances will materially reduce the IFRS 9 
provision, by, we estimate, approximately 
half the potential increase. 

The charge to the income statement is 
based upon the year on year movement 
in the provision. In the absence of 
significant macro-economic changes, 
changes in the quality of the book or the 
risk profile of new customers, we expect 
the P&L impact in FY19 to be broadly 
neutral versus the FY18 restated results. 
We do, however, expect to see a shift  
in the phasing of the charge, with H1 
expected to see a positive impact and 
H2 a negative impact, reflecting the 
seasonality in our customer recruitment 
and arrears rates.

We have provided the following guidance 
for FY19; this is subject to change.

•  Net interest £12m to £13m, reflecting 
our new extended financing facilities

•  Product gross margin flat to +100bps
•  Financial Services gross margin 

-100bps to -200bps

•  Group operating costs +1.5% 

to +3.5%

•  Depreciation & Amortisation 

£32m to £33m

•  Tax rate c.22%
•  Capex c.£40m
•  Net debt £425m to £450m, which 

assumes £25m to £50m growth in the 
Financial Services customer loan book

•  Exceptional costs c.£4m, related to 
advisory fees associated with our 
ongoing legacy tax cases

Earnings per share
Earnings per share from continuing 
operations was 4.41p (53 weeks to FY17: 
15.67p). Adjusted earnings per share from 
continuing operations were 23.06p (53 
weeks to FY17: 22.74p).

Dividends
The Board recognises the importance  
of the dividend to shareholders, and 
accordingly is proposing to hold the full 
year dividend consistent with last year,  
at 14.23p, as we continue to invest in the 
business to drive growth.

Balance Sheet and Cash Flow 
(52 weeks ended 3 March 2018 vs 
53 weeks ended 4 March 2017) 
Capital expenditure was £39.2m (FY17: 
£42.3m). Inventory levels at the period end 
were up 4.9%, to £110.6m (FY17: £105.5m) 
due to increases in current season stocks.

Gross trade receivables increased by 8.0% 
to £647.6m (FY17: £599.5m). The provision 
declined from £64.7m to £48.8m, driven 
by debt sales at year end removing 
£40.4m gross debt and associated 
impairment of £20.5m together with 
improvements in the quality of the  
arrears profile in the debtor book. 

The Group’s defined benefit pension 
scheme has a surplus of £19.3m (FY17: 
£8.3m surplus). The increase in the surplus 
is as a result of general market changes in 
asset returns during the year. 

Net cash generated from operations 
(excluding taxation) was £44.3m compared 
to £87.1m last year, as a result of an £64.0m 
increase in the loan book year on year. We 
had a cash outflow of £27.4m related to 
exceptional items. After funding capital 
expenditure, finance costs, taxation and 
dividends, net debt increased from 
£290.9m to £346.8m, in line with our 
expectations. The £598.8m net customer 
loan book significantly exceeds this net 
debt figure. 

Craig Lovelace
Chief Financial Officer

43

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Corporate Social Responsibility

Taking care  
of our world

We continue to believe  
we can be a major force  
for good as well as a  
major force for fashion.

44

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 201845

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Corporate Social Responsibility  
continued

Dear Shareholder
I am pleased to report on the progress we have made  
since the launch of our CSR Charter entitled ‘Taking care  
of our world’. 

The Committee has recognised the real synergy in 
embedding the CSR strategy fully into our commercial 
strategies. Through this we are living the GUSTO values  
that are so important to the business. 

We continue to believe we can be a major force  
for good as well as a major force for fashion.

Michael Ross
Chair of the CSR Committee

PROGRESS IN 2017

PRIORITIES IN 2018

People re-brand & reward 
scheme successfully launched.

To develop CSR key  
performance indicators.

Online training available  
to all colleagues. 

Completed mapping  
of tier one suppliers.

To commence work on our  
ESOS 2019 submission.

To map our tier  
two suppliers.

Three pillars,  
one passion

Corporate Social 
Responsibility
Our strategy is designed to embrace  
the three CSR pillars: ‘All People’,  
‘One Planet’ and ‘Every Product’.

It aims to fully align our ethical policies 
with our commercial activities, achieving 
tangible results and benefits for  
all our stakeholders.

To find out more:  
www.nbrown.co.uk/sustainability

46

All People
Dignity and respect
We want everyone who works for 
us, wherever they are, to be treated 
with fairness, dignity and respect. 
Because everything we achieve  
as a business, we achieve  
through people.

One Planet
Ways of working
We’re determined to understand  
our effect on the world, and  
find better, smarter and more 
sustainable ways of working.  
To learn and to teach, to recycle, 
reuse and respect,  
wherever we are on our big  
beautiful planet.

Every Product
Responsible
That means partnering with  
suppliers who share our standards, 
working together to create ever  
more responsible, sustainable  
products that our customers can  
enjoy with confidence and  
with conscience.

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018All People

Where people are  
concerned, so are we

Everything we achieve as a business is 
achieved through caring for our customers, 
our community and our people.

Our Customer Charter sets out our 
commitment to customers. We seek to 
establish enduring relationships for the 
mutual benefit of both customer and  
the Company. N Brown recognises the 
importance of being a responsible lender. 
We continually monitor our customer 
journey, looking at ways of improving their 
experience, and offering tailored products. 

We are very proud of our Manchester 
heritage and of our investment in jobs in the 
North West. This year we were a sponsor of 

One Planet

Protecting the earth begins  
with respecting it

We’re determined to understand our effect 
on the world and find better, smarter and 
more sustainable ways of working. To learn 
and to teach, to recycle, reuse and respect, 
wherever we are on our big beautiful planet. 

Like many other companies we are looking for 
ways to make our business more efficient and 
less impactful on the environment. Reducing 
packaging is one method we have used to 
achieve this. We have changed processes to 
ensure packaging is only used when required, 
eliminated any unnecessary packaging and 
replaced plastic bags in our stores with paper 

Every Product

Our products should make  
people feel as good as they look

The Group has been working closely with its 
suppliers to improve customer experience 
and to promote responsible sourcing. This 
means partnering with suppliers who share 
our values and standards. By working 
together, we hope to create more 
responsible and sustainable products that 
our customers can enjoy with confidence. 
Following successful mapping of our tier  
one suppliers, we are focusing our efforts  
on the wider indirect supply base.

Our continued focus has been to work 
closely with suppliers to promote 
responsible sourcing and ensure that all 
workers are treated with fairness, respect, 
and are safe at work. 

the Manchester International Festival 2017, 
even holding events at our head office and 
encouraging our colleagues to volunteer. 

Following the Manchester Arena bombing  
in May 2017 we sprang into action to aid  
our Manchester community and ensure we 
supported our colleagues, many of whom 
were affected.

We released our Gender Pay Gap disclosure 
and, whilst we recognise we have more to  
do, we are pleased to be tracking well ahead 
of both the national and retail average. We 
recognise the benefits of having a diverse 
workforce and in having a strong executive 
pipeline. One of the ways in which we look  
to achieve these objectives is through  
our ‘Women Like Us’ group. The group 
encourages women to discuss the matters 

that affect their working lives and includes 
guest speakers who provide inspiration.

We want to ensure our colleagues feel 
valued, motivated and informed, and are 
equipped to succeed. We regularly seek  
out the opinions of our people through  
our annual #Vibe Survey. The results of the 
survey are disclosed internally and an action 
plan created to ensure we are improving  
the experience of all colleagues.

Our colleagues have supported a range  
of charities throughout the year, and as  
a business we have a particular focus on 
supporting causes within the local community. 
We also continue to support our three 
customer charities: Breast Cancer Now, 
Prostate Cancer UK and Silverline.

•  Maintained ‘zero to landfill’ as an organisation.
•  Rolled out online training available to all 
colleagues and implemented measures, 
such as more recycling bins, to increase 
awareness amongst our staff.

With our new 2022 targets in place and on 
track, these will help us reduce our carbon 
footprint even further. 

Further information on our emissions profile 
can be found on page 49.

bags. In the coming year we will undertake a 
further review of packaging materials to assess 
a number of options including the use of 
environmentally friendly packaging.

We voluntarily report to both the Carbon 
Disclosure Project (CDP) and the Forestry 
Disclosure Project (FDP) and are pleased with 
our progress to date. In particular, our FDP 
score is an A minus which puts us in the 
‘leadership’ category.

Other successes during the year were:

•  Continued to purchase green electricity  

for all UK sites. 

•  Improved green commuter travel  

results and replaced our pool car fleet  
to more CO2 efficient models. 

We are one of the founding members of the 
Bangladesh Accord which, in the four years  
of its existence, has worked with retailers to 
improve conditions for thousands of workers 
across Bangladesh. N Brown is committed to 
this, having signed the next phase Transitional 
Accord, which will continue this great work 
and ensure continued support in Bangladesh 
until 2021.

We are members of ACT (Action, Collaboration, 
Transformation), which is a ground-breaking 
agreement between global brands and retailers 
and trade unions to transform the garment  
and textile industry. One of the aims of the 
agreement is to achieve living wages for workers 
through industry-wide collective bargaining 
linked to purchasing practices. We are working 
with other key brands across the globe, and with 
Industriall, supporting five key territories. In 

particular, we will continue to support the 
success and growth we have seen in the 
Bangladesh office and the great work in  
the supply base supported by the Accord.

In Turkey we are now building clear 
foundations to re-build our buying cycles 
which will support speed to market and 
sustainable newness for our customers.

Closer to home we continue to improve 
supplier engagement by visiting key suppliers 
regularly. This is still a major part of our 
buying strategy and we continue to support 
and grow UK manufacturing. 

We undertake stringent due diligence 
checks as part of our new supplier process. 
This is supported by monitoring to ensure 
factory compliance standards.

47

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Corporate Social Responsibility  
continued

Case study: Our Manchester community

All of us here at N Brown felt the effect of 
the Manchester Arena bombing in 
summer 2017. In addition to our colleagues 
based at a large contact centre in the 
Arena, many other colleagues were 
affected or had links to those who were. 
There are too many stories of kindness 
and generosity from our colleagues and 
friends to mention but we are extremely 
proud to have been able to play our part. 

N Brown saw this as a call to action to 
support the local community of Manchester 
that means so much to our heritage, our 
people and our future.

Taking inspiration from artwork around  
us we designed a charity t-shirt and 
sweatshirt featuring the now famous  
bee logo and the slogan ‘Bee More 
Manchester’. Over 1,500 units were  

sold and £12,000 was raised for the We 
Love Manchester Emergency Fund run by 
the British Red Cross Society, who continue 
to be fundamental to providing support 
services to victims and their families. 

48

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Environment

Overview
N Brown continues to work to manage and 
minimise the impact our operations have 
on the environment. By working alongside 
our environmental partners, Envantage 
Limited and Viridor Limited (specialising  
in energy and carbon, and waste), we 
ensure full compliance with all relevant 
legislation and work to continuously 
improve our environmental performance, 
quantification and disclosure.

Following Ian Carr’s retirement on 
30 March, Group-wide responsibility for 
sustainability from 1 April 2018 transferred 
to Ralph Tucker, Chief Supply Chain 
Officer. Ralph reports to the Chief 
Executive Officer and sits on both 
the N Brown Executive Board and 
CSR Committee.

During the last year we maintained our 
Carbon Disclosure Project scores, reduced 
our Group-wide carbon emissions relative 
to the previous year (despite an increase 
in the number of items shipped), increased 
our purchase of 100% renewable energy, 
maintained our zero waste to landfill, and are 
making good progress against our newly set 
buildings and haulage emissions targets.

Carbon Disclosure Project 
The Group report on the Carbon Disclosure 
Project (CDP) annually, for both the carbon 
and forests (timber) modules. We have 
maintained our scores from last year, 
placing us once again in the management 
and leadership categories respectively.

Sector benchmarking
The charts above show the scores 
achieved by our sector peers in the 
Consumer Discretionary sector. N Brown 
exceeded the sector average for both the 
carbon and forests modules of the CDP.

N BROWN GROUP PLC SECTOR BENCHMARKING 2017-2018 

FORESTS

CARBON

A

A-

N Brown score

A

A-

B

Sector average

B

N Brown score

B-

C

C-

D

D-

B-

C

Sector average

C-

D

D-

Leadership

Management

Awareness

Disclosure

Emissions profile
Our green house gas (GHG) emissions 
inventory is calculated for the global 
Group1 under the operational control 
approach, in accordance with the GHG 
Protocol and GHG emissions factors 
published by DECC. The inventory is 
independently calculated by our partner 
carbon consultants, Envantage Ltd.

Under GHG reporting guidelines, scope 1 
and 2 emissions are the key mandatory 
areas to report, illustrating the 

environmental impact of the Group for 
activities which we have direct control 
over; i.e. operation of our sites and 
vehicles. As a responsible retailer, we  
have also taken steps to quantify as many 
optional scope 3 emission sources that 
relate to our operations as possible. 

The table and chart overleaf illustrate our 
GHG emissions across all our reporting 
areas, for the global Group from 1 March 
2017 to 28 February 2018 and the 
previous year.

Total GHG tCO2e

2016 – 2017
(Previous year)
1,615.4

2017 – 2018
(Current year)
1,805.5

tCO2e change 
from  
previous year
190.0

% change 
from  
previous year
12%

Scope

Source
Gas 

Diesel

Scope 1

HFCs

Gas oil

Company and pool car 

Scope 2 Electricity

Total scope 1 and 2

Water

Employee commuting

Scope 3

Business travel (air, road and rail)

Waste

Well to tank (all)

392.7

146.4

102.6

63.0

7,552.3

9,872.5

31.0

1,621.4

1,844.7

233.5

1,580.1

345.9

106.2

79.9

64.4

6,696.7

9,098.5

29.2

863.7

2,246.3

219.5

1,538.9

-46.9

-40.2

-22.8

1.3

-855.6

-774.0

-1.8

-757.7

401.6

-14.0

-41.2

Total

15,183.2

13,996.1

-1,187.1

Outside scopes – Biogenic element – Diesel

9.3

9.0

-0.3

1  Emissions figures detailed cover all active entities during the reporting year.

-12%

-27%

-22%

2%

-11%

-8%

-6%

-47%

22%

-6%

-3%

-8%

-3%

49

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Corporate Social Responsibility  
continued

N BROWN GROUP PLC EMISSIONS PROFILE 2017-2018 
(tCO2e)

 16.0%

 12.9%

 11.0%

 6.2%

Electricity

Business travel 
(air, road and rail)

Gas

Well to tank (all)

Employee 
commuting

Diesel

Waste

HFC

Gas oil

Company and
pool car

 2.5%

 1.6%

 0.8%

 0.6%

 0.5%

Water

 0.2%

Scope 1

Scope 2

Scope 3

 47.8%

N BROWN GROUP PLC EMISSIONS CHANGE FROM PREVIOUS YEAR 
(tCO2e)

Gas

Diesel

HFCs

Gas oil

Company 
and pool car

Electricity

Water

Employee 
commuting

Business travel 
(air, road and rail)

Waste

Well to tank (all)

- 47% 

 12%

-12% 

-27% 

-22% 

 2%

-11% 

-6% 

-6% 

-3% 

EMISSIONS AGAINST TURNOVER
PREVIOUS YEAR AND CURRENT YEAR
(tCO2e/million £ turnover)

EMISSIONS AGAINST ITEMS SHIPPED
PREVIOUS YEAR AND CURRENT YEAR
(tCO2e/million items)

2016-2017
(Previous year)

2017-2018
(Current year)

 11.2

 9.9

2016-2017
(Previous year)

2017-2018
(Current year)

 22%

 246

 224

Intensity ratios
Scope 1 & 2 GHG emissions tCO2e/million £ turnover
Scope 1 & 2 GHG emissions tCO2e/million items dispatched

2016 – 2017 
Previous year
11.0

2017 – 2018 
Current year

% Change
9.9 10% decrease

246

224 9% decrease

Emissions change from previous year 
We have reduced our Group GHG emissions 
by a significant 8% compared to the previous 
reporting period. A breakdown of the 
reduction in emissions by source is shown  
in the chart opposite.

We have achieved substantial reductions in 
both our HFCs and employee commuting 
emissions compared to the previous year. 
These reductions can be attributed to 
improved reporting of HFC emissions from 
our air conditioning units and an increase 
in the percentage of colleagues using 
greener travel options.

Relative performance using  
intensity ratios 
As a growing organisation, evaluation  
of scope 1 and 2 emissions performance 
using intensity ratios allows a more 
meaningful comparison to be made 
between inventory periods. GHG 
emissions relating to Scope 1 and 2 
sources have decreased considerably in 
terms of our relative performance against 
both turnover and items dispatched2,  
as shown in the charts and table opposite.

Zero carbon electricity
The Group continues to purchase 
electricity generated from 100% 
renewable sources which are REGO 
(Renewable Energy Guarantees of  
Origin) backed and generate our  
own solar electricity at two of our 
distribution centres. 

During the last reporting year 98%  
of the electricity for our directly  
controlled sites was generated from  
zero carbon and renewable sources.  
We have a small number of sites outside 
the UK for which we are unable to 
purchase green electricity. We also 
operate some landlord managed sites  
for which we are not responsible for  
the procurement of electricity.

50

2  Financial figures and items shipped figures used for 
intensity ratios cover all active entities during the 
reporting year.

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018N BROWN ELECTRICITY PROFILE FOR 
DIRECTLY CONTROLLED SITES1

3%

2%

96%

REGO green electricity
Non-REGO or renewable electricity
Solar

Note: Chart totals 101% due to rounding.

Performance against 2022 targets
Last year we set new, five-year 
environmental targets, focusing on our 
buildings and haulage emissions and our 
waste disposal. We are making excellent 
progress towards meeting these targets. 

We are delighted to be ahead of plan. 
However, we recognised the importance  
of continuous improvement and where 
appropriate we will increase the targets 
set to ensure that they remain stretching. 

Data records
•  Natural gas and electricity: Data is 
primarily calculated based on actual 
metered consumption from invoices or 
meter readings. Where actual metered 
data is not available, for example if 
energy is billed as part of a landlord 
service charge, energy consumption 
has been estimated using floor areas 
and published benchmarks. Some data 
has been estimated where quarterly 
bills have not yet been published.

•  Gas oil: Fuel is used in stand by 
generators and onsite transport 
(forklifts etc.). Data for onsite transport 
is calculated using actual fuel usage 
from invoices and internal records of 
gas oil deliveries. Generator fuel usage 
has been estimated using generator 
fuel demand per hour and activation 
information.

•  Diesel: Data is calculated based on 
actual fuel consumption taken from  
fuel card invoices.

•  Company car: Data is primarily 

calculated for the Group using data 
logged in our Concur system which 
records distance travelled, and vehicle 
information for each business travel 
expense claimed. Any company cars 
not logged on this system have been 
taken from independent mileage  
claim records.

•  HFC: Refrigeration emissions have 

been calculated from the F-Gas register 
for applicable plant where provided. 
Where this is not possible, leakages 
have been estimated using DECC 
leakage tables. Emissions for plant not 
affected by this regulation (smaller 
systems) have been calculated using 
data provided by full service records. 
Where service records were not 
available for a very small number of 
shops, refrigeration losses have been 
estimated using DECC leakage tables. 
For a very small number of shops 
details of the systems were not known 
and therefore estimation of emissions 
has not been possible.

Buildings emissions
Corporate buildings
Target: 35% reduction in GHG emissions 
(tCO2e/items shipped)
Status: On track to exceed target

Simply Be buildings
Target: 20% reduction in GHG emissions 
(tCO2e/1,000 m2)
Status: On track to exceed target

High and Mighty buildings
Target: 15% reduction in GHG emissions 
(tCO2e/1,000 m2)
Status: On track to exceed target

Haulage emissions
Target: 14% increase km/litre fuel used

Tractors’ status: On track to exceed target

3.5 tonne – 7.5 tonne vehicles’ status:  
On track to exceed target

7.5 tonne – 18 tonne vehicles’ status: 
Behind target

Waste
Target: Maintain zero waste to landfill

Status: Meeting target

Mandatory GHG reporting notes
The data disclosed is in conformance to 
the Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report  
and Directors’ Report Regulations 2013). 
GHG emissions disclosed under the 
required reporting categories fall within 
the Group’s consolidated financial 
statement. Scope 1 and 2 emissions have 
been calculated on a global scale where 
the Group have operational control using 
the GHG protocol. The quantified 
emissions are for the reporting year 
1 March 2017 to 28 February 2018. 

GHG emissions factors published by 
DECC for 2016 have been used to 
calculate GHG emissions. 

Noted change in emissions for 2016-2017 
•  Data accuracy: Some data for the 2016 
– 2017 inventory has been updated 
based on actual data or more accurate 
data for some sources. 

•  Update in DECC emissions factors: 

Emissions from the previous published 
report for the period 2016 – 2017 have 
been recalculated with the newly 
published factors for 2017, affecting the 
months of January and February 2017 
(2017 factors were not available at time 
of publishing). This has resulted in a 
slight change in emissions compared  
to those originally reported.

51

Strategic reportN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Governance Overview

Setting a high standard
of governance

My role over the course  
of the year has been to 
ensure the Board operates 
effectively, is well managed, 
complies with the 
requirements of the Code 
and has the correct balance 
of diversity, skills and 
experience to execute the 
strategy set by the Board.

The Board is committed to meeting a high standard 
of corporate governance and to complying with the 
principles in the UK Corporate Governance Code 
issued by the UK Financial Reporting Council in 2016 
(the ‘Code’). This Corporate Governance statement 
explains the key features of the Group’s governance 
structure and how it complies with the Code.

Andrew Higginson
Independent Non-Executive Chairman

Statement of Compliance with the Code 
The Group applied the provisions of the Code and the UK Financial Conduct Authority’s Disclosure Guidance and Transparency 
Rules throughout the year. The following paragraphs explain how the main principles of the Code have been applied. The Directors’ 
Remuneration Report contains further details on pages 68 to 84. In addition, disclosures required by the Disclosure Guidance and 
Transparency Rules (rule 7.2.6) regarding share capital can be found on page 57.

Corporate structure and framework

The Board is assisted by  
four committees – Audit, 
Nomination and Governance, 
Remuneration and CSR. Each 
Committee is responsible for 
reviewing and overseeing 
activities within its particular 
terms of reference (copies  
of which are available on  
the Company’s website,  
www.nbrown.co.uk). The 
chairman of each Committee 
provides a summary at each 

scheduled Board meeting of 
any committee meeting held 
since the previous meeting and 
the minutes of all Committee 
meetings are circulated  
to the full Board, when 
appropriate. Individual  
reports from each Committee 
chairman for the year are 
provided on pages 63 to 84. 

52

CSR
Committee

Audit 
Committee

r d   of Directors
  t h e Directo

t

c

r

s

a

o

B

E l e

Shareholders

d
r
a
o
B
e
v

i
t
u
c

e

x

E

O

n

g

oing Eng a g e m e nt

E

x

e

c
u
t
i

v
e
B
o
a
r
d

Nomination 
& Governance
Committee

Remuneration
Committee

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
 
EMPLOYEE DIVERSITY (%)

BOARD COMPOSITION (%)

SENIOR MANAGEMENT (%)

COMMITTEE MEETINGS 
DURING 2017/18

41%

59%

20%

80%

45%

55%

Male 

Female 

1,009

1,455

Non-Executive Directors  8 

Executive Directors 

2 

Male 

Female 

31

25 

Note: Employee data as at 3 March 2018.

Committees of the Board

4

3

1

2

Audit Committee 

Remuneration Committee 

Nomination and 
Governance Committee 

CSR Committee 

Audit Committee

Ron McMillan (Chair)

Lesley Jones

Richard Moross

Remuneration 
Committee

Gill Barr (Chair – appointed  
January 2018)

Ron McMillan

Richard Moross

Nomination and 
Governance Committee

Lesley Jones (Chair – appointed  
June 2017)

Andrew Higginson (resigned  
30 April 2018)

Ron McMillan

CSR Committee

Michael Ross (Chair – appointed 
January 2018)

Angela Spindler (Chief Executive)

Theresa Casey (General Counsel, 
Company Secretary and Group Head 
of CSR)

Ralph Tucker (Chief Product and 
Supply Chain Officer)

Anne Iceton (interim HR Director)

Activities

Activities 

Activities 

Activities 

During the year the Committee 
considered, amongst other 
things, the Group’s approach 
to and methodologies for 
provisioning bad and doubtful 
debt and inventory, the Group’s 
exposure to corporate tax  
and VAT, the capitalisation  
of software costs, FCA 
compliance (including 
regulatory provisioning), 
internal controls and risk.

During the course of the year 
the Committee has examined 
several regulatory issues 
affecting the workforce 
including a review of Group-
wide incentive schemes, a 
review of corporate objectives 
and also the appointment of 
new advisors. 

The chairship of the 
Remuneration Committee 
transferred from Fiona Laird to 
Gill Barr in January 2018.

This year the Committee has 
focused on the successful 
recruitment of Gill Barr and 
Michael Ross as new Non-
Executive Directors. In addition 
the Committee have recruited 
Matt Davies as a new Non-
Executive Director and 
Chairman-Elect. 

An external Board evaluation  
has taken place during the  
year, the Committee terms of 
reference have been updated  
and the current composition, 
skills, expertise and experience 
of the Board have been reviewed.

The Committee has made 
significant progress in key 
issues, such as supply chain 
mapping, energy efficiency  
and colleague engagement  
that it intend to build on in  
the coming year. 

As a Company we have 
renewed our commitment  
to the Bangladesh Accord by 
signing the Transitional Accord.

Michael Ross was appointed as 
chair of the Committee during 
the year.

Outlook 

Outlook 

Outlook 

Outlook 

The Committee will continue  
to exercise oversight over 
published financial information 
and the effectiveness of audit.

It will also review the 
implementation of software 
technological developments 
and the introduction of new 
Financial Services products.

The Committee will focus on 
reviewing the Remuneration 
Policy ahead of the 2019 AGM 
and will monitor the proposed 
developments in Corporate 
Governance that may impact 
remuneration in the future.

The Committee will focus on 
implementing an action plan 
created following the results of the 
recent external board evaluation.

The Committee will also review 
composition of the Board 
committees in light of the new 
additions to the Board. Matt 
Davies took over as Chair of the 
Committee on 1 May 2018.

As we are come to the three year 
anniversary of our CSR Charter 
we will review our performance 
& consider ways in which we can 
further develop our strategy. 

The Committee will seek to 
increase the visibility and oversight 
of CSR activities across the Group 
including the enhancement of Key 
Performance Indicators.

53

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018  
  
Board of Directors

Angela Spindler
Chief Executive Officer

Appointed to the Board 
2013

Andrew Higginson
Independent  
Non-Executive Chairman
(resigned 30 April 2018)

Appointed to the Board 
2012

Craig Lovelace
Chief Financial Officer

Appointed to the Board 
2015

Relevant skills, qualifications and experience
Angela was appointed Chief Executive Officer in  
July 2013 and has over 30 years of consumer facing 
business experience and 20 years of retail experience. 
This includes roles at Coca Cola, Mars Inc, Asda, 
Debenhams and the Original Factory Shop. Angela 
studied at Manchester University.

Relevant skills, qualifications and experience
Andrew was appointed a Director in July 2012 and 
became Chairman in September 2012. Andrew 
spent over 20 years in executive retail roles, 
including positions with Laura Ashley Holdings,  
The Burton Group and Tesco. 

Relevant skills, qualifications and experience
Appointed in May 2015. Formerly Group Chief 
Financial Officer for General Healthcare Group Ltd 
since 2011 and prior to this, held a number of senior 
UK and international finance roles at Regus Plc, 
Electronic Arts Inc and PwC. Craig is a fellow of  
the ICAEW.

Key strengths
• Change management

• Retail 

• Management

• Marketing

• Multi-channel retail

• Business planning

Key strengths
• Retail

• Strategy

• Finance

Key strengths
• Financial reporting

• Tax and treasury 

• Financial strategy

• Business planning 

• Corporate finance

• Governance and 

• Strategy development 

• Board governance 

• Restructuring

compliance

• Investor relations

External appointments
Angela currently serves as a Non-Executive Director  
of Dia, which is listed on the Madrid stock exchange. 

External appointments
Andrew is currently the Chairman of WM Morrison 
Supermarkets PLC and Clearwater International 
Corporate Finance UK. He is a Non-Executive 
Director of Woolworths Holdings Limited 
(South Africa).

External appointments
None.

Meetings attended
9/9

Meetings attended
8/9

Meetings attended
9/9

Michael Ross
Independent  
Non-Executive Director

Appointed to the Board 
2018

Lesley Jones
Independent  
Non-Executive Director

Appointed to the Board 
2014

Richard Moross MBE
Independent  
Non-Executive Director

Appointed to the Board 
2016

Relevant skills, qualifications and experience
Michael is the co-founder and Chief Scientist of 
DynamicAction which is a leader in big data analytics 
and AI for retail. He was previously the co-founder 
and CEO of figleaves.com, and started his career at 
McKinsey consulting in the early days of the internet.

Relevant skills, qualifications and experience
Lesley retired from executive life in January 2014 
after 30 years in relationship and risk management 
at Citigroup and latterly as Chief Credit Officer for  
RBS Group Plc from 2008 until January 2014. 

Key strengths
• Digital retail

• Data analytics

• Artificial intelligence

Key strengths
• Finance

• Governance

• Risk management

Relevant skills, qualifications and experience
As the CEO and founder of MOO.com Richard brings 
significant expertise in digital retailing and technology. 
Before founding MOO, Richard worked for the design 
company Imagination. Other past companies include 
sorted.com and the BBC.

Richard was awarded an MBE in 2015 for ‘Services  
to Entrepreneurship’.

Key strengths
• Digital retail

• Technology

• Change management

• Entrepreneurship

External appointments
Michael is a Non-Executive Director of Sainsburys 
Bank. He also sits on the commercial development 
board at the Turing Institute. 

External appointments
Lesley was appointed as Non-Executive Director 
and Board Risk Committee Chair at Close Brothers 
in December 2013. She is also Chair of the Board 
Risk Committee and Deputy Chair of Board Audit 
Committee at Northern Bank Ltd in Belfast. 

External appointments
Richard served on the Board of Seedcamp and was  
a Non-Executive Director of Ladbrokes PLC between  
2012 and 2016.

Meetings attended
1/1

Meetings attended
9/9

Meetings attended
9/9

54

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
 
 
 
Lord Alliance  
of Manchester CBE
Non-Executive Director

Appointed to the Board 
1968

Gill Barr
Independent  
Non-Executive Director

Appointed to the Board 
2018

Ron McMillan
Independent Senior  
Non-Executive Director

Appointed to the Board 
2013

Relevant skills, qualifications and experience
Lord Alliance was appointed a Director and Chairman 
in 1968. He stood down as Chairman on 1 September 
2012. Co-founder and former Chairman of Coats 
Viyella Plc. Lord Alliance holds numerous honorary 
doctorates including awards from Heriot-Watt 
University and the University of Manchester.

Relevant skills, qualifications and experience
Appointed in January 2018. Gill was previously a 
Non-Executive Director of Morgan Sindall Plc. She 
was Group Marketing Director of The Co-operative 
Group, Marketing Director of John Lewis and spent 
seven years at Kingfisher Plc in a variety of senior 
strategy, marketing and business development roles.

Relevant skills, qualifications and experience
Appointed a Director on 1 April 2013. Ron is  
Senior Independent Director and Chairman  
of the Audit Committee. 

Previously, he was the Deputy Chairman of 
PricewaterhouseCoopers in the Middle East  
and Northern Regional Chairman of the UK firm.

Key strengths
• Detailed knowledge of N Brown

• Retail 

Key strengths
• Marketing

• Business development

• Remuneration

Key strengths
• Finance

• Financial reporting

• Governance

• Risk management

External appointments
Lord Alliance is also a director of a number of private 
companies, committees and trustee bodies. He was 
appointed a life peer in 2004.

External appointments
Gill is currently a Non-Executive Director of  
PayPoint plc and Wincanton plc, and a Trustee 
Director of Willis Towers Watson’s master trust, 
LifeSight Ltd. She is also the Chair of the Customer 
Challenge Group for Severn Trent Water Plc.

External appointments
Ron is also Chairman of the Audit Committee of 
B&M Value Retail SA, 888 Holdings Plc, SCS PLC  
and HomeServe PLC.

Meetings attended
9/9

Meetings attended
1/1

Meetings attended
9/9

Matt Davies
Independent  
Non-Executive Chairman
(appointed 1 May 2018)

Appointed to the Board 
2018

Theresa Casey
General Counsel and 
Company Secretary

Other Directors who served during the year: 
Ivan Fallon 
Independent Non-Executive Director 

Appointed to the Board 
2015

Fiona Laird 
Independent Non-Executive Director

Relevant skills, qualifications and experience
Matt joined the Board in February 2018 as 
Independent Non-Executive Director and Chairman 
Elect. He was appointed as Chairman on 1 May 
2018. He was previously the CEO of Tesco UK and 
ROI. Prior to Tesco, Matt was CEO of Halfords from 
2012 to 2015 and Finance Director (2001 – 2004)  
and CEO (2004 – 2012) of Pets at Home.

Relevant skills, qualifications and experience
Joined the Group in January 2015. Admitted as a 
solicitor in 1997, Theresa has held a number of legal 
and company secretarial roles in the financial services 
and retail sectors, including the Co-operative Bank, 
Shop Direct and Brown Shipley Private Bank.

Key strengths
• Retail

• Strategy

• Management

Key strengths
• Retail and financial services compliance

• Retail and financial legal knowledge

• Company secretarial practice

External appointments
Matt was appointed Chairman of Hobbycraft 
Trading Limited on 1 May 2018.

External appointments
Governor of Crossley Heath Grammar School.

Meetings attended
0/0

Meetings attended
9/9

Indicates member of the:

  Audit Committee

   Remuneration Committee

   Nomination and Governance Committee

  CSR Committee

  Committee chair

55

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report

Activities and results
The Directors have pleasure in presenting 
their Annual Report and audited financial 
statements for the year ended 3 March 
2018. Some of the information required  
to be part of the Directors’ Report can  
be found elsewhere in this document  
as detailed in the following paragraphs 
and is incorporated into this report by 
cross-reference.

Management Report
This Directors’ Report, together with the 
Strategic Report set out on pages 1 to 51, 
form the Management Report for the 
purposes of DTR 4.1.5R.

Strategic Report
The Strategic Report sets out a review of 
the business of the Group during the year 
ended 3 March 2018 and the position of 
the Group at the end of that period to 
enable shareholders to assess how the 
Directors have performed their duty  
under section 172 of the Companies Act. 
The review also describes the principal 
risks and uncertainties facing the Group, 
provides a fair review of the Group’s 
business at the end of the financial  
year and an indication of likely future 
developments in the business.

Risk management
The Board oversees the development of 
processes to manage risks appropriately. 
The Executive Directors and operating 
Board Directors implement and oversee 
risk management processes and report 
to the Board on them. The Board also 
identifies and reviews key business risks. 
Further detail can be found on pages 
28 to 33.

UK Corporate Governance Code
As required by the UK Corporate 
Governance Code 2016 (the ‘Code’), 
pages 18 to 19 provide an explanation of 
the basis on which the Group generates 
value and preserves it over the long term 
(its business model) and its strategy for 
delivering its objectives. The Corporate 
Governance Statement on pages 60 to 62 
forms part of this Director’s Report.

Results, dividends and reserves
The financial statements set out the Group’s 
results for the year ended 3 March 2018 
and are contained in pages 91 to 123.

An interim dividend of 5.67p per share 
(2017 5.67p) was paid on the ordinary 
shares of the Group on 12 January 2018. 
The net cost of this dividend was £16.0m 
(2017 £16.0m).

56

The Directors recommend a final dividend 
of 8.56p per share (2017: 8.56p) for the 
year ended 3 March 2018, the net cost of 
which will be £24.2m (2017: £24.2m). The 
dividend will be paid on 3 August 2018.

Movements in reserves are shown in the 
Statement of Changes in Equity on 
page 95.

Composition of the Group
During the year there were no corporate 
acquisitions or disposals.

Share capital
Details of the Group’s issued share capital 
are shown in note 23 on page 118.

The Group has one class of ordinary 
shares which carry no fixed income.  
Each share carries the right to one vote  
at general meetings of the Group. The 
ordinary shares are listed on the Official 
List and are traded on the London  
Stock Exchange. There are no specific 
restrictions on the size of a holding nor  
on the transfer of shares, which are both 
governed by the general provisions of the 
Company’s Articles of Association and 
prevailing legislation (except as set out 
overleaf in the section entitled ‘Voting 
Rights and Restrictions on Transfers’).  
No person has any special rights over  
the Group’s share capital and all issued 
shares are fully paid.

Details of outstanding employee share 
options and the operation of the relevant 
schemes are shown in note 28 on pages 
119 to 120. The Directors have no current 
plans to issue shares other than in 
connection with employee share options.

2018 annual general meeting
The annual general meeting will be held  
at 12:30pm on Tuesday, 17 July 2018.  
The notice convening the annual general 
meeting will be sent to members by way 
of separate circular. Explanatory notes  
on each resolution to be proposed at  
the meeting will accompany the circular.

Directors
The biographies of the current Directors, 
are shown on pages 54 and 55. With regard 
to the appointment and replacement of 
Directors, the Company is governed by its 
Articles of Association, the Code and the 
Companies Act.

At the 2018 annual general meeting all  
of the Directors will retire and will offer 
themselves for re-election with the 
exception of Gill Barr, Michael Ross  
and Matt Davies who will be seeking 
ratification of their appointments to  
the Board made in early 2018.

Details of Directors’ interests (beneficial and 
non-beneficial) in shares of the Group are 
given in the Remuneration Report on page 
82 and are deemed to be incorporated into 
this report by cross-reference.

The powers of the Directors are described 
in the Board terms of reference and the 
Corporate Governance Statement on 
pages 60 to 62. The terms of reference  
for the Board and its Committees are 
available on the Group’s website  
www.nbrown.co.uk

Other than a contract of service, no other 
Director had any interest in any disclosable 
contract or arrangements with the Group 
or any subsidiary Company either during 
or at the end of the year.

Directors’ and officers’ liabilities
The Company’s Articles of Association 
provide that, in so far as the law permits, 
every Director of the Group or associated 
Company may be indemnified by the 
Company against liability. In accordance 
with section 236 of the Companies Act, 
qualifying third-party indemnity provisions 
are in place for the Directors in respect of 
liabilities incurred as a result of their office, 
to the extent permitted by law. In addition, 
the Group maintains insurance for 
Directors and officers of the Group, 
indemnifying them against certain 

The Directors who served throughout the year in review were as follows:

Non-Executive Chairman

Andrew Higginson
Lord Alliance of Manchester CBE Non-Executive Director
Chief Executive Officer
Angela Spindler
Chief Financial Officer
Craig Lovelace
Non-Executive Director (resigned 18 July 2017)
Ivan Fallon
Non-Executive Director (resigned 16 January 2018)
Fiona Laird
Non-Executive Director
Ron McMillan
Non-Executive Director
Lesley Jones
Non-Executive Director
Richard Moross
Non-Executive Director (appointed 16 January 2018)
Gill Barr
Non-Executive Director (appointed 16 January 2018)
Michael Ross
Non-Executive Director (appointed 19 February 2018)
Matt Davies

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018liabilities incurred by them whilst acting  
on behalf of the Group. Both the insurance 
and indemnities applied throughout the 
financial year ended 2 March 2018 and 
through to the date of this report.

Major shareholders
In addition to the Directors’ shareholdings shown in the Remuneration Report on page 
84 and in accordance with Chapter 5 of the Disclosure Guidance and Transparency 
Rules, the following notifications had been received from holders of notifiable interests in 
the Group’s issued share capital at 13 April 2018:

Disclosure of information to auditors
The Directors who held office at the  
date of approval of this Directors’ Report 
confirm that, so far as they are each aware, 
there is no relevant audit information of 
which the Company’s auditor is unaware, 
and each director has taken all the steps 
that he or she ought to have taken as 
Director to make themselves aware of any 
relevant audit information and to establish 
that the Company’s auditor is aware of 
that information.

Governance
The Board is committed to maintaining 
high standards of corporate governance. 
Further details are contained in the 
Corporate Governance Statement on 
pages 60 to 62.

Corporate social responsibility  
and greenhouse gas emissions
Details on corporate social responsibility 
and greenhouse gas emissions are set out 
on pages 44 to 61.

Charitable and political donations
During the year, the Group made 
charitable donations of £93,670 (2017: 
£95,902). No political donations have  
been made (2017: nil). No contributions 
have been made to non-EU political 
parties (2017: nil).

Auto-enrolment and Stakeholder 
pension
With effect from 1 November 2015,  
Zurich was appointed as provider for all 
qualifying employees. As at 1 March 2018 
87.5% of all employees were members of  
a qualifying pension scheme with 1,082 
employees being auto-enrolled as at the 
date of this report. At the date of this 
report the opt out rate is 4.6%.

Financial risk management,  
objectives and policies
The Group is exposed to certain  
financial risks, namely interest rate risk, 
currency risk, liquidity risk and credit risk. 
Information regarding such financial risks 
is detailed in note 19 on pages 114 to 116. 
The Group’s risk management policies  
and procedures and the table of principal 
risks and mitigations can be found on 
pages 28 to 33.

Shareholder
Nigel Alliance OBE

Invesco Perpetual Asset Management

UBS Global Asset Management

Change of control
There are a number of agreements that 
take effect, alter or terminate upon a 
change of control of the Company such  
as commercial contracts, bank loan 
agreements, property lease arrangements 
and employee share plans. None of these 
are considered to be significant in terms  
of their likely impact on the business of  
the Group as a whole. Executive Directors’ 
service contracts are terminable by the 
Group on giving 12 months’ notice.  
There are no agreements between the 
Group and its Directors or employees that 
provide for additional compensation for 
loss of office or employment that occurs 
because of a takeover bid. No relevant 
events were reported in the year.

Significant contracts
The Group has a number of contractual 
arrangements with suppliers (both of 
goods and services) and occupies 
leasehold premises for the purpose  
of conducting its business. Whilst  
these arrangements are important to the 
business of the Group, individually none  
of them are essential to the business of the 
Group and do not require disclosure under 
section 417(5) (c) of the Companies Act.

Tax status
The Company is not a close Company 
within the meaning of the Corporation  
Tax Act 2010.

Independent auditor
The Group’s independent auditors,  
KPMG LLP (‘KPMG’), have indicated their 
willingness to continue in office and the 
Audit Committee has recommended that 
KPMG remain in office. A resolution to 
re-appoint the independent auditors  
will be proposed at the AGM.

The auditor’s fees for both audit and 
non-audit work are given in the Audit 
Committee report on page 65.

Holding  
share capital
31,489,256

23,479,558

18,481,773

% of  
issues
11.07

8.25

6.50

Voting rights and restrictions on 
transfer of shares
None of the ordinary shares in the Group 
carry any special rights with regard to control 
of the Group. There are no restrictions on 
transfers of shares other than:

•  certain restrictions which may from 
time to time be imposed by laws or 
regulations such as those relating to 
insider dealing;

•  pursuant to the Company’s code for 
securities transactions whereby the 
Directors and designated employees 
require approval to deal in the 
Company’s shares; and

•  where a person with an interest in  
the Company’s shares has been  
served with a disclosure notice and  
has failed to provide the Company  
with information concerning interests  
in those shares.

The Directors are not aware of any 
arrangements between shareholders that 
may result in restrictions on the transfer of 
securities or voting rights. The rights and 
obligations attaching to the Company’s 
ordinary shares are set out in the Articles 
of Association.

Amendment of the Company’s  
Articles of Association
The Company’s Articles of Association 
may only be amended by a special 
resolution at a general meeting of 
shareholders. Where class rights are 
varied, such amendments must be 
approved by the members of each class  
of shares separately. The Company 
currently only has one class of share.

57

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Directors’ Report 
continued

Powers of the Directors
The Directors are responsible for the 
management of the business of the 
Company and may exercise all powers 
of the Company subject to applicable 
legislation and regulation and the 
Company’s Articles of Association.

At the 2017 annual general meeting, the 
Directors were given the power to issue 
new shares up to a nominal amount of 
£10,477,542. This power will expire on  
the earlier of the conclusion of the 2018 
annual general meeting or 20 July 2018. 

Accordingly, a resolution will be proposed 
at the 2018 annual general meeting to 
renew the Company’s authority to issue 
new shares.

Directors will also be proposing a 
resolution to provide authority to issue 
new shares up to a further nominal 
amount of £10,480,037 in connection  
with an offer by way of a rights issue. 

An approval will be sought at the 2018 
general meeting for a certain number of 
shares up to a maximum nominal value 
– to be allotted pursuant to the authority 
granted to Directors set out above without 
being covered by statutory pre-emption 
rights regime. Further information 
regarding this will be included in the  
Notice of the Meeting for the AGM.

As in previous years, authorisation for  
the Directors to buy back the Company’s 
shares will not be sought at the 2018 
annual general meeting.

Employee share schemes –  
rights of control
The trustees of the N Brown Group plc 
Employee Share Ownership Trust hold 
shares on trust for the benefit of the 
Executive Directors and employees of  
the Group. The shares held by the trust 
are used in connection with the Group’s 
various share incentive plans. The trustees 
currently abstain from voting but have the 
power to vote for or against, or not at all, 
at their discretion in respect of any shares 
in the Company held in the trust. The 
trustees may, upon the recommendation 
of the Company, accept or reject any offer 
relating to the shares in any way they see 
fit, without incurring any liability and 
without being required to give reasons for 
their decision. In exercising their trustee 

powers the trustees may take all of the 
following matters into account:

•  the long-term interests of beneficiaries;
•  the interests of beneficiaries other than 

financial interests;

•  the interests of beneficiaries in their 
capacity as employees or former 
employees or their dependants;
•  the interests of persons (whether  

or not identified) who may become 
beneficiaries in the future; and

•  considerations of a local, moral, ethical, 

environmental or social nature.

Going concern
The Directors have adopted the going 
concern basis in the financial statements 
and their opinion is explained on page 101.

Viability statement
N Brown Group is a leading digital 
specialist fit fashion retailer, with over 140 
years of experience and it is the Group’s 
clear focus to maintain and enhance its 
position. Taking into account the Group’s 
current position and its principal risks and 
uncertainties as described on pages 30 
to 33 and how these are managed, the 
Directors have assessed the Group’s 
prospects and viability. 

The strategy and business model as set 
out on pages 18 to 23 are central to an 
understanding of its prospects. These 
factors provide a framework for the rolling 
three-year plan which is developed and 
reviewed by the Board to assess the 
Group’s prospects. The three year 
timeframe for assessing both the 
prospects and viability is considered  
to be appropriate due to the following:

 It is consistent with the Group’s rolling 
three-year strategic planning process.

Given the current pace of development, 
both within the Group and the wider retail 
market, projections looking out further 
than three years would not produce a 
reliable result.

The strategy and associated principal risks 
underpin the Group’s three year plan and 
scenario testing, which the Directors review 
at least annually. The three year plan makes 
certain assumptions about our core 
product and financial services growth 
drivers, margins and operating costs, 
together with the Groups cash flows, 
general liquidity and other key financial 

ratios. The three year plan review is solidly 
underpinned by the regular Board briefings 
provided by the Group’s operating board 
and the discussion of any new strategies 
undertaken by the Board in its normal 
course of business. These reviews consider 
both the market opportunity and the 
associated risks, principally the ability to 
operationally deliver any new initiatives,  
to manage its working capital performance 
and the level of financial resources available 
to the Group.

Although the strategic plan reflects the 
Directors’ best estimate of the future 
prospects of the business, they have also 
tested the potential impact on the Group 
of a number of scenarios over and above 
those included in the plan, by quantifying 
their financial impact and overlaying this on 
the detailed financial forecasts in the plan. 

Using the current strategic plan as a base 
case, alternative forecasts have been 
produced to model the effect of severe 
but plausible stress tests using four 
primary downside scenarios which have 
been derived as part of the Board’s review 
of the Group’s principal risks detailed in 
the Corporate Governance Report. 
They represent ‘severe but plausible’ 
circumstances that the Group 
could experience.

The stress tests apply a range of 
sensitivities to our headline interest rates 
and group revenue; reflecting the principal 
risks of the business, primarily through a 
reduction in the credit activities of the 
Group resulting from significant regulatory 
change, potential trading restrictions and 
penalties arising from the impact of a cyber-
attack, negative outcomes from delays to 
the Group’s IT development programme 
and an adverse outcome in respect of the 
legacy tax cases which are ongoing. 

The above considerations form the basis 
of the Board’s reasonable expectations 
that the Group will be able to continue in 
operation and meet its liabilities as they 
fall due over the three-year period from 
approval of this Annual Report.

58

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018The Directors are responsible for  
the maintenance and integrity of the 
corporate and financial information 
included on the Company’s website. 
Legislation in the UK governing the 
preparation and dissemination of  
financial statements may differ from 
legislation in other jurisdictions.

The Strategic Report on pages 1 to 51 and 
the Directors’ Report on pages 56 to 59 
are hereby approved by the Board and 
signed on behalf of the Board.

By order of the Board

Theresa Casey LL.B (Hons) (Solicitor)
Company Secretary  
17 May 2018

Responsibility statement
We confirm that to the best of our 
knowledge:

•  the financial statements, prepared in 
accordance with the applicable set of 
accounting standards, give a true and 
fair view of the assets, liabilities, 
financial position and profit or loss of 
the Company and the undertakings 
included in the consolidation taken  
as a whole; and

•  the Strategic Report and Directors’ 
Report, taken together, include a 
fair review of the development and 
performance of the business and 
the position of the issuer and 
the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole, 
together with a description of the 
principal risks and uncertainties that 
they face.

We consider the Annual Report, taken as a 
whole, is fair, balanced and understandable 
and provides the information necessary 
for shareholders to assess the Group’s 
position and performance, business model 
and strategy.

By order of the Board

Craig Lovelace
Chief Financial Officer 
17 May 2018

In preparing each of the Group and  
parent Company financial statements,  
the Directors are required to:

•  select suitable accounting policies 
and then apply them consistently;
•  make judgements and estimates  

that are reasonable, relevant, reliable 
and prudent;

•  for the Group financial statements, 

state whether they have been prepared 
in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by 
the EU;

•  for the parent Company financial 

statements, state whether applicable 
UK Accounting Standards have been 
followed, subject to any material 
departures disclosed and explained 
in the parent Company financial 
statements; 

•  assess the Group and parent 
company’s ability to continue  
as a going concern, disclosing,  
as applicable, matters related  
to going concern; and

•  use the going concern basis of 

accounting unless they either intend  
to liquidate the Group or the parent  
or to cease operations, or have no 
realistic alternative but to do so.

The Directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate accounting records that are 
sufficient to show and explain the parent 
Company’s transactions and disclose  
with reasonable accuracy at any time the 
financial position of the parent Company 
and enable them to ensure that its financial 
statements comply with the Companies 
Act 2006. They are responsible for such 
internal control as they determine is 
necessary to enable the preparation of 
financial statements that are free from 
material misstatement, whether due  
to fraud or error and have general 
responsibility for taking such steps as are 
reasonably open to them to safeguard the 
assets of the Group and to prevent and 
detect fraud and other irregularities.

Under applicable law and regulations,  
the Directors are also responsible for 
preparing a Strategic Report, Directors’ 
Report, Directors’ Remuneration 
Report and Corporate Governance 
Statement that complies with that law 
and those regulations.

59

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Corporate Governance Statement

This corporate governance statement explains the key features 
of the Group’s governance structure and how it complies with 
the UK Corporate Governance Code (the ‘Code’). 

This statement also includes items required 
by the Listing Rules and the Disclosure 
Guidance and Transparency Rules (‘DTRs’). 
Except as specifically highlighted within this 
statement the Directors consider that the 
Group has throughout the year complied 
with the provisions of the Code.

Leadership
The Board comprises nine Directors, of 
whom seven are Non-Executive including 
the Chairman. Of the seven Non-Executive 
Directors, Lord Alliance of Manchester  
is not considered by the Board to be 
independent. Full biographical details of 
all Directors appear on pages 54 and 55. 

The members of the Board are named 
below1. The Board met nine times during 
the year. Directors’ attendance at Board 
meetings was as follows:

Attendance

Andrew Higginson  
(resigned 30 April 2018)
8/9
Lord Alliance of Manchester CBE 
9/9
Angela Spindler
9/9
Ivan Fallon (resigned 18 July 2017)
5/5
Fiona Laird (resigned 16 January 2018)
6/8
Ron McMillan
9/9
Lesley Jones 
9/9
Craig Lovelace
9/9
Richard Moross
9/9
Gill Barr (appointed 16 January 2018)
1/1
1/1
Michael Ross (appointed 16 January 2018)
Matt Davies (appointed 19 February 2018) 0/0

Committees
The Board delegates authority to a  
number of Committees to deal with specific 
aspects of management and to maintain 
supervision over the internal control policies 
and procedures of the Group. These 
Committees meet regularly and have 
formal written terms of reference which are 
available for inspection on the Company’s 
website. The minutes of the meetings of 
these Committees are circulated to all 
Committee members in advance of the 
next Committee meeting, at which they  
are ratified. The following Committees  
of the Board have been established: 

•  an Audit Committee;
•  a Remuneration Committee; 
•  a Nomination and Governance 

Committee; and

business carried out by the Committee  
and setting out its recommendations.

Board activities

Some of the key activities that the Board 
has covered over the past year are:

Strategy

Review of progress so far against current 
strategic plan.

Oversight of the Fit 4 the Future 
implementation.

In depth reviews of strategy in key areas  
of the business such as international  
and partnerships.

Operational

Reviewing the budget for FY19.

Assessing marketing return on 
investment.

Monitoring brand progress.

Regulatory

Monitoring the progress of preparations 
for GDPR.

Assessment of the Viability Statement, 
Group contingent liabilities, treasury 
policy and regulatory provisions.

Stakeholder issues

Reviewed the product strategy  
to enhance the quality of design, 
sourcing, pricing and trading.

Examining the results of the Gender Pay 
Gap disclosure.

Approving the Annual Report.

Governance

Recruiting three new Non-Executive 
Directors including the new Chairman.

Undertaking an external Board 
evaluation including an assessment  
of the Committees.

The Board is responsible for all major  
policy decisions and for determining the 
operational and strategic risks it is willing to 
take in achieving its objectives. The Board 
has, where necessary, delegated operational 
matters to its Committees and sub-
Committees, and to its Executive and 
Operational Directors and senior officers. 
The Board is collectively responsible for 
providing effective leadership and 
promoting the success of the Group and 
works to a formal list of matters reserved for 
the Board (a copy of which is available on the 
Company’s website, www.nbrown.co.uk). 
Matters reserved for the Board include, 
amongst other things, decisions on business 
strategy, the approval of financial 
statements, the annual capital and operating 
expenditure plans, investment, treasury and 
dividend policies, governance issues, major 
capital projects, overseeing the Group’s risk 
control procedures, Board membership  
and the composition of its Committees  
and the Group’s ethical, social and 
environmental policies.

The Board governs through clearly 
mandated Committees, accompanied by 
robust monitoring and reporting systems. 

Responsibilities
There is a clear division of responsibilities 
between the Chairman, Matt Davies 
(formerly Andrew Higginson, resigned 
30 April 2018), who is responsible for the 
effective operation of the Board and the 
Chief Executive, Angela Spindler, who is 
responsible for the Group’s operational 
performance. Equally there is a clear 
distinction between the Chair, the Senior 
Independent Director and the Non-
Executive Directors. The table below 
summarises the position:

Chair Leader of the Board. Responsible 
for Board effectiveness including 
agendas, Board composition and 
Board meetings.

CEO Head of operational matters. 
Leader of the executive team.

SID Point of contact for shareholders  

if required.

Co-ordinator of NED only meetings

•  a Corporate Social Responsibility 

NEDs Provide constructive challenge  

Committee.

After each Committee meeting the Chair  
of that Committee makes a formal report 
to the Board of Directors detailing the 

60

and alternative views to the Board.

Evaluate the performance of the Chair.

The Chairman was considered independent 
at the time of his appointment. 

1 

  Matt Davies was appointed to the Board as an 
independent Non-Executive Director and Chairman-
Elect on 19 February 2018. Matt took over the position 
of Chairman on 1 May 2018.

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018The Board understands the need for 
Non-Executive Directors to be and remain 
independent of management in order to 
be able to exercise proper oversight and 
to effectively challenge the Executive 
Directors. The Non-Executive Directors 
who served during the financial year 
ended 3 March 2018 were: 

•  Andrew Higginson (Chairman – 

resigned 30 April 2018)
•  Lord Alliance of Manchester
•  Ivan Fallon (resigned 18 July 2017)
•  Fiona Laird (resigned 16 January 2018)
•  Richard Moross
•  Ron McMillan (Senior Independent 

Director)
•  Lesley Jones
•  Gill Barr (appointed 16 January 2018)
•  Michael Ross (appointed 16 January 2018)
•  Matt Davies (appointed as a Non-

Executive Director on 19 February 2018 
and as Chairman on 1 May 2018) 

A number of Non-Executive Director only 
meetings were held this year to allow 
NEDs to discuss matters without the 
Executive Directors present.

Day-to-day management of the Group’s 
activities is delegated to the operational 
board, known as the Executive Board, on 
which Angela Spindler and Craig Lovelace 
sit as Chief Executive Officer and Chief 
Financial Officer respectively. 

In November the members of the Board 
met with the Executive Board over a two 
day period to review the progress being 
made against, and the future development 
of, the Group’s long-term strategic plan.

Effectiveness
The Board considers that, throughout the 
year, at least half of the Board, excluding 
the Chairman, comprised independent 
Non-Executive Directors and that the 
composition of the Board had the 
necessary balance of Executive and 
Non-Executive Directors to provide  
the requisite skills, experience, challenge 
and judgement appropriate for the 
requirements of the business and full 
Board effectiveness.

The composition of the Board sub-
Committees is regularly reviewed and is in 
the process of being refreshed following 
the appointment of Gill Barr, Michael Ross 
and Matt Davies and the departure of 
Fiona Laird and Andrew Higginson.  
Where appropriate, the Committees  
will invite others to attend. 

The appointment of Gill Barr, Michael Ross 
and Matt Davies has bolstered the skills and 
experience collectively held by the Board.

Diversity
The Board recognises the importance  
of diversity, including gender, at all levels 
of the Company as well as on the Board. 
The Company is committed to equal 
opportunities and increasing diversity 
across our operations in terms of relevant 
skills, experience, ethnicity and gender. 
The Board now comprises six male 
Directors and three female Directors. The 
Board continues to consider how diversity 
can be enhanced through the Board and 
the senior management teams and across 
the Group generally, whilst ensuring that  
it appoints only the most appropriate 
candidates to the Board. 

We currently have 33% female 
representation at Board level and 30% on 
the Executive Board. This means we have 
already met the 33% target for 2020 set  
by the Davies report, and are significantly 
higher than the current FTSE 250, which 
has achieved average representation  
at 22.8%. We believe that gender 
representation makes good business 
sense, given that women make up over 
half of the UK population and almost 60% 
of our total workforce.

Strengthening our executive pipeline 
remains a priority for us and we continue 
to open up new opportunities for women, 
working with head-hunters and agencies 
that can provide true gender diversification 
in their candidate bases.

We are members of ‘Women on Boards’. 
Our aim is to promote the development of 
female Board Directors and to encourage 
senior employees to take up Non-
Executive roles in other businesses where 
opportunities arise. We also developed an 
initiative called ‘Women Like Us’ which is 
open to all women in middle management 
and above. The initiative was created to 
encourage the development of women  
in our executive pipeline. More detail 
regarding this can be found in our CSR 
report on page 47.

At the date of this report the gender split 
(male/female, senior management and 
entire workforce) is as per the diagrams  
to the right.

Board appointments
All appointments to the Board follow a 
formal, rigorous and transparent process 
to ensure we appoint the best possible 
candidate. Due regard is given to the 
needs of the Board in respect of skills, 
experience, independence and diversity. 
Further detail on the appointment of Gill 
Barr, Michael Ross and Matt Davies is 
provided in the Nomination and 
Governance Committee report. 

SENIOR MANAGEMENT (%)

45%

55%

Male  31

Female  25

EMPLOYEE DIVERSITY (%)

41%

59%

Male  1,009

Female  1,455

Employee data as at 3 March 2018.

Appointments to the Board are made 
solely on merit, based on the skills and 
experience offered by the candidate and 
required by the role. This ensures that all 
appointees have the best mix of skills and 
time to devote themselves effectively to 
the business of the Board and to discharge 
their duties to the best of their ability. 

Prior to appointment to the Board all 
Directors are informed of the expected 
time commitment. At the time of writing 
there are no concerns that any of the 
current Directors will be unable to commit 
sufficient time to the role. We have 
evaluated the commitments of the 
Chairman and are satisfied he has 
sufficient time to devote to his role.

External appointments or other significant 
commitments of the Directors require the 
prior approval of the Board. Details of such 
external appointments can be found in the 
Directors’ biographies set out on pages 54 
and 55. 

The Articles of Association of the 
Company give the Directors the power  
to consider and, if appropriate, authorise 
conflict situations where a Director’s 
declared interest may conflict or does 
conflict with the interests of the Company. 

Procedures are in place at every meeting 
for individual Directors to report and 
record any potential or actual conflicts 
which arise. The register of reported 
conflicts is reviewed by the Board at least 
annually. The Board has complied with 
these procedures during the year.

61

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Corporate Governance Statement  
continued

Accountability
The Directors have carried out a robust 
assessment of the principle risks facing 
the Company including those which 
would threaten its business model, 
future performance, solvency or liquidity. 
The Board monitors the Company’s risk 
management and internal control systems 
and at least annually carries out a review  
of the effectiveness and reports on the 
review in the Annual Report.

The Audit Committee report on pages 63 
to 65 and the risk report on pages 28 to 33 
set out the position of the Board on the 
risk to the Company, internal controls and 
its’ prospects in relation to this.

Remuneration
The Directors’ Remuneration Report 
setting out the remuneration policy and 
its implementation this financial year is 
on page 68 to 84.

No Director is involved in the approval 
of his or her own remuneration.

Details of Directors’ contract terms are 
shown in the Remuneration Report on 
pages 73 to 74. In accordance with the 
Code, the Company has made the terms 
and conditions of appointment of the 
Non-Executive Directors available for 
inspection.

Relations with shareholders
The Board recognises the importance  
of good two way communications 
between the Company and shareholders. 
Accordingly, the Board welcomes the 
opportunity to discuss the contents of this 
report with shareholders at the N Brown 
Group AGM, details of which are to follow.

Other matters
The Audit Committee report and Strategic 
Report include additional information 
which forms part of the Corporate 
Governance Statement.

Board evaluation
The Board, having carried out a 
performance evaluation, believes  
the performance of the Chairman  
and Directors, and their commitment  
to their respective roles, continues to  
be fully effective and the Board and  
its Committees continue to provide 
appropriate oversight and challenge.

In accordance with Main Principle B.6  
of the UK Corporate Governance Code, 
an internal effectiveness review of the 
Board and its Committees was undertaken 
during the second half of the year by way 
of interviews with individual Directors 
conducted by an independent consultant.

The outcome from the evaluation of the 
Board and its Committees was reviewed 
with the Chairman and considered by the 
Board. The overall view was that the Board 
remains effective, positive and cohesive 
and there has been progress in relation  
to the areas for improvement identified in 
the previous internal evaluation exercise. 
As with all evaluations, an action plan has 
been agreed by the Chairman and, based 
on this, the Board has agreed a set of 
objectives for 2018/19. 

Beyond the annual evaluation, the 
performance of the Executive Directors  
is continuously monitored throughout  
the year by the Chairman and the senior 
Non-Executive Director.

Election of Directors
Pursuant to the Code, all Directors are 
required to retire and submit themselves 
for re-election annually. Accordingly, 
each of the Directors will retire at the 
forthcoming annual general meeting and 
offer themselves for reappointment at that 
meeting with the exception of Gill Barr, 
Michael Ross and Matt Davies, who will be 
seeking ratification of their appointments 
to the Board.

All Non-Executive Directors serve 
on letters of appointment stipulating 
three-year terms. All appointments are 
terminable, without compensation, on 
between three and six months’ notice 
by either party and are subject to other 
early termination provisions without 
compensation, for example in the event 
a Director is not re-elected at the annual 
general meeting.

Board development
The Company Secretary provides an 
on-going programme of briefings for 
Directors covering legal and regulatory 
changes and developments relevant to the 
Group’s activities and Director’s areas of 
responsibility. The Company Secretary is 
also responsible for the induction of new 
Directors. New Directors are provided 
with a comprehensive pack of information 
(including terms of reference, information 
regarding the business and guidance on 
their roles and duties as Directors) and 
meetings/site visits with key employee 
contacts are arranged as appropriate. 
Inductions to the business for new 
Directors are designed to expose them  
to all areas of the Group’s operations  
but with particular emphasis on each 
Director’s area of expertise. 

We are actively monitoring the proposal 
changes to the UK Corporate Governance 
Code in order to ensure that any 
necessary changes to Board practice or 
composition are effectively implemented.

Non-Executive Directors meet with 
operational teams and the Operating 
Board and undertake site visits to ensure 
that they have the most up-to-date 
knowledge and understanding of the 
Company and its activities and to enable 
the broader population of the Group to 
benefit from the skills and experience of 
the Non-Executive Directors. All Board 
members are permitted to obtain 
independent professional advice in respect 
of their own fiduciary duties and obligations 
and have full and direct access to the 
Company Secretary, who is a qualified 
solicitor and who attends all Board and 
Committee meetings as Secretary. 

The Chairman regularly reviews and 
agrees with each Director their training 
and development needs.

Board administration
Board papers include detailed 
management reports from the Chief 
Executive and the Chief Financial Officer, 
management accounts, broker analyses, 
compliance and regulatory briefings and 
bespoke reports. A comprehensive pack 
of papers is electronically circulated to 
each Director not less than seven days 
prior to each Board meeting. Budgetary 
performance and forecasts are reviewed 
and revised at each meeting. Outside of 
the meeting there is a regular flow of 
information between the Directors 
including the weekly dissemination  
of management information statistics. 

62

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Audit Committee Report

Ron McMillan 
Chair of the 
Audit Committee

The Audit Committee

Member
Ron McMillan (Chair)
Lesley Jones
Richard Moross

No. of meetings
4/4
4/4
4/4

The Committee met four times during the year and  
attendance was as above.

Responsibilities

Reviewing the integrity of the financial statements,  
price sensitive financial releases and significant financial 
judgements and estimates relating thereto;

Monitoring the scope of work, quality, effectiveness  
and independence of the external auditors and approving 
their appointment and fees;

Monitoring and reviewing the independence and activities  
of the internal audit function;

Assisting the Board with the development and execution  
of a risk management strategy, risk policies and exposures 
and a risk register;

Keeping under review the adequacy and effectiveness of  
the Group’s internal financial controls and internal control  
and risk management systems; and

Making recommendations to the Board in relation to the 
appointment of the external auditor.

Dear Shareholder,
The Audit Committee acknowledges and embraces its role of 
protecting the interests of shareholders as regards the integrity 
of published financial information and the effectiveness of audit. 

In so doing, the Committee exercises oversight of the Group’s 
financial policies and reporting, monitors the integrity of the 
financial statements and reviews and considers significant 
financial and accounting estimates and judgements. The 
Committee satisfies itself that the disclosures in the financial 
statements about these estimates and judgements are 
appropriate and obtains from the external auditor an 
independent view of the key disclosure issues and risks.

In relation to risks and controls, the Committee ensures that these 
have been identified and that appropriate responsibilities and 
accountabilities have been set.

A key responsibility of the Committee is to review the scope  
of work undertaken by the internal and external auditors and  
to consider their effectiveness.

During the year, the Committee again oversaw the process  
used by the Board to assess the viability of the Group, the stress 
testing of key trading assumptions and the preparation of the 
viability statement which is set out on pages 58 to 59 in the 
Directors’ Report. The committee monitored the proposed 
implementation of IFRS 9, which replaces IAS 39. The Committee 
has also considered the narrative at the front end of the Annual 
Report and believes that sufficient information has been provided 
to give shareholders a fair, balanced and understandable account 
of the Group’s business.

Further information on the Committee’s responsibilities and the 
manner in which they have been discharged is set out opposite.

I shall be available at the annual general meeting in July to answer 
any questions you may have on this report and would like to thank 
my colleagues on the Committee for their help and support 
during the year.

Ron McMillan  
Chair of the Audit Committee

63

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Audit Committee Report  
continued

Committee composition
The Committee comprises three members, each of whom is an 
independent Non-Executive Director. The Committee requires 
the inclusion of one financially qualified member with recent and 
relevant financial experience. The Committee chair fulfils that 
requirement. All members are expected to have an understanding 
of financial reporting, the Group’s internal control environment, 
relevant corporate legislation, the roles and function of internal 
and external audit and the regulatory framework of the business. 
As reflected in the biographical details on pages 54 and 55, the 
Committee members have significant experience of working in 
or with companies in the retail, financial services and consumer 
goods sectors. This ensures compliance with C3.1 of the UK 
Corporate Governance Code 2016. 

The members of the Committee during the year were:

•  Ron McMillan (Chair)
•  Lesley Jones
•  Richard Moross

Details of Committee meetings and attendances are set out 
on page 63 and the timing of Committee meetings is set to 
accommodate the dates of releases of financial information 
and the approval of scope of and reviews of outputs from work 
programmes executed by the internal and external auditors. In 
addition to scheduled meetings, the chairman of the Committee 
met with the CFO, the head of internal audit and the external 
auditors on a number of occasions during the year.

Although not members of the Committee, Angela Spindler  
as CEO, Craig Lovelace as CFO, the General Counsel and 
representatives from the internal and external auditors attend  
all meetings and, in addition, the Chairman of the Board regularly 
attends meetings.

Committee activities in 2017/18
In discharging its oversight of the matters referred to in the 
introductory letter to this report and as set out below, the 
Committee was assisted by management, the General Counsel 
and the internal and external auditors.

The recurring work of the Committee comprised:

•  Consideration of the Annual Report and financial statements 

of the Group;

•  Consideration of the interim results report and non-statutory 

financial statements of the Group for the half year;

•  Consideration of the significant areas of accounting estimation 

or judgement;

•  Consideration of the significant risks included in the  

Annual Report;

•  Approval of the external auditors’ terms of reference,  

audit plan and fees; and

•  Approval of the internal audit plan.

The key matters considered by the Committee during the year 
include the following:

Regulatory environment
The Group is regulated by the FCA under a licence granted  
on 21 September 2016. Changes in laws and regulations impact  
the Group’s business, sector and market and the Committee 
continues to review the outputs of work carried out by the 
Group’s compliance function in order to satisfy itself that action  
is being taken to address the changes that are required to comply 
with the regulations. Provisions made for customer redress require 
significant levels of estimation and judgement. The Committee 
has considered the assumptions applied in recording such 
provisions, including the complaint volume, complaint uphold  

64

rate and average redress rates and consider the provisions 
recorded to be appropriate. A priority for 2018 was the oversight 
of more flexible and personalised financial services products. 

Capitalisation of software development costs 
The Group’s software development and implementation 
programme is ongoing and the Committee has continued to 
review the treatment of the significant software and project costs 
in order to satisfy itself that the Group’s approach to capitalisation 
of these costs remains appropriate. In this regard, the Committee 
has been assisted by both internal and external audit.

Bad and doubtful debts
The Group’s methodology to determine provisions for bad  
and doubtful debts in its credit ledgers is both complex and 
judgemental. A significant part of the external audit is focused  
in this area and the Committee seeks assurance from the finance 
function and the auditors that the approach to provisioning is 
consistent year on year or, if not, that changes are being made  
to better reflect changing economic or commercial circumstances. 
The Committee has also been kept appraised of the upcoming 
new requirements set out in IFRS 9.

Tax exposures
The Group continues to have a number of open tax items with the 
tax authorities and the calculation of the Group’s potential liabilities 
or assets in respect of these continues to involve a degree of 
estimation and judgement. The Board sets and oversees the 
Group’s tax strategy including tax risk. In undertaking this task the 
Group uses its tax advisors (Deloitte) and legal counsel. During the 
year the Group’s tax advisors have kept the Committee appraised 
of existing and emerging risks, and the Committee and the Board 
have considered the appropriateness of related tax provisions and 
assets and their disclosure in the Group’s financial statements.

Inventory provisioning 
Provision is made where the net realisable value of stock is 
estimated to be lower than the cost. The Committee recognises 
that there is an element of uncertainty in relation to the estimation 
of net realisable value but considers that, taking into account 
historical experience, likely future selling values and the availability 
of disposal channels, the provision is appropriate.

Brand intangibles
Included within intangible assets are brand intangibles of £8.9m 
which are legally protected or otherwise separable trade names 
acquired as part of the business combination. The calculations 
made in respect of the annual impairment test requires a series  
of assumptions and estimates of which the Committee have 
provided oversight. A summary of these assumptions is set  
out in note 12 to the accounts.

Internal controls
The Board has overall responsibility for ensuring that the Group 
maintains a sound system of internal control. There are inherent 
limitations in any system of internal control and no system can provide 
absolute assurance against material misstatements, loss or failure. 
Equally, no system can guarantee elimination of the risk of failure to 
meet the objectives of the business. Against this background, the 
Committee has helped the Board develop and maintain an approach 
to risk management which incorporates risk appetite, the framework 
within which risk is managed and the responsibilities and procedures 
pertaining to the application of the policy.

The Group is proactive in ensuring that corporate and operational 
risk are identified and managed. A corporate risk register is 
maintained which details:

1.  The risks and impact they may have

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 20182.  Actions to mitigate

3.   Risk scores to highlight the implications of occurrence

4.  Ownership

5.  Target dates for actions to mitigate

A description of the principal risks is set out on pages 28 to 33. 

The Board has confirmed that it has carried out a robust 
assessment of the principal risks facing the Group, including 
those which threaten its business model, future performance, 
insolvency or liquidity.

The Board considers that the processes undertaken by the 
Committee are appropriately robust, effective and in compliance 
with the guidelines issued by the Financial Reporting Council. 
During the year, the Board has not been advised by the 
Committee, nor has it identified itself, any failings, frauds or 
weaknesses in internal control which it has determined to be 
material in the context of the financial statements.

The Committee continues to believe that appropriate controls  
are in place throughout the Group and that the Group has  
a well-defined organisational structure with clear lines of 
responsibility and a comprehensive financial reporting system. 
The Committee also believes that the Company complies with 
the FRC guidance on risk management, internal control and 
related financial business reporting.

Going concern
The Committee considered the going concern position of the 
Group and the viability statement set out on pages 58 to 59.  
In so doing, the Committee ensured that the assumptions 
underpinning forecasts were stress tested and that the factors 
which impact risks and uncertainties were properly considered.

Other activities
During the year the Committee considered the carrying value  
of goodwill, store impairment provisions, PPI provisions and the 
accounting for pension obligations. In relation to all of the above 
matters the Committee was presented with detailed reports 
prepared by the Group’s financial team.

The Committee also received update reports on anti-money 
laundering, anti-bribery and corruption, fraud and 
whistleblowing.

Reviewing the draft interim and Annual Reports
The Committee considered in particular the following:

•  The accounting principles, policies and practices adopted  
and the adequacy of related disclosures in the reports;

•  The significant accounting issues, estimates and judgements 

of management in relation to financial reporting;

•  Whether any significant adjustments were required as a result 

of the audit;

•  Compliance with statutory tax obligations and the Group’s  

tax policy;

•  Whether the information set out in the Strategic Report was 

balanced, comprehensive, clear and concise and covered both 
positive and negative aspects of performance; and

•  Whether the use of ‘alternative performance measures’  

was appropriate.

Internal audit
The head of internal audit has a direct reporting line to the 
Committee and attends all Committee meetings. During the 
year, internal audit undertook a programme of work which was 
discussed with and agreed by both management and the 
Committee and which was designed to address both risk 

management and areas of potential financial loss. Internal audit 
also has established procedures within the business to ensure 
that new risks are identified, evaluated and managed and that 
necessary changes are made to the risk register.

During the year, the Committee received reports from internal 
audit on the following topics:

•  Customer arrears 
•  Tax policy & strategy
•  Product sourcing
•  Returns to manufacturer
•  Software implementation 
governance and control

•  Business continuity 

management

•  Stock audit
•  GDPR
•  PCI-DSS compliance
•  FCA compliance
•  Overall risk & risk 
management 

In relation to each of the above, internal audit made 
recommendations for improvements, the vast majority of  
which have been or are being implemented by management.

The Committee has evaluated the performance of internal  
audit and has concluded that it continues to provide helpful  
and constructive challenge to management and demonstrates  
a commercial and constructive view of the business.

External auditors
KPMG were appointed as external auditors on 14 July 2015. The 
partner who has been responsible for the audit since KPMG were 
appointed is Stuart Burdass, a partner in the Manchester office. 
The total fees paid to KPMG for the year ended 2 March 2018 were 
£465,000, of which £105,000 was in respect of non-audit services. 
Further details are set out in note 5 to the financial statements.

The Board’s policy in relation to the auditors undertaking 
non-audit services is that they are subject to tender processes  
with the allocation of work being done on the basis of competence, 
cost effectiveness, regulatory requirements, potential conflicts  
of interest and knowledge of the Group’s business. KPMG LLP 
has, during the year, provided non-audit services in the form of 
pensions advisory work (a project which commenced before they 
were appointed as auditors). The Committee is satisfied that, in 
relation to these services, KPMG LLP has taken actions to ensure 
that any potential conflicts of interest are properly managed.

The Committee remains mindful of the attitude investors have 
towards the auditors performing non-audit services and the new 
legislation which is operative for accounting periods beginning on 
or after 17 June 2016. This new legislation introduces a permitted 
non-audit services fee cap of 70% of the average audit fee over a 
consecutive three-year period. This cap will come into effect for 
the Group in the financial year ending February 2021.

The Committee has reviewed the performance of KPMG,  
a process which involved Committee members, the Chairman, 
the CEO, the CFO and senior members of the finance function 
and the General Counsel.

The overall conclusion of the process was that KPMG’s work 
continues to be thorough and professional and it is, therefore, the 
Committee’s recommendation that the reappointment of KPMG be 
put to shareholders at the annual general meeting on 17 July 2018. 
Given that this is only the third year of KPMG’s tenure as auditors, 
the Board has no present plans to consider an audit tender process.

The Committee reviewed the reports prepared by KPMG on  
key audit findings and the control environment, as well as the 
recommendations made by KPMG to improve processes and controls 
together with management’s responses to those recommendations. 

65

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Nomination and Governance Committee Report

Lesley Jones 
Chair of the  
Nomination and 
Governance  
Committee

The Nomination and Governance Committee

Member
Matt Davies (Chair – appointed 1 May 2018)
Lesley Jones (Chair – resigned 30 April 2018)
Andrew Higginson
Fiona Laird (Chair – resigned 16 January 2018)
Ron McMillan

No. of meetings
0/0
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1

The Committee met on one occasion during the year  
and attendance was as above.

Responsibilities

Identifying and nominating candidates to fill Board vacancies 
having evaluated the balance of skills, knowledge and 
experience already on the Board and identified the 
capabilities required for the role;

Succession planning, taking into account the skills and 
expertise needed on the Board in the future;

Reviewing the structure, size and composition (including  
the skills, knowledge and experience) of the Board and 
making recommendations to the Board with regard to  
appropriate changes; and

Reviewing the leadership needs of the Group to ensure the 
continued ability of the organisation to compete effectively  
in the marketplace.

Priorities for 2019

Linking the long-term strategy to succession planning;

Monitoring the success of the action plan put in place 
following feedback from the external Board evaluation;

Reviewing the talent pipeline and its effectiveness in  
developing diverse candidates; and

Reviewing the composition of the Committees following 
the addition of three new Non-Executive Directors, including 
the Chairman.

66

Dear Shareholder,
The objectives of the Committee are to ensure that the Board is 
comprised of individuals possessing the requisite skills, knowledge 
and experience.

In addition the Committee is responsible for ensuring that 
corporate governance meets best practice standard and advises 
the Board accordingly. 

I became chair of the Nomination and Governance Committee 
following the resignation of Fiona Laird on 6 June 2017. I am pleased 
that following the appointment of Matt Davies as Chairman of the 
Board, Matt has agreed to take on the chairmanship of the Committee 
effective 1 May 2018. The other current members of the Committee 
are outgoing Chairman Andrew Higginson and Ron McMillan. 

Under its formal terms of reference the Nominations and Governance 
Committee is tasked with making recommendations to the Board in 
respect of Director appointments. This includes, where appropriate, 
the appointments of the Chairman of the Board, members of the 
Executive Board and other senior staff of the operating company. 
The Chief Executive is not a member of the Committee but is invited 
to attend its meetings from time to time when required.

During the year the Committee held one meeting with full 
attendance by all members. Activities undertaken included 
a review of the Committee’s terms of reference, a review of 
external appointments of Board members, recruitment of three 
new Non-Executive Directors (including a Chairman-Elect) and 
a Board evaluation.

The Committee evaluates Board candidates on merit, against 
objective criteria, taking into account the skills and experience 
required to perform the duties of the post with due regard to 
diversity and gender. Where appropriate, external search 
consultants are engaged.

In the course of the year Gill Barr, Michael Ross and Matt Davies 
were all recruited as independent Non-Executive Directors. Matt 
Davies was also recruited as Chairman-Elect and has taken up the 
position as Chairman following an orderly handover from Andrew 
Higginson. All three new board members were appointed via a 
transparent and robust process which was led by Ron McMillan, 
Senior Independent Director, on behalf of the Committee.

For Gill and Michael’s appointments, Russell Reynolds Associates 
were appointed by the Committee as external agents to assist in the 
discharge of its duties. They ran a comprehensive external candidate 
search and selection process to find suitable independent Directors 
with the appropriate mix of skills and experience. Russell Reynolds 
Associates has no other connection with the Company.

In the search to fulfil the Chairmanship, Zygos Partnership were 
used as our external agents. Zygos has no other connection with 
the Company.

In accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code, the  
Board undertook an external board evaluation facilitated by Equity 
Communications. Both the Board and its Committees were found  
to be functioning well and board and committee meetings were 
deemed to be managed effectively and in accordance with best 
practice. Some recommendations for improvement were suggested 
and we will update shareholders on the progress that we make in 
implementation of these recommendations in the next Annual Report. 

Lesley Jones  
Chair of the Nomination and Governance Committee

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
CSR Committee Report

Michael Ross 
Chair of the 
CSR Committee

The CSR Committee

No. of meetings
0/0
2/2
2/2

Member
Michael Ross (Chair – appointed 16 January 2018)
Angela Spindler (Chief Executive Officer) 
Theresa Casey (Company Secretary  
and Group head of CSR)
Fiona Laird (Chair – resigned 16 January 2018)
Ralph Tucker (Chief Product and Supply Officer)
Ian Carr (Logistics Director – resigned 1 March 2018)
Tanya McCartney (Head of Culture, Talent and Policy – 
resigned 29 December 2017)

2/2
2/2
2/2

2/2

The committee met twice during the year and attendance  
was as above.

Responsibilities

Reviewing and making recommendations to the Board 
concerning matters of Group policy on all areas of Corporate 
Social Responsibility (‘CSR’);

Reviewing and reporting on how we look after our 
environment, source our products and work with the 
community and our employees; and

Updating shareholders or a wider audience as necessary  
on the work of the Committee.

Priorities for 2019

Reviewing and improve the effectiveness of our charity 
strategy;

Improving oversight and monitoring of all CSR activity  
across the Group;

Reviewing the CSR Charter and set a further three-year  
plan; and 

Reviewing, and increasing if appropriate, environmental 
targets to ensure they are stretching.

Dear Shareholder,
Since my appointment to the Board in January I have taken on the 
role of CSR Committee Chair. I would like to thank Fiona Laird for 
her contributions to the Committee. 

The Committee successfully launched the Group’s CSR Charter  
in 2015 to highlight our passion for fair fashion, entitled ‘Taking 
Care of Our World’. The Charter was designed to align with,  
and implement, our three CSR pillars of ‘All People, One Planet,  
Every Product’. We are delighted to report that progress is  
in line with our expectations. Further detail on this is available  
in the CSR report on pages 44 to 51. 

At our next CSR Committee meeting we will review the CSR 
Charter and discuss our ambitions for the next three years.

As is expected of a CSR Committee, we continue to be involved 
in a wide range of issues touching every area of the business. 
Over the year the Committee has discussed modern slavery, 
charity engagement, environmental training, living wage and 
apprenticeships amongst many others. 

Below are examples of some of the achievements made during 
the year:

•  Online modules on a number of CSR topics, including modern 

slavery and how to be energy aware, have been made 
available to all staff.

•  New targets on energy usage have been implemented.
•  A review of the commercial vehicle fleet and use of pool cars 

has led to the implementation of a number of energy and cost 
saving measures. 

•  Our revised Modern Slavery statement was published in 

October and we intend to continue development in this area 
to further reduce the risk of slavery in our supply chain. 

Looking ahead, the focus of the Committee over the next year 
will be to increase the visibility of our CSR activities. We aim to 
increase accountability by introducing further key performance 
indicators which will assist us with becoming more accountable 
and monitoring our progress more effectively. We will be 
adopting a risk based approach in order to allocate resources 
where they will have the greatest impact.

I look forward to reporting on this further in our next Annual Report.

Michael Ross  
Chair of the CSR Committee

67

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Directors’ Remuneration Report

Gill Barr 
Chair of the  
Remuneration 
Committee

The Remuneration Committee

Member

No. of meetings

Gill Barr (Chair – appointed 16 January 2018)

Fiona Laird (Chair – resigned 16 January 2018)

Ron McMillan

Richard Moross

0/0

3/3

3/3

3/3

The Committee met three times during the year and  
attendance was as above.

Responsibilities

Setting and reviewing the remuneration policy and 
determining the total individual remuneration package for  
all Executive Directors, the Company’s Chairman and other 
designated senior executives; 

Recommending and monitoring the level and structure of 
remuneration for senior management having regard to pay 
and employment conditions across the Group;

Approving the design of, and determining targets for,  
any performance-related pay schemes operated by the 
Company and approving the total annual payments made 
under such schemes;

Reviewing the design of all share incentive plans for approval 
by the Board and shareholders;

Overseeing any major changes in employee benefits 
structures throughout the Company; and

Ensuring that the Company maintains contact as required 
with its principal shareholders about remuneration.

Priorities for 2019

The Committee will review the remuneration policy ahead  
of the 2019 AGM to ensure that it continues to support the 
business strategy;

The Committee will continue to monitor the proposed 
amendments to the UK Corporate Governance Code  
and the impact on the Committee’s operation; and

The Committee will continue to foster a close relationship 
with shareholders in developing the new remuneration policy.

68

Dear Shareholder,
I was appointed as Chair of the Remuneration Committee upon 
my appointment to the Board in January 2018 and I am pleased 
to present the Directors’ Remuneration Report for 2017/18 on 
behalf of the Board. 

This report contains the following parts:

•  This ‘Annual Statement’, which sets the context for and explains 
the remuneration outcomes for the financial year under review, 
summarises the operation of the policy for the year ahead and 
the work that the Committee will be undertaking during the year;

•  An ‘Annual Report on Remuneration’, which provides 

shareholders with details of the remuneration paid to the 
Executive Directors for the performance delivered in 2017/18. 
Both the Annual Statement and Annual Report on 
Remuneration will be subject to an advisory vote at the 
forthcoming AGM; and

•  The ‘Directors’ Remuneration Policy’ which was approved by 
shareholders at the 2016 AGM and is included in this report  
for ease of reference.

Remuneration outcomes for 2017/18
Salary increases were effective from 1 June 2017 and our CEO 
and CFO each received a 2% increase, in line with the average 
workforce increase. 

The 2017/18 annual bonus was determined as to 70% by adjusted 
Group profit targets, 20% by corporate objectives and 10% by 
personal objectives. Bonuses have been awarded to the CEO of 
100.1% of salary out of a maximum opportunity of 150% of salary 
and to the CFO 84.3% of salary out of a maximum of 125% of 
salary. Further details of performance against the targets set  
is included in the Annual Report on Remuneration. 60% of  
the bonus will be paid in cash and 40% is deferred in shares  
in the Company for a three-year period. 

The Committee has carefully reviewed the formulaic bonus 
outcomes against the performance of the Group as a whole  
and is satisfied that the bonuses are appropriate. The Committee 
recognises that the PBT target range that was set for FY2017/18 
was lower than that set for FY2016/17. However, the range was 
considered challenging by the Committee, taking into account the 
economic and business outlook at the time the targets were set. 

The significant differentiator between the statutory and adjusted 
profit figure has been the provision relating to customer redress 
for historic general insurance products sold between 2006 and 
2014. As this pre-dated the executives joining the business the 
Committee is comfortable that this issue should not be 
recognised in their bonus payment.

For the LTIP award granted in August 2015 the EPS targets have 
not been achieved and it is unlikely that the TSR targets will be 
achieved either, although the performance period for the TSR 
part of the award does not end until June 2018. Accordingly,  
the awards will lapse.

Implementation of policy for 2018/19
Since my appointment I have worked with my fellow Committee 
members to review the implementation of the Executive 
Directors’ Remuneration Policy for 2018/19.

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Directors’ remuneration policy

This report sets out the information required by Schedule 5 
and Schedule 8 to the Large and Medium-sized Companies and 
Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008, as amended. 
The report also satisfies the relevant requirements of the Listing 
Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority, and describes how the 
Board has applied the principles and complied with the provisions 
relating to Directors’ remuneration in the Code.

The full Directors’ Remuneration Policy is shown on the following 
pages. This was approved at the 2016 AGM and is effective for 
three years from that date.

The Committee’s policy ensures that the remuneration package  
is linked to the Company’s annual and long-term strategy and 
that it is capable of attracting, motivating and retaining Executive 
Directors. The policy aims to reward Executive Directors by 
offering them competitive remuneration packages, which are 
prudently constructed, sufficiently stretching and linked to 
long-term profitability and which do not encourage excessive 
risk taking.

In particular, the Committee strives to ensure that remuneration 
packages are:

•  aligned with the Group’s strategic plan;
•  aligned with shareholders’ interests;
•  measured against stretching targets, both in absolute and 

relative terms;

•  competitive and sufficiently flexible to support the recruitment 

needs of the business;

•  paid in a combination of cash and shares; and
•  linked to performance measured over annual and three-year 

performance periods.

To ensure continuing alignment with the Group’s business 
strategy, the Committee has agreed some changes to the 
operation of the Policy compared to 2017/18, as follows:

•  Base salaries for the CEO and CFO will be increased by 2%  

in line with the increases of the general workforce;

•  Annual bonus maximum will remain unchanged at 150% of salary 
for the CEO and 125% of salary for the CFO and will be subject 
to the same mix of profit (70%), corporate objectives (20%) and 
personal objectives (10%). This year corporate objectives will be 
focused more directly on achieving the strategic and operational 
priorities of the business. Details of these objectives are set out  
in the Annual Report on Remuneration;

•  The LTIP awards to be granted during the year will remain 

unchanged at 150% of salary for the CEO and 125% of salary 
for the CFO and will be subject to the same mix of EPS (50%), 
cashflow (30%) and revenue performance conditions (20%);
•  The Committee has reviewed the target ranges for this year’s 
LTIP awards in light of the business plan, external outlook and 
analysts’ consensus. The Committee has set target ranges for 
this year’s LTIP awards that are lower than those set for the 
2017/18 LTIP awards. The ranges are however at a level that 
provides an appropriately stretching incentive taking into 
account the challenging general market and retail outlook 
against which they are set;

•  The EPS growth target range will be 3%-8% p.a CAGR, Free 
Cash Flow targets will be £350m to £420m and the revenue 
range will be 3%-5% p.a CAGR. These new ranges are 
considered equivalently challenging to the target range set  
for prior years’ awards and still represent a significant stretch;

•  Whilst reviewing the target ranges we have also taken the 

opportunity to remove RPI from the EPS range and introduce 
a compound growth rate bringing the target structure into line 
with current market practice;

•  Taking into account best practice and the changes envisaged 
to the Corporate Governance Code the Committee has also 
determined that from 2018/19, LTIP awards will be subject to 
a two-year post vesting holding period, ensuring a five-year 
period from the date of grant of awards to the earliest 
opportunity for sale of vested shares.

Finally, following some feedback on last year’s remuneration 
reporting and our own internal review, we have enhanced the 
disclosure to provide clear and transparent details of performance 
against targets and resulting remuneration outcomes. 

Focus for 2018/19
Our Directors’ Remuneration Policy must be brought to 
shareholders for its triennial approval at our 2019 AGM.  
The Committee will therefore carry-out a full and detailed  
review during the financial year. As part of the review I will be 
consulting our largest shareholders about a new policy and,  
as the new Chair of the Committee, I very much look forward  
to this engagement opportunity.

If you have any questions on this report I will be available at the 
Annual General Meeting. I very much hope that you will support 
the Annual Report on Remuneration at our forthcoming meeting.

Gill Barr  
Chair of the Remuneration Committee

69

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Directors’ Remuneration Report 
continued

Summary of components of Executive Directors’ remuneration
The table below summarises the Committee’s policy for the main components of remuneration.

Element

Salary

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Maximum

Performance assessment

Reflects the performance of 
the individual, their skills 
and experience, and the 
responsibilities of the role.

Reviewed annually, taking account 
of absolute Group profitability and 
performance against personal and 
corporate objectives.

Salary increases will normally 
be in line with increases 
awarded to other employees 
of the Group.

None, although overall 
individual performance is a 
factor considered when setting 
and reviewing salaries.

Provides an appropriate 
level of basic fixed income.

Annual bonus

Drives and rewards annual 
delivery of financial, 
corporate and personal 
goals.

Annual performance targets 
are aligned to the long-term 
strategic KPIs of the 
Company and aimed at 
increasing shareholder 
value, whilst being prudent 
and safeguarding the future 
of the Company.

Deferral provides alignment 
with shareholders and 
assists with retention.

Set with reference to the levels of 
base salary for similar positions with 
comparable status, responsibility 
and skills in competitor 
organisations of comparable size 
and complexity, in particular those 
in the home shopping and retail 
market sectors.

When reviewing salary increases 
the Committee takes into account 
the impact of any increase to  
base salaries on the total 
remuneration package.

Any changes normally take effect 
from 1 June.

Targets are reviewed annually to 
ensure that they are appropriate to 
the current market conditions, the 
long-term strategy of the Company 
and that they continue to remain 
stretching and challenging.

Bonuses will be paid 60% in cash, 
with 40% deferred as a conditional 
award of shares.

Vesting of future deferred shares  
is at the end of three years from 
the award of the bonus, subject  
to continued employment (save  
in ‘good leaver’ scenarios).

The payment of any earned bonus 
remains ultimately at the discretion 
of the Committee.

Executives may also be entitled to 
receive dividends equivalents on 
vested shares.

More significant increases 
may be awarded at the 
discretion of the Committee, 
for example: where there is a 
change in responsibilities or 
scope of the role; to reflect 
individual development and 
performance in the role  
(e.g. for recent hires); or in 
exceptional circumstances.

Chief Executive:  
up to 150% of base salary p.a.

Other Executive Directors:  
up to 125% of base salary p.a.

A significant majority of the 
annual bonus will normally be 
determined by reference to 
performance against stretching 
Group profit measures.

Additional targets linked to 
corporate performance and 
individual targets will be applied.

Personal objectives will be 
measurable and linked to goals 
that are consistent with the 
Group’s longer-term goals.

Performance below threshold 
results in zero payment.

Payment rises from 0% to 100% 
of the maximum opportunity for 
levels of performance between 
threshold and maximum, with 
50% of the maximum normally 
payable for on-target 
performance.

Includes a ‘clawback’ 
mechanism in the event of 
material misstatement of the 
Group’s financial results or 
individual misconduct.

70

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018The Committee has the 
discretion to change the 
weightings of performance 
measures, or use different 
measures for awards so that 
they are directly aligned with 
the Group’s strategic objectives 
for each performance period.

Targets are set by the 
Remuneration Committee prior 
to each grant and will be based 
on a sliding scale. For each 
measure, performance below 
threshold results in zero 
payment. Payment rises from 
25% at threshold to 100% of the 
maximum opportunity at a 
maximum performance level.

Includes a ‘clawback’ 
mechanism in the event of a 
material misstatement of the 
Group’s financial results or 
individual misconduct.

These are broad based plans 
and are not subject to 
performance targets.

Element

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Maximum

Performance assessment

Long-term 
incentive plan 
‘LTIP’

Provides appropriate 
incentives to reward sustained 
success through the 
achievement of challenging 
business targets, thereby 
aligning the interests of 
shareholders and Executives.

Annual grants of performance 
shares which vest, subject to the 
Group’s performance, measured 
over three years.

Participation and all awards are 
subject to the discretions given to 
the Committee in the plan rules.

Normal maximum of 150%  
of salary.

Exceptional circumstances 
maximum of 200% of salary.

Executives may also receive 
dividend equivalents on  
vested shares.

The Committee retains the 
discretion to subject the LTIP 
awards to a holding period of  
up to two years post vesting.

The Group operates an HM 
Revenue & Customs approved 
savings related share option 
scheme for the benefit of Group 
employees provided that they 
have completed at least six 
months’ service. Participation  
in the SIP may also be offered.

The Company operates a defined 
contribution plan and may also 
provide cash pension contributions 
or cash supplements in lieu.

Main benefits currently include 
private medical insurance and a  
car allowance. Executive Directors 
are eligible for other benefits  
which are introduced for the wider 
workforce on broadly similar terms.

Any reasonable business related 
expenses (including tax thereon) 
can be reimbursed if determined 
to be a taxable benefit.

All-employee 
share schemes 
(SAYE and SIP)

All employees, including 
Executives, are able to 
acquire shares by 
participating in the  
Group’s all-employee  
share plan at the discretion 
of the Committee.

Pension

Provides retirement 
benefits that reward 
sustained contribution.

Other benefits Provides a competitive 

package of benefits that 
assists with recruitment  
and retention.

The plans are subject to 
statutory individual limits as 
amended from time-to-time 
or such lower limits as set by 
the Group.

N/A.

Up to 15% of salary as a 
Company contribution to a 
defined contribution pension 
scheme and/or as a cash 
allowance.

Car and fuel allowance up to 
£20,000 per annum.

N/A.

Other benefits will be in line 
with market. The value of 
each benefit is based on the 
cost to the Company and is 
not predetermined.

Notes:
1  A description of how the Company intends to implement the policy set out in this table for 2018/19 is set out in the Annual Report on Remuneration.
2  The remuneration policy for the Executive Directors and other senior Executives is designed with regard to the policy for employees across the Group as a whole. However, there are some 
differences in the structure of the remuneration policy for senior Executives. In general, these differences arise from the development of remuneration arrangements that are market 
competitive for the various categories of individuals. They also reflect the fact that, in the case of the Executive Directors and senior executives, a greater emphasis tends to be placed on 
performance-related pay in the market.

3  All-employee share plans do not have performance conditions. Executive Directors are eligible to participate in the SAYE and SIP on the same terms as other employees.
4  Copies of the LTIP rules are available on request from the Company Secretary.
5 
6  Awards may be structured as nil cost options, conditional awards of shares and may be delivered through a Joint Share Ownership Plan structure.

LTIP awards granted in 2018 are subject to performance conditions described in the Annual Report on Remuneration.

71

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Legacy arrangements
In approving the remuneration policy, authority is given to the 
Company to honour any commitments previously entered into 
with the current or former Directors in accordance with the 
relevant plan rules, where applicable. It is also part of this policy 
that the Company will honour payments or awards crystallising 
after the effective date of this policy but arising from commitments 
entered into at a time when the relevant individual was not a 
Director of the Company. Details of any payments to former 
Directors will be set out in the Annual Report on Remuneration.

Selection of performance metrics and targets
All incentives are subject to the individual review and scrutiny of 
the Committee, particularly in the case of share incentives, both 
at award and vesting to ensure that performance has been 
correctly adjudicated and to safeguard against excessive overall 
reward. Variable pay and remuneration is linked to both corporate 
and individual performance and is benchmarked to attract and 
retain the highest quality people.

The annual bonus is designed to thoroughly stretch the 
performance of the Executive and is linked to Group profit,  
the achievement of certain business targets and personal 
objectives. These targets are reviewed and agreed by the 
Committee at the beginning of each financial year to ensure  
that they are appropriate to the current market conditions and  
the long-term strategy of the Company, and that they continue  
to remain stretching and challenging. The targets are linked  
to KPIs which are drawn from, and relate to, the achievement of 
‘milestones’ contained in the Company’s strategic long-term plan. 
This ensures they are aligned to the strategic objectives of the 
Company and designed to increase shareholder value, whilst being 
prudent and safeguarding the long-term future of the Company.

The Committee considers the Group’s performance on 
environmental, social and governance (‘ESG’) issues when setting 
the remuneration of any Executive Director and is of the opinion 
that the incentive arrangements for senior managers do not raise 
ESG risks by inadvertently motivating irresponsible behaviour or 
the taking of undue risks with the business.

Shareholding guidelines
It is the Board’s policy that Executive Directors build and retain  
a minimum shareholding in the Company. Under these guidelines 
the Chief Executive and the Chief Financial Officer are respectively 
required to hold Company shares equal in value (at the time of 
acquisition) to 200% and 100% of their base salary, respectively, 
and to have met this guideline within five years of appointment.

Details of the current shareholdings of the Executive Directors  
are provided later in this report.

Directors’ Remuneration Report 
continued

How employees’ pay is taken into account
The remuneration policy for the Executive Directors is designed 
with regard to the policy for employees across the Group as a 
whole. The Company’s ability to meet growth expectations and 
compete effectively is dependent on the skills, experience and 
performance of all of our employees. As a result, our employment 
policies, remuneration and benefit packages for employees are 
regularly reviewed. Whilst there are some differences in the 
structure of the remuneration policy, these reflect individuals’ 
differing responsibilities, with the principal difference being the 
increased emphasis on performance related pay for the more 
senior Executives within the organisation.

Although the Committee does not consult directly with 
employees on Directors’ pay, the Committee does take into 
consideration the pay and employment conditions of all 
employees when setting the policy for Directors’ remuneration. 
The Committee is also mindful of any changes to the pay and 
benefit conditions for employees when considering the policy  
for Directors’ pay.

The Committee is mindful of the likely broader remit of the 
Remuneration Committee and the requirement to engage with 
employees following the proposed changes to the UK Corporate 
Governance Code and will monitor these developments carefully.

Committee discretions
The Committee operates the Group’s variable incentive  
plans according to their respective rules and in accordance  
with HMRC rules where relevant. To ensure the efficient 
administration of these plans and to be consistent with  
market practice, the Committee will retain certain  
operational discretions. These include:

•  selecting plan participants;
•  determining the timing of grants of awards and/or payment;
•  determining the quantum of awards and/or payments (within 

the limits set out in the policy table prior);

•  determining the extent of vesting based on the assessment  

of performance;

•  making the appropriate adjustments required in certain 
circumstances (e.g. change of control, rights issues,  
corporate restructuring events, and special dividends);

•  determining ‘good leaver’ status for incentive plan  

purposes and applying the appropriate treatment; and

•  undertaking the annual review of weighting of performance 
measures, and setting targets for the annual bonus plan and 
LTIP from year to year.

If an event occurs which results in the Annual Bonus Plan, 
Deferred Share Bonus Plan or LTIP performance conditions and/
or targets being deemed no longer appropriate (e.g. a material 
acquisition or divestment), the Committee will have the ability  
to adjust appropriately the measures and/or targets and alter 
weightings, provided that the revised conditions or targets are 
not materially less difficult to satisfy.

Any use of the above discretions would, where relevant, be 
explained in the Annual Report on Remuneration and may, as 
appropriate, be the subject of consultation with the Company’s 
major shareholders.

72

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Name
Angela Spindler

Date of contract
1 July 2013

Potential termination payment
12 months’ salary and benefits

Craig Lovelace

6 January 2015

12 months’ salary and benefits

Other than in certain ‘good leaver’ circumstances (including, but 
not limited to, redundancy, ill-health or retirement or on a change 
of control), no bonus would be payable unless the individual 
remains employed and is not under notice at the payment date. 
Any bonuses paid to a ‘good leaver’ would be based on an 
assessment of their individual and the Company’s performance 
over the period, and normally pro-rated for the proportion of the 
bonus year worked.

Deferred bonus share awards will also normally lapse on cessation 
of employment, unless the Executive Director is deemed to be a 
‘good leaver’ by the Committee. Awards will vest early on a 
change of control subject to the plan rules.

With regards to long-term incentive awards, the LTIP rules 
provide that other than in certain ‘good leaver’ circumstances, 
awards lapse on cessation of employment. Where an individual  
is a ‘good leaver’, the Committee’s policy for future LTIP awards 
will be to permit awards to remain outstanding until the end of 
the original performance period, when a pro-rata reduction will 
be made to take account of the proportion of the vesting period 
that elapsed prior to termination of employment, although the 
Committee has discretion to partly or completely disapply 
pro-rating in certain circumstances. On a change of control 
awards would vest, subject to the extent to which the 
performance conditions have been achieved and, normally, 
pro-rating for time. The Committee has discretion to determine 
‘good leaver’ treatment. In doing so, it will take account of the 
reason for their departure and the performance of the individual.

How shareholders’ views are taken into account
The Committee considers shareholder feedback received 
regarding the Directors’ Remuneration Report and guidance 
from shareholder representative bodies more generally.  
As appropriate, the Committee also seeks feedback from 
shareholders on specific matters. These views are key inputs 
when shaping remuneration policy.

In developing a new remuneration policy to be approved by 
shareholders at the 2019 AGM, the Committee will engage  
with major shareholders and representative bodies.

Executive Directors’ service agreements  
and termination policy
It is the Company’s policy that Executive Directors should have 
contracts with an indefinite term providing for a maximum of 
12 months’ notice.

The policy is that the Company does not make payments beyond 
its contractual obligations on termination. In addition, Executive 
Directors are expected to mitigate their loss or, within existing 
contractual constraints, accept phased payments. The 
Committee seeks to ensure that there are no unjustified 
payments for failure. Neither of the Executive Directors’ contracts 
provides for liquidated damages. There are no special provisions 
contained in any of the Executive Directors’ contracts that 
provide for longer periods of notice on a change of control of the 
Company. Furthermore, there are no special provisions providing 
for additional compensation on an Executive Director’s cessation 
of employment with the Company. Where the Director may be 
entitled to pursue a legal claim, the Company will be entitled to 
negotiate settlement terms that the Committee considers to be 
in the best interests of the Company and to enter into a 
settlement agreement to effect the terms agreed under the 
service contract and any additional statutory or other claims.  
The Committee may pay reasonable outplacement and legal  
fees where considered appropriate. 

POTENTIAL REMUNERATION SCENARIOS FOR EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS    
(£’000) 

2017/18

2018/19

2,321

36%

2,366

36%

1,281

16%

33%

36%

657

1,276

34%

34%

730
15%
30%

403

1,306

16%

33%

36%

669

1,302

34%

34%

745
15%
30%

410

100%

51%

28%

100%

51%

28%

100%

55%

32%

100%

55%

32%

y
a
P
d
e
x
F

i

t
e
g
r
a
T

m
u
m
x
a
M

i

y
a
P
d
e
x
F

i

t
e
g
r
a
T

m
u
m
x
a
M

i

y
a
P
d
e
x
F

i

t
e
g
r
a
T

m
u
m
x
a
M

i

y
a
P
d
e
x
F

i

t
e
g
r
a
T

m
u
m
x
a
M

i

Angela Spindler

Craig Lovelace

Angela Spindler

Craig Lovelace

Total Fixed Pay

Annual Bonus

Long-term Share Grants

Assumptions:
1  Fixed pay = salary to be paid in year, benefits and pension provision.
2  On target = fixed pay plus target annual bonus (50% of the maximum) of 75% of salary for the Chief Executive and 62.5% of salary for the Chief Financial Officer plus target LTIP awards  

of 37.5% of salary for the Chief Executive and 31.25% for the Chief Financial Officer.

3  Maximum = fixed pay plus maximum annual bonus of 150% of salary for the Chief Executive and 125% for the Chief Financial Officer plus maximum LTIP awards of 150% of salary for the 

Chief Executive and 125% for the Chief Financial Officer.

4  Salary levels (on which other elements of the packages are calculated) are based on those effective from 1 June 2017).
5  The value of taxable benefits is based on an estimated cost of £19,000 in respect of the Chief Executive and £18,000 for the Chief Financial Officer and includes a car allowance and 

health insurance.

6  Pension provision is 15% of salary for the Chief Executive and 10% for the Chief Financial Officer.

73

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
 
 
 
 
If it is necessary to buy-out incentive pay, which would be 
forfeited by reason of leaving the previous employer, in order  
to secure the appointment, this would be provided for taking  
into account the form (cash or shares), timing and expected value 
(i.e. likelihood of meeting any existing performance criteria) of the 
remuneration being forfeited and such other specific matters as it 
considers relevant. Existing arrangements may be bought out on 
terms that are no more favourable than the Committee considers 
is required to provide reasonable compensation to the incoming 
Director for the awards they will be losing. Existing plans will be 
used to the extent possible (subject to the exceptional limits 
contained in the plan rules), however, the Committee retains 
discretion to agree bespoke arrangements and, if required,  
to make use of the flexibility provided by the Listing Rules to 
make awards without prior shareholder approval when buying 
out existing entitlements. The service contract for a new 
appointment would be in accordance with the policy for  
the current Executive Directors.

In the case of an internal hire, any outstanding variable pay 
awarded in relation to the previous role will be allowed to pay  
out according to its terms of grant.

Fees for a new Chairman or Non-Executive Director will be set  
in line with the approved policy.

Directors’ Remuneration Report 
continued

For awards granted under the LTIP, awards lapse if cessation 
occurs during the financial year in which an award is granted. 
Thereafter awards held by good leavers may vest subject to 
performance without pro-rating. On a change of control existing 
awards would not be pro-rated.

Apart from service contracts, no Executive Director has  
any material interest in any contract with the Company  
or its subsidiaries.

Copies of Executive Directors’ service contracts (and also 
Non-Executive Directors’ letters of appointment) are available  
for inspection at the Company’s registered office on application 
to the Company Secretary.

Recruitment of Executive Directors
Base salary levels will be set in accordance with the Company’s 
remuneration policy, taking account of the Executive’s skills, 
experience and their current remuneration package. Where it  
is appropriate to offer a lower salary initially, a series of above 
inflation increases to the desired salary positioning may be given 
over subsequent years subject to individual and Company 
performance.

Benefits and pension will generally be provided in accordance 
with the approved policy, with relocation expenses and/or an 
expatriate allowance paid for if necessary. For an overseas 
appointment, the benefit and pension arrangements may be 
tailored to reflect local market practice (subject to the overall 
maximum limits set out in the policy table). Assistance with 
relocation may be provided where appropriate. Tax equalisation 
may also be considered as may payment of the Executive’s legal 
fees in connection with the appointment.

The variable pay opportunity will be in accordance with the 
Company’s approved policy as detailed above. However, 
different performance measures and targets may be set for the 
first year in the case of the annual bonus and long-term incentives 
taking into account the responsibilities of the individual, and the 
point in the financial year at which they joined. A new employee 
may be granted normal annual share awards in the first year of 
employment in addition to any awards made with respect to prior 
employment being forfeited. Such awards would normally be 
made shortly following an appointment (assuming the Company 
is not in a close period).

74

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Policy for Non-Executive Directors fees

Element

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Non-Executive 
Directors’ and 
Chairman’s 
fees

Takes account of recognised 
practice and set at a level 
that is sufficient to attract 
and retain high-calibre 
Non-Executives.

All Non-Executive Directors have specific terms of engagement and their 
remuneration is determined by the Board within the limits set by the 
Articles of Association and based on independent surveys of fees paid  
to Non-Executive Directors of similar companies.

The Chairman is paid a single fee for all his responsibilities.

Maximum

Performance 
assessment

N/A.

N/A.

The Non-Executives are paid a basic fee. The Chairs of Committee  
and Senior Independent Director receive additional fees to reflect their 
extra responsibilities.

Non-Executive Directors may not participate in any of the Company’s 
share incentive schemes or performance-based plans and are not eligible 
to join the Company’s pension scheme.

Any reasonable business related expenses (including tax thereon) can  
be reimbursed if determined to be a taxable benefit and limited benefits 
relating to travel, accommodation, secretarial support and hospitality 
provided in relation to the performance of their duties.

When reviewing fee levels, account is taken of market movements in 
Non-Executive Director fees, Board Committee responsibilities, ongoing 
time commitments, the general economic environment and the level of 
increases awarded to the wider workforce.

In exceptional circumstances, additional fees may be paid where  
there is a substantial increase in the time commitment required of 
Non-Executive Directors.

If there is a temporary yet material increase in the time commitment 
required of Non-Executive Directors, the Board may pay additional fees 
on a pro-rata basis to recognise the additional workload.

Non-Executive Directors’ letters of appointment
Non-Executive Directors are retained on letters of appointment. Other than the Chairman and Lord Alliance, whose letters of 
appointment provide for six months notice in the event of early termination, all Non-Executive appointments are on three-year rolling 
terms terminable upon three months’ notice. All appointments are subject to successful re-election upon retirement at the annual 
general meeting. Termination carries no right to compensation other than that provided by general law.

Brief details of Non-Executive Directors’ contracts are summarised below:

Name
Lord Alliance of Manchester CBE

Ivan Fallon (resigned 18 July 2017)

Andrew Higginson

Fiona Laird (resigned 16 January 2018)

Ronald McMillan

Lesley Jones

Richard Moross

Gill Barr

Michael Ross

Matt Davies

Date of contract/  
letter of appointment
16 May 2007

1 October 1994

3 July 2012

1 March 2013

1 March 2013

30 September 2014

13 September 2016

6 December 2017

26 January 2018

19 February 2018

Date current term  
commenced
10 April 2016

10 April 2016

3 July 2016

1 April 2016

1 April 2016

1 October 2014

6 October 2016

16 January 2018

16 January 2018

6 March 2018

Notice period
6 months

3 months

6 months

3 months

3 months

3 months

3 months

3 months

3 months

6 months

75

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Directors’ Remuneration Report 
continued

Annual Report on Remuneration
The Annual Report on Remuneration will be put to an advisory shareholder vote at the 2018 annual general meeting. The information 
on pages 78 to 82 has been audited.

The Remuneration Committee and its advisers

Members of the Remuneration Committee

Name
Gill Barr (Chair – appointed 16 January 2018)

Fiona Laird (Chair – resigned 16 January 2018)

Ron McMillan

Richard Moross

From
16 January 2018

1 April 2013

1 April 2013

3 January 2017

To
Present

16 January 2018

Present

Present

The General Counsel and Company Secretary acts as secretary to the Committee and the Chief Executive, the Chairman of the Board, 
the Chief Financial Officer and a senior member of the People team, may also attend meetings by invitation. However, no Director 
takes any part in discussion about his or her own remuneration.

The Committee has formal written terms of reference which are available on the corporate website. The Committee met three times 
during the year. See page 68 for details of attendance.

Advisors to the Remuneration Committee
The Committee received advice during the year from New Bridge Street (part of Aon plc) who were appointed through a formal tender 
process by the Committee. 

The Group received no other services from New Bridge Street or any other part of the Aon group of companies, during the year. The fees 
paid to New Bridge Street in 2017/18 were £18,671 (2016/17: £25,964). 

During February and March 2018 the Committee reviewed its advisers and following a formal tender process appointed Korn Ferry Hay 
to provide advice to the Committee going forward. Korn Ferry Hay is a signatory to the Remuneration Consultants’ Group Code of 
Conduct. No fees were paid to Korn Ferry during the Year.

The Committee reviews the performance and independence of its advisors on an annual basis and is satisfied that the advice received  
is objective and independent. The advisors’ terms of engagement are available on request from the Company Secretary.

76

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Application of the remuneration policy for 2018/19
Base salary
The Executive Directors’ salaries were reviewed in April 2018. Salary increases take effect from 1 June 2018 for the CEO and CFO  
and are set out below. The salary increases are in line with the average received by the general workforce.

Name
Angela Spindler

Craig Lovelace

Salary as at  
1 June  
2017
£554,533

Salary effective 
from 1 June 
2018
£565,624

£349,574

£356,565

Increase
2%

2%

Pension
Angela Spindler and Craig Lovelace receive cash supplements of 15% and 10% of salary respectively, in lieu of pension contributions.

Annual bonus plan 
The annual bonus maximum opportunity remains unchanged at 150% of salary for the CEO and 125% of salary for the CFO. The bonus 
will be payable 60% in cash and 40% as an award of deferred shares. Deferred bonus shares will vest, normally subject to continued 
service, three years after award.

70% of the annual bonus will continue to be based on adjusted Group profit before tax, 20% corporate objectives and 10% on 
personal performance. A sliding scale will be set for adjusted Group profit before tax, based on the business plan for the year.

The Corporate Objectives are based on the following:

1. Colleague engagement measure – #VIBE survey score.

2. Operational cost efficiency measure.

3. Inventory – measure focused on further reduction of aged stock.

4. Customer satisfaction/retention – a measure on improving 12 month rolling order numbers.

5. Cashflow – a measure of working capital efficiency improvement.

The Personal Objectives are as follows:

Personal objectives for the Chief Executive Officer
1.  Review and renew the 5 year strategy to reflect evolving retail consumer backdrop. Achieve board sign off and a clear road map for delivery.

2. Deliver Fashion World re-platforming and have a roll out plan for all brands.

3. Deliver the strategic objectives to support development of the JD Williams brand.

4. Deliver the strategic objectives for International expansion.

Personal objectives for the Chief Financial Officer
1. Meaningful progression in our legacy tax matters.

2. Enhanced insight and outcomes in customer profitability.

3. Improved commercial outcome from significant contractual negotiations.

4. Continued development of senior finance team.

The Committee considers that the targets for the annual bonus are commercially sensitive and are not therefore disclosed in this 
report. The targets and performance against them will be disclosed retrospectively in the 2018/19 Remuneration Report, provided 
they are not considered commercially sensitive at that time.

Long term incentive awards
The CEO will be granted an LTIP award over shares with a market value at grant of 150% of salary and the CFO 125% of salary. 

The chosen performance measures are all financial KPIs of the business. Adjusted EPS is considered appropriate as it is easily 
understood, is a key measure of financial performance and closely aligned to the Company’s objective of driving profitable growth.  
The measure takes account of fair value adjustments to financial instruments (net of tax) as well as other non-recurring exceptional items 
such as unplanned investments in IT infrastructure, acquisitions and/or disposals. The free cash flow measure is defined as cash flow 
generated from operations excluding receivables and is seen as a key measure for N Brown to monitor the flows of cash in and out of 
the business as well as providing an assessment of underlying profitability. Revenue provides a continued emphasis on top line growth.

Below threshold

Threshold

Maximum

Percentage of each part of  
the award that will vest
0%

Annual compound  
growth in adjusted EPS  
over 3 financial years (50%)
Less than 3%

Free cash flow (30%) –  
Targets are cumulative over  
3 financial years
Less than £350m

Revenue: compound growth  
over 3 financial years (20%)
Less than 3%

25%

100%

3%

8%

£350m

£420m

3%

5%

For performance that is between the threshold and maximum levels awards vest on a straight-line basis.

Shares acquired on vesting of the 2018/19 (and future) LTIP awards must be held for a further two-year post vesting holding period 
(subject to sales to meet any tax payable on vesting). 

77

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Directors’ Remuneration Report 
continued

Awards will be subject to the same mix of performance conditions as in prior years; EPS (50%), cashflow (30%) and revenue (20%).

The Committee has considered carefully the ranges for each measure in light of the business plan, external outlook and analysts’ 
consensus. Following this review the target ranges for each measure have been reduced, so as to provide an appropriately stretching 
incentive. The target ranges are considered to be equivalently stretching to the ranges set for prior years’ awards.

Fees for the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors
Details of the Non-Executive Directors’ fees are set out below:

Chair of the Board fee

Other Non-Executive Directors’ base Board fee

Senior Independent Non-Executive Director

Chair of Audit Committee 

Chair of Remuneration Committee 

Chair of the Financial Services Operating Committee1

Fees as at  
1 June  
2017
£250,000

£50,000

£5,000

£8,000

£8,000

Fees effective 
from 1 June 
2018
£255,000

£50,000

£5,000

£8,000

£8,000

–

£20,000

Increase
2%

0% 

0%

0%

0%

N/A

Note:
1 

In January 2017 a new sub-committee of the N Brown Executive Board was created with specific responsibility for oversight of the financial services businesses of N Brown. Lesley Jones was appointed 
as the independent Chair of this sub-committee. The Committee Chair fee shown in the table above has been set to reflect the level of involvement and time commitment we expect from this role. 

Directors’ remuneration payable for 2017/18 (Audited)

Salaries  
and fees 1 
£000’s

Taxable 
benefits 2 
£000’s 

Year

Bonus  
(cash and 
deferred 
shares) 
£000’s

LTIP  
£000’s 

Pension3 
£000’s

Other 
£000’s

Total 
£000’s

Executive Directors

Angela Spindler

Craig Lovelace 

Non-Executives (fees)

Lord Alliance of Manchester CBE

Andrew Higginson

Ivan Fallon (resigned 18 July 2018)

Richard Moross

Fiona Laird (resigned 16 January 2018)

Ron McMillan

Lesley Jones

Gill Barr (appointed 16 January 2018)

Michael Ross (appointed 16 January 2018)

Matt Davies (appointed 1 May 2018)

Simon Patterson (resigned 13 April 2016)

2017/18

2016/17

2017/18

2016/17

2017/18

2016/17

2017/18

2016/17

2017/18

2016/17

2017/18

2016/17

2017/18

2016/17

2017/18

2016/17

2017/18

2016/17

2017/18

2016/17

2017/18

2016/17

2017/18

2016/17

2017/18

2016/17

552

544

348

342

48

47

250

250

21

55

49

19

48

55

62

60

56

47

8

–

7

–

–

–

–

5

19

19

18

18

554

343

294

187

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

83

82

24

34

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

385

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

1,208

1,373

684

581

48

47

250

250

21

55

49

19

48

55

62

60

56

47

8

–

7

–

–

–

–

5

Lord Alliance has waived his Non-Executive Director’s fee. Matt Davies joined the Board on 19 February. He was not paid until after the end of the financial year.

Notes:
1 
2  Taxable benefits comprise private medical cover and car allowance.
3  For Craig Lovelace, until March 2017 the 10% was paid as a defined pension contribution up to his personal allowance with the balance paid as cash in lieu of pension contribution. 

Contributions paid by the Company into the scheme during the year for Craig Lovelace amounted to £301 (2017: £25,677). From March 2017 the pension provision is a cash contribution.

78

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Details of variable pay earned in the year
Annual bonus (Audited)
The table below gives details of Executive Directors’ bonuses payable for 2017/18:

Executive 
Angela  
Spindler

Measure
Group profit

Weighting (as a percentage of 
maximum bonus opportunity)
70%

Performance required 
Threshold (0% payout)
£76.1m

Maximum  
(100% payout)
£84.7m

Actual 

Performance Payout % of maximum
46.9% out of 70% 
(67% achievement)

£81.6m

Craig  
Lovelace

Corporate objectives

Personal objectives

Total % of maximum  
(% salary)

Group profit

Corporate objectives

Personal objectives

Total % of maximum  
(% salary)

20%

10%

70%

20%

10%

See table  
below

See table  
below

£76.1m

£84.7m

£81.6m

See table  
below

See table  
below

13.5% out of 20% 
(67.6% achievement)

6.3% out of 10% 
(63% achievement)

66.7% 
100.1% of salary

46.9% out of 70%
 (67% achievement)

13.5% out of 20% 
(67.6% achievement)

7% out of 10% 
(70% achievement)

67.4%
84.3% of salary

Note:
1  Payouts determined for Group Profit on a straight line between threshold and target and target and maximum. 

The Group profit range disclosed in the 2016/17 Remuneration Report of £81.5m to £99.5m was for Group profit before accrual for bonuses. The post accrual for bonuses Group profit 
range for FY2016/17 was £80.6m to £92.5m for a 53 week year. The Group profit range set out in the table above for FY2017/18 is post accrual for bonuses and for a 52 week year.

A breakdown of the bonuses payable under the corporate objectives and personal elements are set out below:

Corporate objectives
Corporate objectives were set on a sliding scale range of 0% to 100% 

Objective  
Weighted equally
Customers

Growth in number of accounts that have placed an order  
(which is accepted) within 12 month period

Customers

Redress the decline in normal personal credit accounts used by 
customers (not on a payment arrangement)

Commercial

Gross Profit to OPEX ratio

Consistency

Assisted service ratio (proportion of orders that require assisted 
service to self service) 

Colleague

Engagement survey

Total (% of maximum)

Performance 
required for 
threshold vesting 
(0%)

Performance 
required for 
maximum vesting 

(100%) Actual performance

Payout as % of 
maximum for this 
element

1%

-5%

4%

0%

3.41%

 80.33%

-0.69%

 86.20%

1.295 

1.315

1.3065

 57.50%

30%

70

27.5%

25.15%

 100.00%

75

70.7

 14.00%

67.6%

79

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Directors’ Remuneration Report 
continued

Personal objectives 
Personal objectives were set at the start of the year and performance against them assessed, with input from the Chairman in respect 
of the CEO’s objectives and with input from the CEO in respect of the CFO’s objectives. 

The assessment of the personal performance is set out below:

Angela Spindler

Objectives
Deliver the Fit 4 the Future  
project to plan

Weighting
33.3%

Develop and begin to execute 
accelerated growth plan for 
international business 

Increased the digital  
capabilities and performance  
of the business

33.3%

33.3%

Achievements towards objectives/ performance 
18% out of 33.3% 
High & Mighty migration live with no issues on functionality, stability or data migration. 
Evolution of approach towards an agile delivery framework. 
Significant improvements to page load speed & conversion across all devices.

17% out of 33.3% 
Development & acceleration of partnerships has provided access to international markets. 
Developed global ship anywhere capability rather than creating bespoke sites for new markets.

28% out of 33.3% 
Simply Be mobile app has been launched successfully in the UK and US. 
Digitised pattern cutting initiative has improved the efficiency and accuracy of our product 
development process. 
JD Williams brand online participation is up 9.2 ppts year on year

63%

Weighting

Achievements towards objectives/ performance 

Further enhance the rigour  
and depth of financial  
performance in the Group

25%

20% out of 25% 
Delivery of complex securitisation refinancing to provide Group with substantively improved,  
and increased, facilities for the future, involving introduction of additional banking partner.

Widespread supplier financing initiatives successfully implemented.

25%

20% out of 25%

Total

Craig Lovelace

Objectives

Resolution of complex  
reporting matters and  
continued enhancement  
of stakeholder relations

Actively enhance  
commercial insight for  
improved operational  
efficiency

25% 

Detailed and complex IFRS 9 implementation project planned and delivered for FY18 prelims. 

Continued progress in resolution of significant legacy VAT and Corporation Tax matters – 
anticipated court process in May 2018 on key VAT partial exemption matter, and agreed paths to 
conclusion of key Corp Tax matters. 

DB Pension scheme in a positive position – increased surplus at year-end, with a clear strategy 
and positive relationships with Trustee Board. 

15% out of 25% 
Driving increased adoption of data/predictive analytics throughout the Group with particular 
focus on promotional spend return on investment – substantive improvements achieved by the 
Group in FY18. 

Substantively improved capital project opportunity identification & prioritisation processes.

Significant team upskilling in procurement to drive greater supplier relationship engagement  
and contractual performance adherence.

Assess and address  
future skills capabilities  
in the finance function 

Total

25%

15% out of 25% 
Strongest functional performance in Group-wide satisfaction survey. 

External awards/recognition garnered by both Legal and IR teams in year. 

70%

80

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018LTIP awards granted in FY2017/18 (Audited)
The table below provides details of the long-term incentive awards granted to Executive Directors during the year.

Type of  
award
LTIP

% of 
condition
50% EPS

Award size 
(% Salary)
150% 

Face  
value
£831,797 254,918

Number of 
shares

Share price 
at grant
326.3p

Performance  
Period
3yrs to end of  
financial year  
2019/20

30% Free 
cash flow

20% 
Revenue

Threshold  
target
EPS: 25% vests  
if EPS growth at least 
2.5% p.a above RPI 

Stretch  
target
EPS: 100% vests  
if EPS at least  
9% p.a. above RPI 

Free cash flow:  
At least £370m

Free cash flow:  
At least £450m

Revenue:  
At least 5% CAGR

Revenue:  
At least 10% CAGR 

LTIP

As above 125%

£436,965 133,915

As above As above

As above

As above

Executive 
Angela 
Spindler

Craig 
Lovelace

Note:
1  The awards are based on salaries at the date of grant.

Outstanding awards (Audited)
The table below summarises each of the Executive Directors’ long-term share awards and the changes that have taken place in the year.

Executive
Angela Spindler

Craig Lovelace

4 March 
2017
185,198

Awarded during 
the year
–

Lapsed during  
the year
(185,198)

Vested and 
exercised during 
the year
–

238,087

472,063

12,790

119,117

4,731

243,125

–

–

–

254,918

23,135

–

–

–

133,915

12,586

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

3 March 
2018
–

238,087

472,063

12,790

254,918

23,135

119,117

4,731

243,125

133,915

12,586

Date 
granted
Aug 2014

Aug 2015

Aug 2016

June 2016

Aug 2017

July2017

Aug 2015

June 2016

Aug 2016

Aug 2017

July 2017

Type of award
LTIP

LTIP

LTIP

DSBP

LTIP

DSBP

LTIP

DSBP

LTIP

LTIP

DSBP

LTIP awards with performance periods ending in FY2017/18 or shortly thereafter (audited)
The awards granted on 9 June 2015 with the EPS performance period ending 3 March 2018 and the TSR performance period ending 
9 June 2018 are set out below: 

Performance period 
3 years ending FY2017/18

Threshold target  
(25% of that part  
of the award vests)
RPI+ 2.5% p.a. 

Stretch target  
(100% of that part  
of the award vests)
RPI+ 7.5% p.a. 

Actual performance 
-14.8%

3 years ending 9 June 20182  Median ranking

Top quartile ranking

16 out of 17

Vesting
0%

0%

0%

EPS 60%

TSR1 40%

Total 

Notes:
1  TSR peer group consists of Darty Ltd, JD Sports Fashion plc, Asos plc, WH Smith plc, Dunhelm Group plc, Kingfisher plc, Inchcape plc, Dixons Carphone plc, Home Retail Group Ltd, 

Halfords Group plc, Debenhams plc, Mothercare plc, Next plc, Marks & Spencer Group plc, Carpetright plc and Sports Direct International.

2  TSR has been measured to 3 March 2018 and the vesting is provided on an estimated basis. The actual level of vesting, if different, will be disclosed in the next year’s remuneration report. 

Set out below are details of the LTIP awards held by the Executive Directors and the vesting resulting from the performance  
detailed above:

Executive
Angela Spindler

Craig Lovelace

Salary 
150%

125%

Face value
£799,500

£400,000

Share price  
at grant
335.8p

Number of  
shares awarded
238,087

Percentage of 
award vesting 
0%

Number of  
shares vesting
Nil

Value of shares 
vesting 
£0

335.8p

119,117

0%

Nil

£0

81

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Directors’ Remuneration Report 
continued

LTIP awards with performance periods ending in FY2016/17 or shortly thereafter 
The awards granted on 1 August 2014 with the EPS performance period ending 4 March 2017 and the TSR performance period 
ending 9 June 2017 are set out below: 

EPS 60%

TSR1 40%

Total 

Performance period 
3 years ending FY2016/17

Threshold target (25% of 
that part of the award vests)
RPI+ 2.5% p.a. 

Stretch target (100% of that 
part of the award vests)
RPI+ 7.5% p.a. 

Actual performance 
-23.1%

3 years ending 9 June 2017  Median ranking

Top quartile ranking

18 out of 20

Vesting
0%

0%

0%

Note:
1  TSR peer group consists of the following: JD Sports Fashion Group plc, Provident Financial plc, Moss Bros Group plc, Flying Brands Ltd, Supergroup plc, Dixons Carphone plc, Home Retail 

Group, Halfords plc, Debenhams plc, Asos plc, Dunelm Group plc, Ashley (Laura) Holdings plc, Marks & Spencer Group plc, Next plc, Findel plc, French Connection Group plc, 
Mothercare plc, Carpetright plc and Sports Direct International.

Set out below are details of the LTIP awards held by the Executive Directors and the vesting resulting from the performance  
detailed above:

Executive
Angela Spindler

Salary 
150%

Face value
£799,500

Number of  
shares awarded
185,198

Share price  
at grant
431.7p

Percentage of 
award vesting 
0%

Number of shares 
vesting
Nil

Value of shares 
vesting
£0

Directors’ shareholdings (Audited)
It is the Board’s policy that Executive Directors build up and retain a minimum shareholding in the Company. Under these guidelines 
the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer are expected to hold Company shares equal in value (at the time of 
acquisition) to 200% and 100% of their base salary respectively and to have met this guideline within 5 years of appointment.

The beneficial interests of Directors who served during the year, together with those of their families, in the shares of the Company  
are as follows:

Owned shares (Number of shares)

Value of shares 
counting towards 
guideline holding (as a 
2017 % of salary)
37%

Guideline 
met?
N/A

Outstanding 
awards subject 
to performance 
conditions
965,068

Other interests in shares
Unvested awards 
not subject to 
performance 
condition
35,925

Outstanding 
share options

Total as at 
3 March 
2018
– 1,215,140

Angela Spindler

Craig Lovelace

4 March 
2017 
214,147

3 March 
2018
214,147

–

–

Lord Alliance of Manchester CBE

95,047,966 95,047,966

Andrew Higginson

Ivan Fallon

Ron McMillan

Fiona Laird

Lesley Jones

Richard Moross

Matt Davies

Gill Barr

Michael Ross

104,161 

104,161

11,425

11,425

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

10,000

–

–

0%

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

496,157

17,317

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

513,474

– 95,047,966

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

104,161

11,425

–

–

–

–

10,000

–

–

The Directors’ share interests shown above include shares held by members of the Director’s family, as required by the Companies Act 2006.

There have been no changes to the Directors‘ interests in shares between 3 March and 30 April 2018.

82

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Performance graph
The graph shows the Company’s nine-year performance, measured by TSR, compared with the performance of the FTSE 250 Index, 
also measured by TSR. The Company was a member of this index throughout the 2017/18 financial year and accordingly it is felt to be 
the most appropriate comparator group for this purpose.

TOTAL SHAREHOLDER RETURN PERFORMANCE: N BROWN VS FTSE 250 
(rebased to 100) 

450

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

Feb 09

Feb 10

Feb 11

Feb 12

Feb 13

Feb 14

Feb 15

Feb 16

Feb 17

Feb 18

N Brown Group plc

FTSE 250 Index

Analysis of Chief Executive’s pay over 10 years

Alan White 

Angela Spindler

Total remuneration (£’000)

Annual bonus (% of maximum)

Long term share vesting (% of maximum)

2009/10
2,438

2010/11
3,738

2011/12
2,734

2012/13
1,780

2013/14
2,734

96.9%

100%

90.6%

100%

38.7%

100%

71.4%

100%

15.8%

85%

2013/14
1,364

83.2%

N/A

2014/15
728

2015/16
783

2016/17
1,373

2017/18
 1,208

0%

N/A

27.9%

42.1%

66.7%

0%

0%

0%

The one-off recruitment award granted to Angela Spindler in 2013 and which vested in 2015/16 and 2016/17, has been included in the 
figures for total remuneration, but not counted as long term share vesting.

Percentage change in the Chief Executive’s remuneration
The table below shows the percentage change in the Chief Executive’s salary, benefits (excluding pension) and annual bonus between 
the 2016/17 and 2017/18 financial years, compared to that of the average for all employees of the Group.

Chief Executive

Average of other employees

% Change from 2016/17 to 2017/18

Salary
+2.0%

+2.0%

Benefits
nil

Annual bonus
+126%

nil

+111%

Relative importance of spend on pay
The following table shows the Company’s actual spend on pay (for all employees) relative to dividends.

Staff costs (£m)

Dividends (£m)

2018
72.2

40.3

2017
69.3

40.2

% Change
+4.2%

+0.2%

The figures relate to amounts payable in respect of the relevant financial year.

Other directorships
Angela Spindler serves as a Non-Executive Director at Dia, which is listed on the Madrid Stock Exchange. Angela received fees for 
FY17 of £104,532 (FY16: £91,090), which she retains.

Payments to past Directors and payments for loss of office
There have been no payments to past Directors or payments for loss of office during the year.

83

GovernanceN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
 
Directors’ Remuneration Report 
continued

Shareholder voting on the Directors’ Remuneration Report at the 2017 annual general meeting
Annual Report on Remuneration

For

Against

Total votes cast (excluding withheld votes)

Votes withheld1

Total votes cast (including withheld votes)

Note:
1  A vote withheld is not a vote in law and is not counted in the calculation of the proportion of votes cast ‘for’ and ‘against’ a resolution.

Approval of the Directors’ Remuneration Report
The Directors’ Remuneration Report was approved by the Board on 17 May 2018. 

Signed on behalf of the Board on 17 May 2018.

Total number  
of votes
191,537,234

21,118,803

212,656,037

11,892,955

224,548,992

% of  
votes cast
90.07%

9.93%

100%

5.29%

100%

Gill Barr  
Chair of the Remuneration Committee

84

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Independent Auditor’s Report to the members of N Brown Group plc

Risks of material misstatement
Recurring risks

Allowance for doubtful debts

Taxation provisions

Regulatory provisions

vs 2017

Carrying value of software and development 
costs under the course of construction

Provisions made against carrying value  
of inventories 

Carrying value of Figleaves intangible assets

New

Recoverable amount of investment in 
subsidiary – parent company

2. Key audit matters: our assessment  
of risks of material misstatement
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional 
judgement, were of most significance in the audit of the 
financial statements and include the most significant assessed 
risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) 
identified by us, including those which had the greatest effect 
on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the 
audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. We 
summarise below the key audit matters (unchanged from 2017), 
in decreasing order of audit significance, in arriving at our audit 
opinion above, together with our key audit procedures to 
address those matters and, as required for public interest 
entities, our results from those procedures. These matters  
were addressed, and our results are based on procedures 
undertaken, in the context of, and solely for the purpose of,  
our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming 
our opinion thereon, and consequently are incidental to that 
opinion, and we do not provide a separate opinion on 
these matters.

1. Our opinion is unmodified
We have audited the financial statements of N Brown Group plc 
(“the Company”) for the 52 week period ended 3 March 2018 
which comprise the consolidated income statement, 
consolidated statement of comprehensive income, 
consolidated balance sheet, consolidated cash flow statement, 
reconciliation of operating profit to net cash from operating 
activities, consolidated statement of changes in equity, the 
Company balance sheet, the Company statement of changes in 
equity and the related notes, including the accounting policies 
in Note 2 and 32.

In our opinion:
•  the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state 
of the Group’s and of the Parent Company’s affairs as at 
3 March 2018 and of the Group’s profit for the 52 week 
period then ended;

•  the Group financial statements have been properly prepared 

in accordance with International Financial Reporting 
Standards as adopted by the European Union;

•  the parent Company financial statements have been properly 

prepared in accordance with UK accounting standards, 
including FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework; and
•  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance 
with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as 
regards the Group financial statements, Article 4 of the 
IAS Regulation.

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International 
Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. 
Our responsibilities are described below. We believe that the 
audit evidence we have obtained is a sufficient and appropriate 
basis for our opinion. Our audit opinion is consistent with our 
report to the audit committee.

We were appointed as auditor by the shareholders on 14 July 
2015. The period of total uninterrupted engagement is for the 
three financial years ended 3 March 2018. We have fulfilled our 
ethical responsibilities under, and we remain independent of 
the Group in accordance with, UK ethical requirements 
including the FRC Ethical Standard as applied to listed public 
interest entities. No non-audit services prohibited by that 
standard were provided.

Overview
Materiality: group  
financial statements  
as a whole

£3.15m (2017:£3.60m)
4.3% (2017: 4.3%) of the Group profit before 
tax normalised to exclude exceptional items

Coverage

100% (2017:100%) of group profit before tax

85

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Financial statementsIndependent Auditor’s Report to the members of N Brown Group plc  
continued

Our response

Our procedures included:

•  Our specialist expertise: Critically assessed the Group’s definition 
of ‘Objective evidence of impairment’ of customer receivables 
against the requirements of the relevant accounting standards, 
including evidence of the Group’s experience of customers with 
comparable characteristics.

•  Benchmarking assumption: Compared the assumptions made in 
respect of the probabilities of default against our understanding of 
the Group as well as our knowledge of market counterparts, and 
consistency with the historical internal data available. We assessed 
and challenged the assumptions made in respect of timing and 
value of cash flows for all segments of the model (including 
customers in arrears and subject to revised payment terms) against 
historical internal data.

•  Tests of detail: We obtained supporting evidence relating to the 

quantum of debt sales in the financial year and critically assessed if 
the debt sales supported the estimates of future cash flows and 
recoveries. Assessed the accuracy of the allowance for doubtful 
debts model by inspecting the model calculations, and compared 
the methodology used to our interpretation of the requirements of 
the relevant accounting standards. 

•  Assessing transparency: Considered the adequacy of the Group’s 

disclosures in relation to the allowance for doubtful debts for 
compliance with the relevant accounting standards.

Our results

•  We found the allowance for doubtful debts to be acceptable  

(2017: acceptable).

Our procedures included:

•  Our tax specialist expertise: Analysed and challenged the 

assumptions applied by the Directors to determine tax provisions; 
inspecting correspondence with HMRC and evaluating the Directors 
interpretations of the correspondence by forming our own 
expectations of the provisions required in the financial statements. 
These assessments were based on our knowledge of the business 
and experience of the industry in which it operates, together with 
our knowledge and experience of the application of the relevant 
legislation by authorities and courts.

In relation to VAT, we inspected historical legal counsel opinion 
received by the Directors in relation to the Group’s likelihood  
of success in respect of specific aspects of the open VAT 
exposures, critically assessed whether amounts recorded in  
the financial statements were consistent with this legal opinion.

•  Assessing transparency: Considered the adequacy of the Group’s 
disclosures in relation to taxation provisions for compliance with the 
relevant accounting policies.

Our results

•  We found the taxation provisions recorded to be acceptable  

(2017: acceptable).

The risk

Allowance for 
doubtful debts

(£48.8 million; 
2017: £64.7m)

Subjective estimate: 
The allowance for doubtful debts requires the 
Directors to assess which accounts are considered 
impaired and estimate the quantum of the 
associated impairment based on objective evidence.

Refer to page 64 
(Audit Committee 
Report), page 100 
(accounting policy) 
and pages 111 to 
112 (financial 
disclosures).

This assessment is particularly judgemental  
in the case of customers in early arrears, on 
revised payment terms and in terms of the  
timing of future cash receipts. A proportion  
of the Group’s customers are subject to revised 
payment terms, in particular where interest  
has been temporarily waived.

The Group segments its debtors book into 
accounts that are interest bearing and those  
that are not, which includes a large volume of 
individual accounts. This allows for a degree  
of granularity when applying the other key 
judgements, which are the probability of  
default and the timing and value of cash flows.

To assess the probability of default, the Group 
estimates a customer’s likelihood of entering 
default based upon the experience of customers 
with comparable characteristics such as arrears 
status and payment history.

These estimates are inherently uncertain because 
they are reliant upon historical, non-predictive data 
and are impacted by the Group’s segmentation of 
customers with comparable impairment 
characteristics.

The expected loss on default of receivables is 
based on expected timing and value of cash flows 
which are estimated using historical cash receipts 
and write-offs incurred for customers with 
comparable arrears status and payment history, 
interest and fees charged and debt sale rates.

These estimates are inherently uncertain because 
of the long-term nature of the cash receipts and 
the exposure of the portfolio to the credit 
performance of many individual customers.

Subjective estimate: 
The outcome of a number of open VAT and 
Corporation tax positions, some of which are 
proceeding towards litigation, is uncertain. As 
such, it requires the Directors to make significant 
judgements and estimates in relation to the likely 
outcome of these tax issues and exposures.

Dispute outcome: 
There is a risk that the judgements made by the 
Directors, and therefore the amounts recorded 
in the financial statements will differ from any 
final settlements agreed with HMRC.

Taxation 
provisions

Refer to page 64 
(Audit Committee 
Report), page 99 
(accounting policy) 
and pages 107  
and 112 (financial 
disclosures).

86

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Regulatory 
provisions

(£42.8 million; 
2017: £19.9m)

Refer to page 64 
(Audit Committee 
Report), page 100 
(accounting policy) 
and pages 117 to 
118 (financial 
disclosures).

Carrying value  
of software and 
development 
costs under  
the course of 
construction

Refer to page 64 
(Audit Committee 
Report), pages 98 
to 99 (accounting 
policy) and page 
109 (financial 
disclosures).

Carrying value  
of inventories

Refer to page 64 
(Audit Committee 
Report), page 99 
(accounting policy) 
and page 111 
(financial 
disclosures).

The risk

Subjective estimate: 
The Group’s provision of credit services to 
customers mean that it operates within a 
regulated environment which requires the  
Group to comply with the requirements  
of the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA).

Where the Group has identified areas of non-
compliance with these regulations, provision  
is made for the expected cost of redressing 
customers. Such provisioning requires significant 
judgements to be made with respect to complaint 
volumes, expected uphold rates and the level of 
average redress.

The risk has increased from the prior financial year 
due to the inclusion of product insurance provisions, 
alongside previous known regulatory risks.

Given the significant value and judgemental nature 
of this provisioning, this is considered to be an area 
of significant audit risk.

Accounting treatment: 
The Group has incurred significant software  
and development project costs in the current 
and prior year in respect of a significant systems 
infrastructure programme. The Group capitalises 
both internal and external eligible costs to  
the extent that future economic benefits are 
expected to be generated by the project.  
This requires judgement as to whether the  
costs incurred are directly attributable and 
incremental, and that the development relates  
to technically feasible systems and websites.

Judgements are involved in determining the 
classification of software and development costs 
between revenue and capital expenditures.

Forecast based valuation: 
Assets under the course of construction are not 
subject to amortisation and as such, are required 
to be tested for impairment annually. Assessing 
recoverability of these assets is based on 
forecasting and discounting future cash flows.

This assessment is inherently judgemental.

Subjective estimate: 
The Group has significant levels of inventory  
and a number of judgements and estimates are 
involved in estimating provisions for aged or slow 
moving inventories.

Furthermore, given the seasonal nature  
of a retail business and changes in customer 
preference and spending patterns, primarily 
driven by the wider fashion industry, this 
introduces uncertainty over the recoverability  
of inventories.

Our response

Our procedures included:

•  Test of detail: Obtained and inspecting correspondence with  
the FCA and assessed customer complaints for indications of 
significant or non-identified areas of customer detriment that may 
require provisioning in the financial statements;

Recalculated a sample of inputs into the provisioning models, 
including claim redress payments and average claim redress 
calculations; reviewing claim forecasting and considered the 
accuracy of previous forecasting and market expectations, 
including experienced and expected uphold rates.

•  Our expertise: Using our experience of the regulatory requirements 
and wider industry, we critically assessed the completeness of key 
inputs into the Group’s calculation of regulatory provisions, including 
agreeing to supporting documentation.

•  Assessing transparency: Considered the adequacy of the Group’s 
disclosures in respect of the judgement and estimation made in the 
regulatory provisioning.

Our results

•  We found the regulatory provisions recorded to be acceptable  

(2017: acceptable).

Our procedures included:

•  Testing application: Agreed a statistical sample of costs 

capitalised to external invoices or internal timesheets, to determine 
the nature of the items and evaluate the appropriateness of their 
classification as capitalised costs, by reference to the recognition 
criteria of the applicable accounting standards.

•  Our experience: With assistance from our own IT specialists, we 
challenged the Group’s assessment of technical feasibility of the 
project releases based on our discussions with key project leads 
and impairment indicators using our understanding of project 
progress, discussions at Board level and performance to date.

•  Historical comparison: Assessed the Group’s forecasting accuracy 
by comparing actual results in the period to what was previously 
forecast for the year. Critically evaluated the assumptions for future 
growth, with regard to actual growth rates in previous years.

•  Assessing transparency: Considered the adequacy of the Group’s 

disclosures in respect of capitalisation of software and 
development intangible assets.

Our results

•  We found the capitalisation occurred and recoverability of software 

and development costs to be acceptable (2017: acceptable).

Our procedures included:

•  Test of detail: Compared aged inventory levels in the current 
financial year against the prior financial year to identify any 
categories with significant slow moving or obsolete inventories. 
Compared current and some of the significantly aged inventory 
levels to current financial year sales data to check whether slow 
moving and obsolete inventories have been appropriately identified.
Tested the adequacy of the inventory provision by comparing 
the average selling price in the year of inventory items to the 
cost of the inventory at year end. 

Compared recent selling prices of inventory to the cost of 
inventory for a statistical sample of items sold via new routes.
Compared the value of write offs and scrapped items in the 
financial years to historic inventory provisions. 

•  Our specialist expertise: With the assistance of our own data and 
analytics specialists, we have recalculated the current year provision 
on non-current inventories based on the current year sales data.

•  Assessing transparency: Considered the adequacy of the 

disclosures in respect of the judgement and estimation made  
in respect of the inventory provisioning. 

Our results

•  We found the carrying amount of provisions made against 

inventories to be acceptable (2017: acceptable). 

87

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Financial statementsIndependent Auditor’s Report to the members of N Brown Group plc  
continued

The risk

Our response

Forecast-based valuation:

Our procedures included:

The carrying value of the Figleaves brand is 
significant and at risk of irrecoverability due  
to continuing challenge on forecasts and 
performance of the cash generating unit.

The estimate recoverable amount is subjective 
due to the inherent uncertainty involved in 
forecasting and discounting future cash flows.

•  Our sector experience: Using our own valuation specialists, 
evaluated assumptions used, in particular those relating to 
competitors.

•  Benchmarking assumptions: Compared the Group’s assumptions 
to externally derived data in relation to key inputs such as projected 
economic growth and discount rates.

•  Sensitivity analysis: Performed breakeven analysis on the 

assumptions noted above to assess how sensitive the model  
is to changes in assumptions and any impairment.

•  Historical comparison: Assessed the Group’s forecasting accuracy 
by comparing actual results in the period to what was previously 
forecast for the year. Critically evaluating the assumptions for future 
growth, with regard to actual growth rates in previous years;

•  Comparing valuations: Compared the sum of the discounted  
cash flows to the Group’s market capitalisation to assess the 
reasonableness of those cashflows; and

•  Assessing transparency: Considered the adequacy of the  
groups disclosures in respect of capitalisation of software  
and development intangible assets.

Our results

•  We found the resulting estimate of the recoverable amount of the 

intangible assets to be acceptable (2017: acceptable).

Low risk, high value

Our procedures included:

The carrying amount of the Company’s 
investment in subsidiary, held at costs, 
represents 73% (2017: 83%) of the Company’s 
total assets.

•  Test of detail: Compared the carrying amount of the investments 

with the relevant subsidiaries’ draft balance sheet to identify 
whether their net assets, being an approximation of their minimum 
recoverable amount, were in excess of their carrying amount.

We do not consider the recoverable amount of 
this investment to be at a high risk of significant 
misstatement or to be subject to a significant 
level of judgement. However, due to its 
materiality in the context of the Parent  
Company financial statements as a whole,  
this is considered to be the area which had  
the greatest effect on our overall audit strategy 
and allocation of resources in planning and 
completing our parent Company audit.

Our results

•  We found the recoverable amount of investment in subsidiary  

to be acceptable (2017: acceptable).

Carrying value  
of Figleaves 
intangible assets

(£7.1 million; 
2017: £7.1m)

Refer to page 64 
(Audit Committee 
Report), page 99 
(accounting policy) 
and page 109 to 
110 (financial 
disclosures).

Parent Company 
recoverable 
amount of 
investment in 
subsidiary

(£367.2 million; 
2017: £366.5m)

Refer to page 126 
(accounting policy) 
and note 34 on 
page 128 (financial 
disclosures).

88

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 20183. Our application of materiality and an 
overview of the scope of our audit
Materiality for the Group financial statements as a whole was 
set at £3.15m (2017: £3.60m), determined with reference to a 
benchmark of Group profit before tax, normalised to exclude 
this financial year’s exceptional items of £56.9m (2017: £25.2m), 
of £73.1m (2017: £82.8m) as disclosed in note 6, of which it 
represents 4.3% (2017:4.3%).

Materiality for the Parent Company has been set at £2.9m (2017: 
£2.1m) determined with reference to a benchmark of Company 
total assets of £502.8m (2017: £439.7m), of which it represents 
0.6% (2017: 0.5%).

We agreed to report to the Audit Committee any corrected or 
uncorrected identified misstatements exceeding £0.16m (2017: 
£0.20m), in addition to other identified misstatements that 
warranted reporting on qualitative grounds.

In 2018 the Group team performed the audit of the Group as if 
it was a single aggregated set of financial information including 
procedures on the exceptional items excluded from normalised 
group profit before tax. The audit was performed using the 
Group materiality level set out above.

In 2017 all of the Group’s reporting components were 
subjected to audits for group reporting purposes, those audits 
were conducted by the Group audit team and covered 100% of 
Group revenue, Group profit before tax, and Group assets. 
Component materialities, which ranged from £0.1m to £3.0m 
were applied by the Group team, having regard to the mix of 
size and risk profile of the Group across the components. 

Profit before tax normalised 
to exclude exceptional items 
£73.1m (2017: £82.8m)

Group Materiality 
£3.15m (2017: £3.60m)

£3.15m 
Whole financial 
statements materiality
(2017: £3.60m)

Normalised profit before tax

Group materiality

£0.16m 
Misstatements reported 
to the audit committee 
(2017: £0.20m)

Group Revenue

Group profit before tax

100%
(2017: 100%)

100%
(2017: 100%)

Group total assets

Group profit before 
exceptional items and tax

100%
(2017: 100%)

100%
(2017: 100%)

Full scope for group audit purposes 2018

Full scope for group audit purposes 2017

4. We have nothing to report on going concern
We are required to report to you if:
•  we have anything material to add or draw attention to in 

relation to the Directors’ statement in note 2 on page 101 to 
the financial statements on the use of the going concern basis 
of accounting with no material uncertainties that may cast 
significant doubt over the Group and Company’s use of that 
basis for a period of at least twelve months from the date of 
approval of the financial statements; or

•  if the related statement under the Listing Rules set out on 

page 58 is materially inconsistent with our audit knowledge.

We have nothing to report in these respects.

5. We have nothing to report on the other 
information in the Annual Report
The Directors are responsible for the other information 
presented in the Annual Report together with the financial 
statements. Our opinion on the financial statements does not 
cover the other information and, accordingly, we do not express 
an audit opinion or, except as explicitly stated below, any form 
of assurance conclusion thereon.

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing 
so, consider whether, based on our financial statements audit 
work, the information therein is materially misstated or 
inconsistent with the financial statements or our audit 
knowledge. Based solely on that work we have not identified 
material misstatements in the other information.

Strategic Report and Directors’ Report
Based solely on our work on the other information:
•  we have not identified material misstatements in the Strategic 

Report and the Directors’ Report;

•  in our opinion the information given in those reports for the 
financial year is consistent with the financial statements; and

•  in our opinion those reports have been prepared in 

accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

Directors’ remuneration report
In our opinion the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report 
to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with 
the Companies Act 2006.

Disclosures of principal risks and longer-term viability
Based on the knowledge we acquired during our financial 
statements audit, we have nothing material to add or draw 
attention to in relation to:
•  the Directors’ confirmation within the viability statement on 

page 58 that they have carried out a robust assessment of the 
principal risks facing the Group, including those that would 
threaten its business model, future performance, solvency 
and liquidity;

•  the Principal Risks disclosures describing these risks and 

explaining how they are being managed and mitigated; and
•  the Directors’ explanation in the viability statement of how 
they have assessed the prospects of the Group, over what 
period they have done so and why they considered that 
period to be appropriate, and their statement as to whether 
they have a reasonable expectation that the Group will be 
able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they 
fall due over the period of their assessment, including any 
related disclosures drawing attention to any necessary 
qualifications or assumptions.

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review the viability 
statement. We have nothing to report in this respect.

89

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Financial statementsIndependent Auditor’s Report to the members of N Brown Group plc  
continued

Corporate governance disclosures
We are required to report to you if:
•  we have identified material inconsistencies between the 
knowledge we acquired during our financial statements  
audit and the Directors’ statement that they consider that the 
annual report and financial statements taken as a whole is fair, 
balanced and understandable and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s position  
and performance, business model and strategy; or

•  the section of the Annual Report describing the work of the 
Audit Committee does not appropriately address matters 
communicated by us to the Audit Committee.

We are required to report to you if the Corporate Governance 
Statement does not properly disclose a departure from the 
eleven provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code 
specified by the Listing Rules for our review.

We have nothing to report in these respects.

6. We have nothing to report on the other 
matters on which we are required to report 
by exception
Under the Companies Act 2006, we are required to report to 
you if, in our opinion:
•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the 
parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have  
not been received from branches not visited by us; or
•  the parent Company financial statements and the part of  
the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not  
in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or
•  certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by  

law are not made; or

•  we have not received all the information and explanations  

we require for our audit.

We have nothing to report in these respects.

7. Respective responsibilities
Directors’ responsibilities
As explained more fully in their statement set out on page 59, 
the Directors are responsible for: the preparation of the 
financial statements including being satisfied that they give  
a true and fair view; such internal control as they determine is 
necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that 
are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or 
error; assessing the Group and parent Company’s ability to 
continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters 
related to going concern; and using the going concern basis of 
accounting unless they either intend to liquidate the Group or 
the parent Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic 
alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about 
whether the financial statements as a whole are free from 
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or other 
irregularities (see below), or error, and to issue our opinion  
in an auditor’s report. Reasonable assurance is a high level  
of assurance, but does not guarantee that an audit conducted 
in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material 
misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from 
fraud, other irregularities or error and are considered material if, 
individually or in aggregate, they could reasonably be expected 
to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis 
of the financial statements.

90

A fuller description of our responsibilities is provided on the 
FRC’s website at www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities.

Irregularities – ability to detect
We identified areas of laws and regulations that could 
reasonably be expected to have a material effect on the 
financial statements from our sector experience, through 
discussion with the Directors and other management (as 
required by auditing standards), and from inspection of  
the Group’s regulatory and legal correspondence.

We had regard to laws and regulations in areas that directly 
affect the financial statements including financial reporting 
(including related company legislation) and taxation legislation. 
We considered the extent of compliance with those laws and 
regulations as part of our procedures on the related financial 
statements items.

In addition we considered the impact of laws and regulations  
in the specific areas of regulatory compliance, taxation 
compliance, employment law, regulatory capital and liquidity 
and certain aspects of company legislation recognising the 
financial and regulated nature of the Group’s activities. With  
the exception of any known or possible non-compliance, and  
as required by auditing standards, our work in respect of these 
was limited to enquiry of the Directors and other management 
and inspection of regulatory and legal correspondence. We 
considered the effect of any known or possible non-compliance 
in these areas as part of our procedures on the related financial 
statements items. Further detail in respect of taxation 
compliance and regulatory compliance is set out in the  
key audit matter disclosures in section 2 of this report.

We communicated identified laws and regulations throughout 
our team and remained alert to any indications of non-
compliance throughout the audit.

As with any audit, there remained a higher risk of non-detection 
of non-compliance with relevant laws and regulations 
(irregularities, as these may involve collusion, forgery, intentional 
omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal controls.

8. The purpose of our audit work and to 
whom we owe our responsibilities
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a 
body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies 
Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we 
might state to the Company’s members those matters we are 
required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other 
purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not 
accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the 
Company and the Company’s members, as a body, for our 
audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Stuart Burdass (Senior Statutory Auditor) 
for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory Auditor 
Chartered Accountants  
1 St Peter’s Square  
Manchester 
M2 3AE 
17 May 2018

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Consolidated Income Statement

Revenue

Operating profit

Finance costs

Profit before taxation and fair value adjustments to 
financial instruments

Fair value adjustments to financial instruments

Profit before taxation

Taxation

Profit for the period

52 weeks ended 3 March 2018

53 weeks ended 4 March 2017

Before 
exceptional 
items 
£m

Exceptional 
items  
(note 6) 
£m

Note

Before 
exceptional 
items 
£m

Exceptional 
items  
(note 6) 
£m

Total 
£m 

Total 
£m 

3

4,5

8

18

9

922.2

90.5

(8.9)

81.6

(8.5)

73.1

(14.6)

58.5

–

922.2

900.7

–

900.7

(56.9)

–

(56.9)

–

(56.9)

10.9

(46.0)

33.6

(8.9)

24.7

(8.5)

16.2

(3.7)

12.5

90.3

(7.7)

82.6

0.2

82.8

(18.3)

64.5

(25.2)

–

(25.2)

–

(25.2)

5.0

(20.2)

65.1

(7.7)

57.4

0.2

57.6

(13.3)

44.3

Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

58.5

(46.0)

12.5

64.5

(20.2)

44.3

Earnings per share from continuing operations

Basic

Diluted

11

4.41

4.40

15.67p

15.66p

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

Profit for the period

Items that will not be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss

Actuarial gains/(losses) on defined benefit pension schemes

Tax relating to items not reclassified

Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss

Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations

Total comprehensive income for the period attributable to equity holders of the parent

Note

29

9

52 weeks 
ended  
3 March 
2018 
£m 

53 weeks 
ended  
4 March 
2017 
£m 

12.5

44.3

10.5

(1.8)

8.7

(0.2)

21.0

(3.1)

0.6

(2.5)

0.5

42.3

91

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Consolidated Balance Sheet

Non-current assets

Intangible assets

Property, plant and equipment

Retirement benefit surplus

Deferred tax assets

Current assets

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Derivative financial instruments

Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Provisions

Derivative financial instruments 

Current tax liability

Net current assets

Non-current liabilities

Bank loans

Provisions

Deferred tax liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity attributable to equity holders of the parent

Share capital

Share premium account

Own shares

Foreign currency translation reserve

Retained earnings

Total equity

As at  
3 March 
2018 
£m 

As at  
4 March 
2017
£m

Note

12

13

29

20

15

16

18

25

21

22

18

17

22

20

23

24

156.0

67.4

19.3

2.8

141.9

73.5

8.3

2.4

245.5

226.1

110.6

652.7

–

58.2

821.5

1,067.0

(131.7)

(43.8)

(6.0)

(3.3)

(184.8)

636.7

105.5

575.4

2.5

64.1

747.5

973.6

(98.9)

(15.6)

–

(13.4)

(127.9)

619.6

(405.0)

(355.0)

(5.4)

(12.2)

(422.6)

(607.4)

459.6

31.4

11.0

(0.2)

2.1

415.3

459.6

(4.3)

(8.2)

(367.5)

(495.4)

478.2

31.3

11.0

(0.1)

2.3

433.7

478.2

The financial statements of N Brown Group plc (Registered Number 814103) were approved by the Board of Directors and 
authorised for issue on 17 May 2018.

They were signed on its behalf by:

Craig Lovelace 
CFO and Executive Director 

92

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Consolidated Cash Flow Statement

Net cash from operating activities

Investing activities

Purchases of property, plant and equipment

Purchases of intangible assets

Net cash used in investing activities

Financing activities

Interest paid

Dividends paid

Increase in bank loans

Purchase of shares by ESOT

Proceeds on issue of shares held by ESOT

Net cash from/(used) in financing activities

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

Changes in Liabilities from Financing Activities

Balance at 4 March 2017

Changes from financing cashflows

Proceeds from loans and borrowings

Repayments of borrowings

Total changes from financing cashflows

Balance at 3 March 2018

For the 52 
weeks 
ended 
3 March 
2018 
£m 

For the 53 
weeks 
ended 
4 March 
2017
£m 

32.2

89.0

Note

25

(2.6)

(36.6)

(39.2)

(8.6)

(40.3)

50.0

0.1

(0.1)

1.1

(5.9)

64.1

58.2

(3.7)

(38.6)

(42.3)

(7.8)

(40.2)

20.0

–

0.1

(27.9)

18.8

45.3

64.1

Loans & 
borrowings 
£m

355.0

Note

17

50.0

–

50.0

17

405.0

93

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
Consolidated Cash Flow Statement  
continued

Reconciliation of Operating Profit to Net Cash from Operating Activities

Profit for the year 

Adjustments for:

  Taxation charge

  Fair value adjustments to financial instruments

  Finance costs

  Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

  Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment

  Amortisation of intangible assets

  Share option charge

Operating cash flows before movements in working capital

Increase in inventories

(Increase) in trade and other receivables

Increase/(decrease) in trade and other payables

Increase in provisions

Pension obligation adjustment

Cash generated by operations

Taxation (paid)/received

Net cash from operating activities

For the 52 
weeks 
ended  
3 March 
2018 
£m 

For the 53 
weeks 
ended 
4 March 
2017
£m 

12.5

44.3

3.7

8.5

8.9

5.7

2.7

22.4

0.6

65.0

(5.1)

(77.6)

33.0

29.3

(0.3)

44.3

(12.1)

32.2

13.3

(0.2)

7.7

6.9

–

20.7

0.5

93.2

(4.0)

(21.6)

(0.2)

19.9

(0.2)

87.1

1.9

89.0

94

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018 
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity

Share
capital
(note 23) 
£m

Share
premium
£m

Own
shares
(note 24)
£m

Foreign 
currency 
translation
reserve
£m

Retained
earnings
£m

Total
£m

Changes in equity for the 53 weeks ended 4 March 2017

Balance as at 27 February 2016

31.3

11.0

(0.2)

1.8

432.1

476.0

Comprehensive income for the period

Profit for the period 

Other items of comprehensive income for the period

Total comprehensive income for the period

Transactions with owners recorded directly in equity

Equity dividends

Issue of own shares by ESOT

Share option charge 

Tax on items recognised directly in equity 

Total contributions by and distributions to owners

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Balance at 4 March 2017

31.3

11.0

–

–

–

–

0.1

–

–

0.1

(0.1)

–

0.5

0.5

–

–

–

–

–

2.3

44.3

(2.5)

41.8

44.3

(2.0)

42.3

(40.2)

(40.2)

–

0.5

(0.5)

(40.2)

433.7

0.1

0.5

(0.5)

(40.1)

478.2

Changes in equity for the 52 weeks ended 3 March 2018

Balance as at 4 March 2017

31.3

11.0

(0.1)

2.3

433.7

478.2

Comprehensive income for the period

Profit for the period

Other items of comprehensive income for the period

Total comprehensive income for the period

Transactions with owners recorded directly in equity

Equity dividends

Issue of ordinary share capital

Issue of own shares by ESOT

Share option charge

Tax on items recognised directly in equity 

Total contributions by and distributions to owners

Balance at 3 March 2018

–

–

–

–

0.1

–

–

–

0.1

31.4

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

11.0

–

–

–

–

–

(0.1)

–

–

(0.1)

(0.2)

–

(0.2)

(0.2)

–

–

–

–

–

–

2.1

12.5

8.7

21.2

12.5

8.5

21.0

(40.3)

(40.3)

–

–

0.6

0.1

0.1

(0.1)

0.6

0.1

(39.6)

415.3

(39.6)

459.6

95

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Group Accounts

1 General information
N Brown Group plc is a company incorporated in the United 
Kingdom under the Companies Act 2006. The address of the 
registered office is listed in the Shareholder Information 
section on page 131 at the end of the report. The nature of 
the Group’s operations and its principal activities are set out 
on page 56 of the Directors’ Report.

These financial statements are presented in pounds sterling 
because that is the currency of the primary economic 
environment in which the Group operates. Foreign operations 
are included in accordance with the policies set out in note 2.

The Group financial statements for the 52 weeks ended 
3 March 2018 have been prepared in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as adopted 
for use in the EU. The Company has elected to prepare its 
parent company financial statements in accordance with 
FRS 101, these are presented on pages 124 to 130.

The accounting policies have been applied consistently  
in the current and prior periods.

Adoption of new and revised standards
No standards have been adopted that affect the reported 
results or financial position.

At the date of authorisation of these financial statements, the 
following standards and interpretations which have not been 
applied in these financial statements were in issue but not yet 
effective (and in some cases had not yet been adopted by  
the EU):

•  IFRS 9: Financial Instruments 
•  Amendments to IFRS 9 Financial instruments*
•  IFRS 15: Revenue from Contracts with Customers.
•  Clarifications to IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with 

Customers. 

•  Effective date of IFRS 15 – amendment to IFRS 15
•  IFRS 16 Leases
•  Clarification and Measurement of Share Based Payment 

Transactions – Amendments to IFRS 2*

•  Annual improvements to IFRSs – 2014 – 2016 Cycle * 
•  IFRIC Interpretation 22 Foreign Currency Transactions  

& Advance Consideration * 

•  IFRS 23 Uncertainty over Income Tax Treatments

i) Classification – financial assets
IFRS 9 contains a new classification and measurement 
approach for financial assets that reflects the business model  
in which assets are managed and their cash flow characteristics.

IFRS 9 contains three principal classification categories  
for financial assets: measured at amortised cost, fair value 
through other comprehensive income (“FVOCI”) and fair 
value through profit and loss (“FVTPL”). The standard 
eliminates the existing IAS 39 categories of held to  
maturity, loans and receivables and available for sale.

Based on its assessment, the Group does not believe that the 
new classification requirements will have a material impact on 
its accounting for trade receivables.

A financial asset will be measured at amortised cost if both 
the following conditions are met and it has not been 
designated as at FVTPL:

•  the asset is held within a business model whose objective  

is to hold the asset to collect its contractual cash flows; and 
•  the contractual terms of the financial asset give rise to cash 
flows on specified dates that represent payments of solely 
principal and interest on the outstanding principal amount. 

Impact assessment 
As detailed below IFRS 9 will have minimal impact on the 
classification of financial assets held as at 4 March 2018: 

The Group’s trade receivables will be classified as amortised 
cost. This is consistent with their current IAS 39 classification; 
and The Group held no financial instruments that would be 
classified as FVOCI or FVTPL at 4 March 2018.

ii) Impairment – Financial assets and contract assets  
IFRS 9 replaces the ‘incurred loss’ model in IAS 39 with a 
forward-looking ‘expected credit loss’ (ECL) model. Under  
IFRS 9, loss allowances will be measured on either of the 
following bases: 

•  12-month ECLs: these are ECLs that result from possible 
default events within the 12 months after the reporting  
date; and 

•  Lifetime ECLs: these are ECLs that result from all  
possible default events over the expected life of  
a financial instrument. 

The Directors do not expect that the adoption of the standards 
listed above will have a material impact on the financial 
statements of the Group in future periods, except as follows:

Lifetime ECL measurement applies if the credit risk of a financial 
asset at the reporting date has increased significantly since initial 
recognition and 12-month ECL measurement applies if it has not. 

Estimated impact of the adoption of IFRS 9 
The Group is required to adopt IFRS 9 Financial Instruments 
from 4 March 2018. The Group has assessed the estimated 
impact of the initial application of IFRS 9.

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments
IFRS 9 Financial Instruments sets out requirements for 
recognising and measuring financial assets, financial liabilities 
and some contracts to buy or sell non-financial items. This 
standard replaces IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition 
and Measurement.

Definition of default
At each reporting date, the Group will assess whether 
financial assets carried at amortised cost are credit impaired.

Evidence that a financial asset is credit impaired includes the 
following observable data: 

The account has been placed on a non-interest bearing 
payment arrangement; or Notification of bereavement.

The credit risk of financial assets that become credit impaired 
are not expected to improve such that they are no longer 
considered credit impaired.

*  Not yet endorsed by the EU

96

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Significant increase in credit risk 
The credit risk of a financial asset will be considered to have 
experienced a significant increase in credit risk since initial 
recognition where there has been a significant increase in  
the remaining lifetime probability of default of the asset. 

•  the Group is still refining its models and methodology for 
expected credit loss calculation (‘ECL’) calculation; and
•  the governance and implementation of internal controls 

required for implementation are in the process of 
refinement and finalisation.

The credit risk of a financial asset may improve such that it  
is no longer considered to have experienced a significant 
increase in credit risk if there has been a significant decrease 
in the remaining lifetime probability of default of the asset.

In addition, a receivable that is 28 days or more past due  
(in respect of new customers) or 56 days or more past due  
(in respect of established customers) will be considered  
credit impaired. 

Incorporation of forward looking data
The Group will incorporate forward looking information into  
its measurement of expected credit loss. 

This will be achieved by developing a number of potential 
economic scenarios and modelling expected credit losses  
for each scenario. The outputs from each scenario will be 
combined; using the estimated likelihood of each scenario 
occurring to derive a probability weighted expected credit loss. 

Estimated Impact – Trade and other receivables
The estimated impact of the adoption of IFRS 9 is based  
on assessments undertaken to date and is noted below.

The estimated ECLs were calculated based on actual credit 
loss experience over the past eight years. 

Exposures were segmented based on common credit risk 
characteristics such as behavioural score and age of relationship.

Actual credit loss experience was adjusted by scalar factors  
to reflect differences between economic conditions during  
the period over which the historical data was collected, 
current conditions and the Group’s view of economic 
conditions over the expected lives of the receivables. Scalar 
factors were based on forecast unemployment rates and 
inflation adjusted average weekly earnings.

The Group currently estimates that application of IFRS 9’s 
impairment requirements at 4 March 2018 results in a 
provision range of £152m to £172m, an increase of between 
£103m and £123m over the impairment recognised under IAS 
39. The assessment made by the Group is preliminary as not 
all transition work requirements have been finalised and  
therefore may be subject to adjustment.

The actual impact of adopting the standard at 4 March 2018 
may change because: 

•  assumptions and judgements are subject to change until 
finalisation of the financial statements for the year ending 
2 March 2019, specifically regarding the quantification of 
un-drawn balances. The treatment has now been finalised, 
however the quantification is still being finalised which will 
materially reduce the IFRS 9 provision, by, we estimate, 
approximately half the potential increase.

Disclosures
IFRS 9 will require extensive new disclosures regarding credit 
risk and ECLs. 

Transition
The Group will take advantage of the exemption allowing  
it not to restate comparative information for prior periods  
with respect to classification and measurement (including 
impairment) changes. Differences in the carrying amounts  
of financial assets and financial liabilities resulting from the 
adoption of IFRS 9 will generally be recognised in retained 
earnings and reserves as at 4 March 2018.

IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers 
Management have assessed the impact of the introduction  
of IFRS 15 and consider that there will be no significant 
impact on the future financial statements. 

IFRS 16 Leases
Management have already sought professional advice as part  
of their initial investigations and have subsequently organised  
a series of workshops to evaluate and communicate the 
impact of the introduction of IFRS 16 on next year’s group 
budget and forecasts as well as future financial statements.

IFRIC 23 Uncertainty over Income Tax Treatments
Management have made initial investigations but have not  
yet assessed the impact of the introduction of IFRS 23 on the 
financial statements of future periods.

2 Accounting policies
Basis of accounting
The financial statements are prepared on the historical cost 
basis except that derivative financial instruments are stated  
at their fair value. The principal accounting policies adopted  
are set out as follows.

Accounting period
Throughout the accounts, the Directors Report and financial 
review, reference to 2018 means at 3 March 2018 or the 52 
weeks then ended; reference to 2017 means at 4 March 2017  
or the 53 weeks then ended unless otherwise stated.

Basis of consolidation
The consolidated financial statements incorporate the 
financial statements of the Company and entities controlled 
by the Company (its subsidiaries) made up to the Saturday 
that falls closest to 28 February each year. The Employee 
Share Ownership Trust is also made up to a date coterminous  
with the financial period of the parent Company.

97

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Group Accounts  
continued

2 Accounting policies continued
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. The Group 
controls an entity when it is exposed to, or has rights to, 
variable returns from its involvement with the entity and  
has the ability to affect those returns through its power  
over the entity. In assessing control, the Group takes into 
consideration potential voting rights that are currently 
exercisable. The acquisition date is the date on which control 
is transferred to the acquirer. The financial statements of 
subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial 
statements from the date that control commences until  
the date that control ceases. Losses applicable to the 
non-controlling interests in a subsidiary are allocated  
to the non-controlling interests even if doing so causes  
the non-controlling interests to have a deficit balance.  
Where necessary, adjustments are made to the financial 
statements of subsidiaries to bring the accounting policies 
used into line with those used by the Group.

All intra-group transactions, balances, income and expenses  
are eliminated on consolidation.

Business combinations
The acquisition of subsidiaries is accounted for using the 
purchase method. The cost of the acquisition is measured  
at the aggregate of the fair values, at the date of exchange,  
of assets given, liabilities incurred or assumed, and equity 
instruments issued by the Group in exchange for control  
of the acquiree. The acquiree’s identifiable assets, liabilities  
and contingent liabilities that meet the conditions for 
recognition under IFRS 3 are recognised at their fair value  
at the acquisition date.

Acquisition costs are expensed as incurred.

Revenue recognition
Product revenue is measured at the fair value of the 
consideration received or receivable and represents amounts 
receivable for goods and services provided in the normal 
course of business, net of discounts and sales related taxes. 

In the case of goods sold through our retail stores and trading 
websites, revenue is recognised when goods are despatched 
and the risks and rewards of ownership have transferred to the 
buyer. Sales returns in the period are recognised as a deduction 
to revenue as incurred. Provision is made for outstanding returns 
not yet made at the period end. Accumulated experience 
(including historical returns rates) is used to estimate and provide 
for such returns. The provision is recorded as a reduction in 
revenue with a corresponding entry to debtors (for credit sales) 
and accruals (for cash sales). Inventory expected to come back as 
a result of returns is recorded as a reduction in cost of sales with 
a corresponding entry to increase the closing stocks.

Financial services revenue includes interest, administrative 
charges and arrangement fees. Interest income is accrued on  
a time basis, by reference to the principal outstanding and the 
applicable effective interest rate which is the rate that exactly 
discounts estimated future cash receipts through the expected 
life of the financial assets to that asset’s net carrying amount. 
Revenue from non-interest related financial income is 
recognised when the services have been performed.

98

Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost, less 
accumulated depreciation and any provision for impairment  
in value. 

Depreciation is charged so as to write off the cost of assets  
to their estimated residual values, based on current prices  
at the balance sheet date, over their remaining useful lives, 
using the straight-line method. No depreciation is charged on 
freehold land. In this respect the following annual depreciation 
rates apply:

Land and Buildings

Freehold buildings

Leasehold property and 
improvements

Fixtures and Equipment

2%

over the period of the lease

Computer equipment

between 10% and 20%

Plant and machinery

between 5% and 20%

Fixtures and equipment

between 10% and 20%

The gain or loss arising on the disposal or retirement of  
an asset is determined as the difference between the sales 
proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset and is 
recognised in the income statement.

Borrowing costs
Borrowing costs directly attributable to the acquisition, 
construction or production of qualifying assets, which are 
assets that necessarily take a substantial period of time to get 
ready for their intended use or sale, are added to the cost of 
those assets, until such time as the assets are substantially 
ready for their intended use or sale.

All other borrowing costs are recognised in profit or loss  
in the period in which they are incurred.

Intangible assets
Computer software development costs that generate 
economic benefits beyond one year are capitalised as 
intangible assets and amortised on a straight-line basis over  
a range of five to ten years. Assets under construction are  
not amortised but instead tested for impairment annually.

Expenditure on development activities is capitalised if the product 
or process is technically and commercially feasible and the Group 
intends to and has the technical ability and sufficient resources to 
complete development, future economic benefits are probable 
and if the Group can measure reliably the expenditure 
attributable to the intangible asset during its development. 
Development activities involve a plan or design for the production 
of new or substantially improved products or processes. The 
expenditure capitalised includes the cost of materials and direct 
labour. Other development expenditure is recognised in the 
income statement as an expense as incurred. Capitalised 
development expenditure is stated at cost less accumulated 
amortisation and less accumulated impairment losses.

Customer databases arising on acquisitions assessed under  
the requirements of IFRS 3 are amortised over their useful 
economic lives, which have been assessed as being five years.

Legally protected or otherwise separable trade names acquired 
as part of a business combination are capitalised at fair value  
on acquisition. Brand names are individually assessed and are 
assumed to have an indefinite life and are not amortised, but 
are subject to annual impairment tests.

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Impairment of tangible and intangible assets
At each balance sheet date, the Group reviews the carrying 
value of its tangible and intangible assets to determine 
whether there is any indication that those assets have 
suffered an impairment loss. If any such indication exists,  
the recoverable amount of the asset is estimated in order  
to determine the extent of the impairment loss (if any).  
Where the asset does not generate cash flows that are 
independent from other assets, the Group estimates the 
recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit to which  
the asset belongs. For intangible assets that have indefinite 
useful lives or that are not yet available for use, the 
recoverable amount is estimated each year at the same time.

Recoverable amount is the higher of fair value less costs to 
sell and value in use. In assessing value in use, the estimated 
future cash flows are discounted to their present value using  
a discount rate that reflects current market assessments  
of the time value of money and the risks specific to the  
asset for which the estimates of future cash flows have  
not been adjusted.

If the recoverable amount of an asset (or cash-generating 
unit) is estimated to be less than its carrying amount, the 
carrying amount of the asset (cash-generating unit) is 
reduced to its recoverable amount. An impairment loss  
is recognised as an expense immediately.

Where an impairment loss subsequently reverses, the 
carrying amount of the asset (cash-generating unit) is 
increased to the revised estimate of its recoverable amount, 
but so that the increased carrying amount does not exceed 
the carrying amount that would have been determined had 
no impairment loss been recognised for the asset (cash-
generating unit) in prior years. A reversal of an impairment 
loss is recognised as income immediately.

Inventories
Inventories have been valued at the lower of cost and net 
realisable value. Provision is made based on the age of the 
inventory and management’s estimates of future disposal 
strategies. Cost comprises direct materials and those 
overheads that have been incurred in bringing inventories to 
their present location and condition based on the standard 
costing method. Cost has been calculated on a first-in first-out 
basis. Net realisable value means estimated selling price less 
all costs to be incurred in marketing, selling and distribution.

Taxation
The tax expense represents the sum of the tax currently 
payable and deferred tax.

The tax currently payable is based on taxable profit for the 
year. Taxable profit differs from net profit as reported in the 
income statement because it excludes items of income or 
expense that are taxable or deductible in other years and it 
further excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. 
The Group’s liability for current tax is calculated using tax 
rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by  
the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable 
on differences between the carrying amounts of assets and 
liabilities in the financial statements and the corresponding  
tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit, and is 
accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. 
Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable 

temporary differences and deferred tax assets are recognised 
to the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will be 
available against which deductible temporary differences can 
be utilised. Such assets and liabilities are not recognised if the 
temporary difference arises from goodwill or from the initial 
recognition (other than in a business combination) of other 
assets and liabilities in a transaction that affects neither the  
tax profit nor the accounting profit.

Deferred tax is calculated at the tax rates that are expected  
to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset  
is realised. Deferred tax is charged or credited in the income 
statement, except when it relates to items charged or 
credited directly to equity, in which case the deferred  
tax is also dealt with in equity.

Foreign currencies
The individual financial statements of each Group company 
are presented in the currency of the primary economic 
environment in which it operates (its functional currency).  
For the purpose of the consolidated financial statements,  
the results and financial position of each Group company  
are expressed in pounds sterling, the presentation currency 
for the consolidated financial statements.

In preparing the financial statement of the individual 
companies, transactions in currencies other than the entity’s 
functional currency (foreign currencies) are recorded at the 
rates of exchange prevailing on the dates of the transactions.  
At each balance sheet date, monetary assets and liabilities 
that are denominated in foreign currencies are retranslated at 
the rates prevailing on the balance sheet date. Non-monetary 
items carried at fair value that are denominated in foreign 
currencies are translated at the rates prevailing at the date 
when the fair value was determined. Non-monetary items 
that are measured in terms of historical cost in a foreign 
currency are not retranslated.

Exchange differences arising on the settlement of monetary 
items, and on the retranslation of monetary items, are 
included in profit or loss for the period. Exchange differences 
arising on the retranslation of non-monetary items carried at 
fair value are included in profit or loss for the period except 
for differences arising on the retranslation of non-monetary 
items in respect of which gains and losses are recognised 
directly in equity. For such non-monetary items, any 
exchange component of that gain or loss is also recognised 
directly in equity. 

In order to hedge its exposure to certain foreign exchange 
risks, the Group may enter into forward contracts and options 
(see below for details of the Group’s accounting policies in 
respect of such derivative financial instruments).

For the purpose of presenting consolidated financial 
statements, the assets and liabilities of the Group’s foreign 
operations are translated at exchange rates prevailing on  
the balance sheet date. Income and expense items are 
translated at the average exchange rates for the period, 
unless exchange rates fluctuate significantly during that 
period, in which case the exchange rates at the date of 
transactions are used. Exchange differences arising,  
if any, are classified as equity and transferred to the  
Group’s translation reserve. Such translation differences  
are recognised as income or as expenses in the period  
in which the operation is disposed of.

99

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Group Accounts  
continued

2 Accounting policies continued
Financial instruments
Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised on the 
Group’s balance sheet when the Group becomes a party to 
the contractual provisions of the instrument. Profits and 
losses on financial instruments are recognised in the income 
statement as they arise.

Trade receivables
Trade receivables are initially measured at fair value and 
subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective 
interest rate method. Appropriate allowances for estimated 
irrecoverable amounts are recognised in profit or loss when 
there is objective evidence that the asset is impaired based 
on specific customer patterns of behaviour which may be 
affected by external economic conditions.

The allowance recognised is measured as the difference 
between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value  
of estimated future cash flows discounted at the effective 
interest rate computed at initial recognition.

The Group derecognises a financial asset, or a portion of a 
financial asset, from its balance sheet where the contractual 
rights to cash flows from the asset have expired, or have been 
transferred, such as by a sale, and with them all the risks and 
rewards of the asset.

Trade receivables are assessed for impairment on a collective 
basis. Objective evidence of impairment could include the 
Group’s past experience of collecting payments and 
observable changes in national and local economic conditions 
that could correlate with a default event. For further details 
see note 16.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash on hand and 
demand deposits, and other short-term highly liquid 
investments that are readily convertible to a known amount of 
cash and are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value.

Financial liabilities and equity
Financial liabilities and equity instruments are classified 
according to the substance of the contractual arrangements 
entered into. An equity instrument is any contract that 
evidences a residual interest in the assets of the Group  
after deducting all of its liabilities.

Bank borrowings
Interest-bearing bank loans and overdrafts are recorded at 
proceeds received, net of direct issue costs. Finance charges, 
including premiums payable on settlement or redemption 
and direct issue costs, are accounted for on an accrual basis 
in the income statement using the effective interest method.

Trade and other payables
Trade and other payables are recognised initially at fair value, 
are not interest bearing and are subsequently measured at 
amortised cost. 

Equity instruments
Equity instruments issued by the Company are recorded  
at the proceeds received, net of direct issue costs. 

100

Derivative financial instruments 
The Group’s activities expose it primarily to the financial risks  
of changes in foreign currency exchange rates relating to the 
purchase of overseas sourced products, and interest rates 
relating to the Group’s debt. The Group uses foreign 
exchange forward contracts and interest rate swap contracts 
where appropriate to hedge these exposures. In accordance 
with its treasury policy, the Group does not use derivative 
financial instruments for speculative purposes.

The use of financial derivatives is governed by the Group’s 
policies approved by the Board of Directors, which provide 
written principles on the use of financial derivatives. 

Derivatives are stated at their fair value. The fair value of 
foreign currency derivatives contracts is established with 
respect to observable market data at the balance sheet date.

Market values are based on the duration of the derivative 
instrument together with the observable market data 
including interest rates, foreign exchange rates and market 
volatility at the balance sheet date. The fair value of interest 
rate contracts is the estimated amount that the Group would 
receive or pay to terminate them at the balance sheet date, 
taking into account prevailing interest rates.

Changes in the fair value of currency derivative financial 
instruments are recognised in the income statement as  
they arise.

Provisions
The Group recognises a provision for a present obligation 
resulting from a past event when it is more likely than not that  
it will be required to transfer economic benefits to settle the 
obligation and the amount of the obligation can be estimated 
reliably. The Group has on-going discussions with HMRC in 
respect of a number of Corporation tax and VAT positions. 

Provisions are made in respect of these positions when 
management consider it probable that the position will be 
settled via payment to HMRC and it is possible to estimate 
reliably the amount of the obligation which will be settled. In 
determining whether a future economic outflow is probable 
the Group assesses all available information including the 
opinion of legal counsel where appropriate. 

Provision is made for customer remediation when the Group has 
established that a present obligation exists in respect of financial 
services products sold in the past. The provision requires a 
significant level of estimation and judgement and the amounts 
provided depend on a number of different assumptions.

Provision is made for restructuring costs, including the costs 
of redundancy, when the Group has a constructive obligation 
to restructure. An obligation exists when the Group has a 
detailed formal plan for the restructuring and has raised a 
valid expectation in those affected by starting to implement 
the plan or by announcing its main features. If the Group  
has a contract that is onerous, it recognises the present 
obligation under the contract as a provision. An onerous 
contract is one where the unavoidable costs of meeting  
the Group’s contractual obligations exceed the expected 
economic benefits. When the Group vacates a leasehold 
property, a provision is recognised for the unavoidable future 
costs under the lease less any expected economic benefits 
(such as rental income). 

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Contingent liabilities are possible obligations arising from past 
events, whose existence will be confirmed only by uncertain 
future events, or present obligations arising from past events 
that are not recognised because either an outflow of economic 
benefits is not probable or the amount of the obligation cannot 
be reliably measured. Contingent liabilities are not recognised 
but information about them is disclosed unless the possibility  
of any outflow of economic benefits in settlement is remote.

Leasing
Rentals payable under operating leases are charged to income 
on a straight line basis over the term of the relevant lease even 
where payments are not made on such a basis.

Share-based payments
The Group issues equity-settled share-based payments to 
certain employees. Equity-settled share-based payments are 
measured at fair value at the date of grant. The fair value 
determined at the grant date of the equity-settled share-based 
payments is expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting 
period, based on the Group’s estimate of shares that will 
eventually vest. This is recognised as an employee expense with 
a corresponding increase in equity. Fair value is measured by 
monte-carlo for options subject to a market based performance 
condition and by use of a Black–Scholes model for all others. 
For share-based payment awards with non-vesting conditions, 
the grant date fair value of the share-based payment is 
measured to reflect such conditions and there is no true-up  
for differences between expected and actual outcomes.

Own shares held by ESOT
Transactions of the Group sponsored Employee Share 
Ownership Trust (ESOT) are included in the Group financial 
statements. The trust’s purchases and sales of shares in the 
Company are debited and credited directly to equity.

Retirement benefit costs
Payments to defined contribution retirement benefit schemes 
are charged as an expense as they fall due. 

For defined benefit retirement benefit schemes, the cost  
of providing benefits is determined using the Projected Unit 
Credit Method, with actuarial valuations being carried out at 
the end of each reporting period. Remeasurement comprising 
actuarial gains and losses, the effect of the asset ceiling  
(if applicable) and the return on scheme assets (excluding 
interest) are recognised immediately in the balance sheet with 
a charge or credit to the statement of comprehensive income 
in the period in which they occur. Remeasurement recorded  
in the statement of comprehensive income is not recycled. 
Past service cost is recognised in profit or loss in the period  
of scheme amendment. Net interest is calculated by applying 
a discount rate to the net defined benefit liability or asset. 
Defined benefit costs are split into three categories:

•  current service cost, past-service cost and gains and losses  

on curtailments and settlements;
•  net interest expense or income; and
•  remeasurement.

The Group presents the first two components of defined 
benefit costs within operating expenses (see note 29) in its 
consolidated income statement. Curtailments gains and 
losses are accounted for as past-service cost. Net interest 
expense or income is recognised within finance costs (see 
note 8).

The retirement benefit asset/(obligation) recognised in the 
balance sheet represents the present value of the defined 
benefit asset/(obligation), as reduced by the fair value of 
scheme assets. Any asset resulting from this calculation is 
restricted to the past service cost plus the present value  
of available refunds and reductions in future contributions.

Supplier rebates
The Group enters into volume based rebate arrangements 
with suppliers. Rebates are calculated annually based on 
agreements in place, which stipulate an agreed percentage  
of purchase be grated as a rebate. Rebates are agreed with 
suppliers before they are recognised in the Income Statement, 
outstanding balances are recorded in accrued income. 

Going concern
In determining whether the Group’s accounts can be 
prepared on a going concern basis, the Directors considered 
the Group’s business activities together with factors likely to 
affect its future development, performance and its financial 
position including cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing 
facilities and the principal risks and uncertainties relating to 
its business activities. These are set out within the Risk 
Management Report on pages 28 to 33.

The Group has considered carefully its cash flows and 
banking covenants for the next twelve months from the date 
of signing the audited financial statements. These have been 
appraised in light of the current economic climate. As such, 
conservative assumptions for working capital performance 
have been used to determine the level of financial resources 
available to the Company and to assess liquidity risk. 

To take advantage of strong market conditions and 
favourable pricing, on 4 May 2018 the Directors completed 
the process for a new finance agreement which will replace 
the existing £280m securitisation and £125m RCF with a  
new £500m securitisation and £125m RCF, which will be 
committed until September 2021. In addition, the Group  
has retained its existing £27m overdraft facility. 

After making appropriate enquiries, the Directors have a 
reasonable expectation that the Company and the Group  
have adequate resources to continue in operational existence. 
Accordingly, they continue to adopt the going concern basis  
in the preparation of the Annual Report and Accounts.

Exceptional items
Exceptional items are those that are considered to be one  
off, non-recurring in nature and so material that the Directors 
believe that they require separate disclosure to avoid 
distortion of underlying performance and should be 
separately presented on the face of the income statement.

Critical judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty
In the course of preparing the financial statements, no 
judgements have been made in the process of applying  
the Group’s accounting policies, other than those involving 
estimations stated below, that have had a significant effect  
on the amounts recorded within the financial statements.

101

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Group Accounts  
continued

2 Accounting policies continued
The key assumptions concerning the future and other sources 
of estimation uncertainty at the year end date, that have a 
significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying 
amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year, 
are discussed as follows.

Trade receivables
An appropriate allowance for estimated irrecoverable trade 
receivables is derived where there is an identified event which, 
based on previous experience, is evidence of a potential 
reduction in the recoverability of future cash flows. This 
estimation is based on assumed collection rates which, 
although based on the Group’s historical experience of 
customer repayment patterns, remains inherently uncertain. 
Changes in the assumptions applied (including period of 
historical experience used to estimate customer repayment and 
the occurrence and frequency of future debt sales), could have 
a significant impact on the carrying value of trade receivables.

As a result this is continually assessed for relevance and 
adjusted appropriately. Further information is given in note 16.

Taxation
The Group has ongoing discussions with HMRC in respect  
of a number of Corporation tax and VAT positions. The 
calculation of the Group’s potential liabilities or assets  
in respect of these involves a degree of estimation and 
judgement in respect of items whose tax treatment cannot 
be finally determined until resolution has been reached with 
HMRC or, as appropriate, through legal processes. Issues can, 
and often do, take a number of years to resolve.

In respect of Corporation tax, as at 3 March 2018 the Group  
has provided a total of £3.8m (2017: £3.6m) for potential 
Corporation tax future charges based upon the Group’s  
best estimation and judgement. 

The inherent uncertainty regarding the outcome of these 
positions means the eventual realisation could differ from  
the accounting estimates and therefore impact the Group’s 
future results and cash flows. Based on the amounts reflected 
in the balance sheet as at 3 March 2018, the Directors 
estimate that the unfavourable settlement of these cases 
could result in a charge to the income statement of up  
to £5.6m and a cash payments to HMRC of up to £10.2m.  
The favourable settlement of these cases would result in  
a repayment of tax of up to £19.8m and an associated  
credit to the income statement of £23.6m.

In respect of VAT, the Group has provided a total of £3.1m 
(2017: £5.4m) in respect of future payments which the 
Directors have a reasonable expectation of making in 
settlement of these historical positions.

In addition and separate to the above positions, the Group 
continues to be in discussion with HMRC in relation to the 
VAT consequences of the allocation of certain costs between 
our retail and credit businesses. At this stage it is not possible 
to determine how the matter will be resolved. Within our  
year end VAT debtor is an asset of £43.8m (2017: £36.0m) 
which has arisen as a result of cash payments made under 
protective assessments raised by HMRC and the Group 
estimates that a further £10m could be paid under this 
assessment in the forthcoming year. Based on the advice of 
external tax advisors, together with legal counsel’s opinion  

102

on certain elements of the cost allocation, we believe that  
we will recover this amount in full from HMRC and we are 
engaged in legal process to do so. 

The inherent uncertainty regarding the outcome of these 
positions means the eventual realisation could differ from  
the accounting estimates and therefore impact the Group’s 
future results and cash flows. Based on the amounts reflected 
in the balance sheet as at 3 March 2018, the Directors 
estimate that the unfavourable settlement of these cases 
could result in a charge to the income statement of up to 
£53.0m (2017: £43.3m)(including the full write off of the VAT 
debtor noted above) and a cash payment to HMRC of up to 
£9.2m (2017: £16.0m). The favourable settlement of these 
cases would result in a repayment of tax and associated 
interest of up to £43.8m (2017: £54.1m) and an associated 
credit to the income statement of £nil (2017: £29.0m).

Inventory
Provision is made for those items of inventory where the  
net realisable value is estimated to be lower than cost.  
Net realisable value is based on both historical experience 
and assumptions regarding future selling values and  
disposal channels, and is consequently a source of  
estimation uncertainty.

Regulatory
The regulatory environment in which the Group operates  
is both complex and changing and the Group continues  
to review and develop its compliance with the requirements 
of the FCA. Provisions for customer remediation require 
significant levels of estimation and judgement. The amounts 
of provisions recognised depend on a number of different 
assumptions, such as, the volume of inbound complaints, the 
uphold rate of complaint volumes and the average redress 
amount paid. A summary of the impact of a reasonable 
change in these assumptions is set out in note 22.

Software development costs
Included within intangible assets are significant software  
and development project costs in respect of the Group’s 
technological development programme. Costs are capitalised 
to the extent that future economic benefits are expected  
to be generated by the project, which requires judgement  
to be made as to whether the project will be completed 
successfully, will be technically feasible and whether sufficient 
revenue and profitability will be generated to recover the 
costs capitalised. If these criteria are not subsequently met, 
the asset would be subject to a future impairment charge 
which would impact the Group’s results. This is consequently 
a source of estimation uncertainty.

Brand intangibles
Included within intangible assets are brand intangibles of 
£8.9m which are legally protected or otherwise separable 
trade names acquired as part of a business combination.  
As these brand names are assumed to have an indefinite  
life, they are subject to an annual impairment test with  
the recoverable amount determined by a “value in use” 
calculation. This calculation requires a series of assumptions 
and estimates to be made which if not met could result in a 
future impairment charge. This is consequentially a source  
of estimation uncertainty. A summary of these assumptions 
together with the impact of a reasonable change in these 
assumptions is set out in note 12. 

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 20183 Revenue

An analysis of the Group’s revenue is as follows:

Sale of goods

Financial services

Revenue

2018 
£m 

2017 
£m 

652.6

269.6

922.2

635.9

264.8

900.7

4 Business segment
The Group has one reportable segment in accordance with IFRS 8 – Operating Segments, which is the Home Shopping segment. 
The Group’s Board receives monthly financial information at this level and uses this information to monitor the performance of the 
Home Shopping segment, allocate resources and make operational decisions. Internal reporting focuses on the Group as a whole 
and does not identify individual segments. To increase transparency, the Group has included an additional voluntary disclosure 
analysing product revenue within the reportable segment, by brand categorisation and product type categorisation.

Continuing operations

Analysis of revenue – Home Shopping total

Product

Financial Services

Analysis of cost of sales – Home Shopping total

Product

Financial Services

Gross profit – total

Product gross margin

Financial Services gross margin

Warehouse and fulfilment costs

Marketing and production costs

Depreciation and amortisation costs

Other administration and payroll costs

Operating profit before exceptionals

Exceptional items (see note 6)

Segment result and operating profit – Home Shopping

Finance costs

Fair value adjustments to financial instruments 

Profit before taxation

2018 
£m 

2017 
£m 

922.2

652.6

269.6

(416.6)

(312.1)

(104.5)

505.6

52.2%

61.2%

(85.8)

(164.0)

(28.1)

(137.2)

90.5

(56.9)

33.6

 (8.9)

 (8.5)

16.2

900.7

635.9

264.8

(405.5)

(288.2)

(117.3)

495.2

54.7%

55.7%

(81.3)

(165.4)

(27.6)

(130.6)

90.3

(25.2)

65.1

(7.7)

0.2

57.6

103

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Group Accounts  
continued

4 Business segment continued

Analysis of product revenue by brand

JD Williams

Simply Be

Jacamo

Power Brands

Traditional segment

Secondary brands

Total product revenue – Home Shopping

Analysis of product revenue by category

Ladieswear

Menswear

Footwear and accessories

Home and gift

Total product revenue – Home Shopping

2018 
£m 

2017 
£m 

163.4

132.8

68.6

364.8

138.6

149.2

652.6

267.6

89.2

74.9

220.9

652.6

160.5

115.8

66.2

342.5

136.1

157.3

635.9

260.0

87.0

70.0

218.9

635.9

The Group has one significant geographical segment, which is the United Kingdom. Revenue derived from international markets 
amounted to £38.8m (2017: £35.8m) and operating profits of £1.2m (2017:(2017: £1.9m). Segment assets are located in the UK, 
Ireland and the US.

For the purposes of monitoring segment performance, all assets and liabilities are allocated to the sole reportable segment, being 
Home Shopping. There are no impairments of goodwill or intangible assets in the current period (2017:(2017: £nil). Tangible assets 
of £2.7m (2017: £nil) were written off following the closure of stores in the year, see note 6.

2018 
£m 

38.8

(4.1)

(28.1)

2017 
£m 

41.4

–

(27.6)

1,067.0

(607.4)

459.6

973.6

(495.4)

478.2

Other information

Capital additions

Capital disposals

Depreciation and amortisation

Balance sheet

Total segment assets

Total segment liabilities

Segment net assets

104

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 20182018 
£m 

2017 
£m 

3.1

5.7

2.7

22.4

312.1

83.0

0.4

99.5

56.9

4.5

3.6

6.9

–

20.7

288.2

79.5

0.3

113.5

25.2

6.5

2017 
£m 

0.1

0.2

–

–

0.1

0.4

5 Profit for the period

Profit for the period has been arrived at after charging:

Net foreign exchange losses

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

Loss on disposal (note 6)

Amortisation of intangible assets

Cost of inventories recognised as expense

Staff costs

Auditor’s remuneration for audit services

Doubtful debts recognised as an expense (note 16)

Exceptional items (note 6)

Operating lease costs (note 27)

Amounts payable to KPMG LLP and their associates by the Group in respect of non-audit services were £0.1m (2017: 0.1m).

A more detailed analysis of auditor’s remuneration is provided below:

Audit of these Group financial statements

Amounts receivable by the Company’s auditor and its associates in respect of:

  Audit of financial statements of subsidiaries of the Company

  Audit-related assurance services

  Tax advisory services

  All other services

Total

2018 
£m 

0.1

0.3

–

–

0.1

0.5

Fees in relation to audit related assurance services totalled £29,000 (2017: £36,000).

Fees payable to the Company’s auditor for the audit of the Company’s annual accounts were £16,000 (2017: £15,000).

A description of the work of the Audit Committee is set out in the Corporate Governance Statement on page 60 and includes an 
explanation of how auditor objectivity and independence is safeguarded when non audit services are provided by the auditor.

105

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Group Accounts  
continued

6 Exceptional items

Customer redress for historic insurance products

Closure costs/(credits)

External costs in relation to tax and other matters

2018 
£m

40.0

13.8

3.1

56.9

2017 
£m

22.9

(0.2)

2.5

25.2

Following a recent industry-wide request from the FCA that firms ensure that general insurance products and add-ons offer  
value for their customers, the Group identified flaws in certain insurance products that were provided by a third party insurance 
underwriter and sold by the Group to its customers between 2006 and 2014, with the majority sold up to and including 2011.

Following an assessment of the cost of potential customer redress, an exceptional charge of £40.0m was recognised during the 
period in respect of the sale of these products. During the previous year, an exceptional charge of £22.9m was recognised 
reflecting costs incurred or expected to be incurred in respect of payments for historical financial services customer redress.

In line with our strategy of reshaping our retail offering we performed a review of our store estate and during the period, loss 
making retail stores were closed. This review has resulted in a non recurring cost of £13.8m in respect of onerous lease provisions, 
other related store closure costs and asset write off of £2.7m. 

Following the closures in 2016 of the clearance stores, the credit in FY17 represents lease exit costs being lower than  
originally anticipated.

External costs related to tax are in respect of ongoing legal and professional fees which have been incurred as a result of the 
Group’s ongoing disputes with HMRC regarding a number of historical tax positions. Of the amount charged in the period  
the Group has made related cash payments of £2.2m (2017: £1.9m). 

2018 
Number 

2017 
Number 

1,139
1,505

2,644

2018 
£m 

72.2
6.0
4.2
0.6

83.0

1,146
1,596

2,742

2017 
£m 

69.3
5.8
3.9
0.5

79.5

2017 
£m 

8.1

(0.4)

7.7

7 Staff costs

The average monthly number of employees (including Executive Directors) was:
Distribution
Sales and administration

Their aggregate remuneration comprised

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Other pension costs (see note 29)
Share options costs (see note 28)

Details of individual Directors’ remuneration is disclosed in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 68 to 84.

8 Finance costs

Interest on bank overdrafts and loans

Net pension finance credit (see note 29)

2018 
£m 

9.1

(0.2)

8.9

106

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 20189 Tax

Tax recognised in the income statement
Current tax

Charge for the period

Adjustments in respect of previous periods

Deferred tax

Origination and reversal of temporary timing differences

Reduction in rate

Adjustments in respect of previous periods

Total tax expense

2018 
£m 

4.5

(2.6)

1.9

(1.2)

–

3.0

1.8

3.7

2017 
£m 

12.7

4.1

16.8

(1.5)

(0.3)

(1.7)

(3.5)

13.3

UK Corporation tax is calculated at 19.08% (2017: 20.00%) of the estimated assessable profit for the period. Taxation for other 
jurisdictions is calculated at the rates prevailing in the respective jurisdictions. 

A reduction in the UK Corporation tax rate from 21% to 20% (effective from 1 April 2015) was substantively enacted on 2 July 2013. 
Further reductions to 19% (effective from 1 April 2017) and to 18% (effective 1 April 2020) were substantively enacted on  
26 October 2015, and an additional reduction to 17% (effective 1 April 2020) was substantively enacted on 6 September 2016.  
This will reduce the future current tax charge accordingly. The Group’s deferred tax assets and liabilities as at 3 March 2018 have 
been calculated based upon the rates which will apply when those balances are expected to unwind. 

The charge for the period can be reconciled to the profit per the income statement as follows:

Profit before tax from continuing operations:

Tax at the UK Corporation tax rate of 19.08% (2017: 20.00%)

Effect of change in deferred tax rate

Tax effect of expenses that are not deductible in determining taxable profit

Effect of different tax rates of subsidiaries operating in other jurisdictions

Tax effect of adjustments in respect of previous periods

Tax expense for the period

2018 
£m 

16.2

3.0

0.2

0.3

(0.2)

0.4

3.7

2017 
£m 

57.6

11.5

(0.3)

0.3

(0.6)

2.4

13.3

In addition to the amount charged to the income statement, tax movements recognised directly through equity were as follows:

Tax recognised in other comprehensive income
Deferred tax – remeasurement of retirement benefit obligations

Tax charge/(credit) in the statement of comprehensive income

Tax recognised in equity
Current tax – share based payments

Deferred tax – share based payments

Tax (credit)/charge in the statement of changes in equity

2018 
£m 

1.8

1.8

2018 
£m 

–

(0.1)

(0.1)

2017 
£m 

(0.6)

(0.6)

2017 
£m 

(0.1)

0.6

0.5

The Group is in ongoing discussions with HMRC in respect of a number of Corporation tax positions. The calculation of the 
Group’s potential liabilities or assets in respect of these involves a degree of estimation and judgement in respect of items whose 
tax treatment cannot be finally determined until resolution has been reached with HMRC or, as appropriate, through a legal 
process. Issues can, and often do, take a number of years to resolve.

In respect of Corporation tax, as at 3 March 2018 the Group has provided a total of £3.8m (2017: £3.6m) for potential tax future 
charges based upon the Group’s best estimation and judgement and advice from external tax advisors. Adjustments in respect  
of previous periods include current tax provisions made in respect of tax exposures (£1.0m) in addition to relief claimed in relation 
to research and development costs on intangible asset (£3.6m). 

107

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Group Accounts  
continued

10 Dividends

Amounts recognised as distributions to equity holders in the period:

Final dividend for the 53 weeks ended 4 March 2017 of 8.56p (2016, 8.56p) per share

Interim dividend for the 52 weeks ended 3 March 2018 of 5.67p (2017: 5.67p) per share

Proposed final dividend for the 52 weeks ended 3 March 2018 of 8.56p (2017: 8.56p) per share

2018 
£m 

24.2

16.1

40.3

24.2

2017 
£m 

24.2

16.0

40.2

24.2

The proposed final dividend is subject to approval by shareholders at the annual general meeting and has not yet been included  
as a liability in these financial statements.

11 Earnings per share
The calculation of earnings per ordinary share is based on earnings after tax and the weighted average number of ordinary shares 
in issue during the period. 

The adjusted earnings per share figures have also been calculated based on earnings before items that are one-off in nature, 
material by size and are considered to be distortive of the true underlying performance of the business (see note 6) and certain 
other fair value adjustments. These have been calculated to allow the shareholders to gain an understanding of the underlying 
trading performance of the Group. For diluted earnings per share, the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue is 
adjusted to assume conversion of dilutive potential ordinary shares.

The calculations of the basic and diluted earnings per share is based on the following data:

Earnings
Earnings for the purposes of basic and diluted earnings per share being net profit attributable  
to equity holders of the parent

Number of shares (’000s)
Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of basic earnings per share

Effect of dilutive potential ordinary shares:

Share options

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of diluted earnings per share

Earnings from continuing operations
Net profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

Total net profit attributable to equity holders of the parent for the purpose of basic and diluted 
earnings per share

Fair value adjustment to financial instruments (net of tax)

Exceptional items (net of tax)

Adjusted earnings for the purposes of adjusted earnings per share

The denominators used are the same as those detailed above for basic and diluted earnings per share.

Adjusted earnings per share
Basic

Diluted

Earnings per share
Basic

Diluted

108

2018 
£m 

2017 
£m 

12.5

44.3

2018 
Number 

2017 
Number 

283,614

282,701

542

252

284,156

282,953

2018 
£m 

12.5

12.5

6.9

46.0

65.4

2018 
Pence 

23.06

23.02

2018 
Pence 
4.41

4.40

2017 
£m 

44.3

44.3

(0.2)

20.2

64.3

2017 
Pence 

22.74

22.72

2017 
Pence 
15.67

15.66

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 201812 Intangible assets

Cost

At 27 February 2016

Additions

At 4 March 2017

Additions

At 3 March 2018

Accumulated amortisation and impairment

At 27 February 2016

Charge for the period

At 4 March 2017

Charge for the period

At 3 March 2018

Carrying amount

At 3 March 2018

At 4 March 2017

At 27 February 2016

Brands
£m

Software
£m

Customer 
Database
£m

16.9

–

16.9

–

16.9

8.0

–

8.0

8.0

8.9

8.9

8.9

256.7

37.7

294.4

36.5

330.9

140.7

20.7

161.4

22.4

183.8

147.1

133.0

116.0

1.9

–

1.9

–

1.9

1.9

–

1.9

–

1.9

–

–

–

Total
£m

275.5

37.7

313.2

36.5

349.7

150.6

20.7

171.3

22.4

193.7

156.0

141.9

124.9

Assets in the course of construction included in intangible assets at the year end total £14.6m (2017: £88.5m). No amortisation is 
charged on these assets. Borrowing costs of £0.1m (2017 £1.3m) have been capitalised in the period using the weighted average 
bank loan interest rate applied to the capitalised spend on technological developments included within software.

As at 3 March 2018, the Group had entered into contractual commitments for the further development of intangible assets of £2m 
(2017: £3.0m) of which £1m (2017: £1.0m) is due to be paid within one year.

Impairment testing of software intangible assets
The Group has undertaken a systems transformation project. Some elements of the project are not yet available for use and are 
not therefore being amortised. Where intangible assets are not being amortised management have tested for impairment with  
the recoverable amount being determined from value in use calculations. 

The value in use calculations use cash flows based on budgets prepared by management covering a three year period. These 
budgets have regard to historic performance and knowledge of the current market, together with management’s views on the 
future achievable growth and impact of technological developments. Cash flows beyond this three year period are extrapolated 
using a long term growth rate to five years at which point a terminal value has been calculated based upon the long term growth 
rate and the Group’s risk adjusted pre-tax discount rate. 

The Group’s three year cash flow projections are based upon the Group’s approved three year plan. The detailed forecast assumes 
continued growth during the course of the next three years, driven by new media campaigns, exploitation of the Group’s data 
assets and further investments in the core technology underpinning the Group’s key channels to market.

Other than the detailed budgets, the key assumptions in the value in use calculations are the long-term growth rate and the risk 
adjusted pre-tax discount rate. The long-term growth rate has been determined with reference to forecast GDP growth which 
management believe is the most appropriate indicator of long-term growth rates that is available. The long-term growth rate used 
is purely for the impairment testing of intangible assets and brands under IAS 36 ‘Impairment of Assets’ and does not reflect 
long-term planning assumptions used by the Group for investment proposals or for any other assessments. The pre-tax discount 
rate is based on the Group’s weighted average cost of capital, taking into account the cost of capital and borrowings, to which 
specific market-related premium adjustments are made. 

The assumptions are as follows;

•  Long term growth rate : 2.0% (2017: 1.9%)
•  Pre tax discount rate : 13.9% (2017: 11.6%)

The analysis performed indicates that no impairment is required. A sensitivity analysis has been performed on each of these key 
assumptions with other variables held constant. Management have concluded that there are no reasonably possible changes in 
these key assumptions that would cause the carrying value to exceed the value in use. 

109

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Group Accounts  
continued

12 Intangible assets continued
Impairment testing of brand intangibles
The brand names arising from the acquisitions of High and Mighty, Slimma, Figleaves, Diva and Dannimac are deemed to have 
indefinite lives as there are no foreseeable limits to the periods over which they are expected to generate cash inflows and are 
therefore subject to annual impairment tests with the recoverable amount being determined from the value in use calculations. 

The value in use calculations use cash flows based on budgets prepared by management covering a three year period. These 
budgets have regard to historic performance and knowledge of the current market, together with management’s views on the 
future achievable growth. Cash flows beyond this three year period are extrapolated using a long term growth rate into perpetuity.

Other than the detailed budgets, the key assumptions in the value in use calculations are the long-term growth rate and the risk 
adjusted pre-tax discount rate which management have assumed to be 2.0% (2017: 1.9%) and 11.9% (2017: 12.5%) respectively. 

The analysis performed indicates that no impairment is required. A sensitivity analysis has been performed on each of these key 
assumptions with other variables held constant. Should there be a downturn in future or forecasted cashflows, then there is a risk 
of impairment to Figleaves (£7.1m) and High and Mighty (£1.0m) brand names.

13 Property, plant and equipment

Cost

At 27 February 2016

Additions

Reclassification

At 4 March 2017

Additions

Disposals

At 3 March 2018

Accumulated depreciation and impairment

At 27 February 2016

Charge for the period

At 4 March 2017

Charge for the period

Disposals

At 3 March 2018

Carrying amount

At 3 March 2018

At 4 March 2017

At 27 February 2016

Land and 
Buildings
£m

Fixtures and 
Equipment
£m

Total
£m

53.2

–

5.9

59.1

–

–

134.9

188.1

3.7

(5.9)

3.7

–

132.7

191.8

2.3

(4.1)

2.3

(4.1)

59.1

130.9

190.0

13.1

1.1

14.2

1.2

–

15.4

43.7

44.9

40.1

98.3

5.8

104.1

4.5

(1.4)

111.4

6.9

118.3

5.7

(1.4)

107.2

122.6

23.7

28.6

36.6

67.4

73.5

76.7

Assets in the course of construction included in property, plant and equipment at the year end date total £1.6m (2017: £0.3m), 
and in land and buildings total £nil (2017: £nil). No depreciation has been charged on these assets.

At 3 March 2018, the Group had not entered into any contractual commitments for the acquisition of property, plant and 
equipment (2017: £nil).

Disposals relate to the assets written off as a result of store closures. A loss of £2.7m was recorded as per note 6.

14 Subsidiaries
A list of all investments in subsidiaries, including the name, country of incorporation and proportion of ownership interest,  
is given in note 34 to the Company’s separate financial statements.

110

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 201815 Inventories

Finished goods

Sundry stocks

2018 
£m 

109.3

1.3

110.6

2017 
£m 

103.8

1.7

105.5

A net charge of £0.7m (2017: £1.1m) has been made to the income statement in respect of written down inventories.

There was no inventory pledged as security for liabilities in the current or prior period.

Sundry stocks relate to spare parts for engineering repairs and packaging stocks.

16 Trade and other receivables

Amount receivable for the sale of goods and services

Allowance for doubtful debts

Net trade receivables

Other debtors and prepayments

Trade receivables are measured at amortised cost.

2018 
£m 

647.6

(48.8)

598.8

53.9

652.7

2017 
£m 

599.5

(64.7)

534.8

40.6

575.4

The average credit period given to customers for the sale of goods is 237 days (2017: 217 days). A weighted average APR of 57.9% 
(2017: 58.7%) is charged on the outstanding balance. Provision for impairment of receivables is established when there is objective 
evidence that the Group will be unable to collect all amounts due. For customers who find themselves in financial difficulties, the 
Group may offer revised payment terms to support the customer, encouraging customer rehabilitation and thereby maximising 
long term returns. These revised terms may also include suspension of interest for a period of time. The cash collection rates on 
these accounts are therefore reduced and a provision is held for all receivables on renegotiated terms. Accounts not on 
renegotiated terms are also assessed and all accounts that reach the trigger point of 28 days past due (in respect of new 
customers) or 56 days past due (in respect of established customers) are considered for provision. 

The Group also acknowledges that there will be events that have occurred that are not yet identified within segments where  
a provision is not held. The Group uses historic roll rates to measure the likelihood of receivables moving into a segment which  
is currently provided for over a 7.5 month emergence period. This is then used to assess the level of provision needed in relation  
to these incurred (“IBNR”) events where collectively no provision is held.

Before accepting any new customer, the Group uses an external credit scoring system to assess the potential customer’s credit 
quality and defines credit limits by customer. Credit limits and scores attributed to customers are reviewed every 28 days. The credit 
quality of trade receivables that are neither past due nor impaired, with regard to the historical default rate, has remained stable.

Ageing of trade receivables
Current – not past due

0 – 28 days – past due

29 – 56 days – past due

57 – 84 days – past due

85 – 112 days – past due

Over 112 days – past due

Gross trade receivables

Allowance for doubtful debts

Net trade receivables

2018
£m

Trade 
receivables on 
payment 
arrangements

Trade 
receivables

Total trade 
receivables

Trade 
receivables

2017
£m

Trade 
receivables on 
payment 
arrangements

Total trade 
receivables

520.1

30.8

550.9

444.2

53.0

497.2

35.6

19.3

12.9

9.0

8.0

604.9

(28.2)

576.7

4.7

1.6

2.3

1.6

1.7

42.7

(20.6)

22.1

40.3

20.9

15.2

10.6

9.7

647.6

(48.8)

598.8

38.2

18.7

13.3

9.1

8.1

531.6

(30.8)

500.8

6.5

2.5

2.0

1.6

2.3

67.9

(33.9)

34.0

44.7

21.2

15.3

10.7

10.4

599.5

(64.7)

534.8

111

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Group Accounts  
continued

16 Trade and other receivables continued
The carrying amount of trade receivables whose terms have been renegotiated but would otherwise be past due totalled 
£30.8m at 3 March 2018 (2017: £53.0m). Interest income recognised on trade receivables which have been impaired was 
£29.8m (2017: £40.6m).

Movement in the allowance for doubtful debts
Balance at the beginning of the period

Amounts charged net to the income statement

Net amounts written off

Balance at the end of the period

2018 
£m 

64.7

99.5

(115.4)

48.8

2017 
£m 

97.6

113.5

(146.4)

64.7

The amounts written off in the period of £115.4m (2017: £146.4m) include the sale of impaired assets with a net book value of £20.5m 
(2017: £29.0m). This sale has also been a material driver in the reduction in trade receivables on payments arrangements, from £67.9m  
to £42.7m as at 3 March 2018. 

The concentration of credit risk is limited due to the customer base being large and unrelated and comprising 1.2 million (2017: 
1.2 million) customers. Accordingly, the Directors believe that there is no further credit provision required in excess of the allowance  
for doubtful debts.

The principal sensitivities in the allowance of doubtful debts calculations are: expected future cashflows, expected recoveries  
on credit losses and the emergence period.

+/- 10% shift in expected cashflows
+/- 1 pence movement per pound of receivable on recoveries expected on credit losses
+/- 1 month movement in the emergence period

52 weeks to  
3 March 2018 
allowance for  
doubtful debts 
£m

+/–1.3

+/–0.4

+0.1/+0.6

‘Other debtors and prepayments’ includes a net VAT debtor, comprising the VAT liability which arises from day to day trading, 
together with amounts in relation to matters which are in dispute with HMRC. The Group has ongoing discussions with HMRC  
in respect of a number of VAT positions. The calculation of the Group’s potential liabilities or assets in respect of these involves  
a degree of estimation and judgement in respect of items whose tax treatment cannot be finally determined until resolution has 
been reached with HMRC or as appropriate, through legal processes. Issues can, and often do, take a number of years to resolve.

In respect of VAT, the Group has provided a total of £3.1m (FY17: £5.4m) in respect of future payments which the Directors have  
a reasonable expectation of making in settlement of these historical positions.

In addition and separate to the above positions, the Group continues to be in discussion with HMRC in relation to the VAT 
consequences of the allocation of certain costs between our retail and credit businesses. At this stage it is not possible to determine 
how the matter will be resolved.

Within our year end VAT debtor is an asset of £43.8m (FY17: £36.0m) which has arisen as a result of cash payments made under 
protective assessments raised by HMRC and the Group estimates that a further £10m could be paid under this assessment in 
the forthcoming year. Based on the advice of external tax advisors, together with legal counsel’s opinion on certain elements 
of the cost allocation, on certain elements of the allocation we believe that we will recover this amount in full from HMRC and 
we are engaged in a legal process to do so. The inherent uncertainty regarding the outcome of these positions means the 
eventual realisation could differ from the accounting estimates and therefore impact the Group’s future results and cash flows. 
Based upon the amounts reflected in the balance sheet as at 3 March 2018, the Directors estimate that the unfavourable 
settlement of these cases could result in a charge to the income statement of up to £53.0m (including the full write off of the 
VAT debtor noted above) and a cash payment to HMRC of up to £9.2m.

The favourable settlement of these cases would result in a repayment of tax and associated interest of up to £43.8m and an associated 
credit to the income statement of £nil.

112

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 201817 Bank overdraft and loans

Bank loans

The borrowings are repayable as follows:

Within one year

In the second year

In the third to fifth year

Amounts due for settlement after 12 months

All borrowings are held in sterling.

The weighted average interest rates paid were as follows:

Bank overdrafts

Bank loans

The principal features of the Group’s borrowings are as follows:

2018 
£m 

405.0

–

–

405.0

405.0

2018 
% 

1.8

2.3

2017 
£m 

355.0

–

–

355.0

355.0

2017 
% 

2.0

2.1

i.  Bank overdrafts which are nil at the current and prior year ends are repayable on demand, unsecured and bear interest at  
a margin over bank base rates. The Group has an overdraft facility of £27m (2017: £27m) which is undrawn at period end.

ii.  The Group has a bank loan of £280m (2017: £270m) secured by a charge over certain ‘eligible’ trade debtors (current and 0–28 
days past due) of the Group and is without recourse to any of the Group’s other assets. The facility has a current limit of £280m 
for which finance costs are linked to US commercial paper rates which is committed until August 2020. The Group also has 
unsecured bank loans of £125m (2017: £85m) drawn down under a medium term bank revolving credit facility, of £125 million, 
which is committed until August 2020.

iii. All borrowings are arranged at floating rates, thus exposing the Group to cash flow interest rate risk. The Group may use 

derivatives such as interest rate swaps where appropriate to manage this risk. None have been used in the current or prior year. 
Based on weighted average interest rates and the value of bank loans at 3 March 2018 the estimated future interest cost per 
annum until maturity would be £9.3m (2017: £7.6m).

At 3 March 2018, the Group had fully utilised its borrowing facility (2017: £50m of undrawn facility) in respect of which all conditions 
precedent had been met, however it had an undrawn overdraft facility of £27m (2017: £27m). Please refer to note 31, Post Balance 
Sheet Events.

Note 19 summarises the objectives and policies for holding or issuing financial instruments and similar contracts, and the  
strategies for achieving those objectives that have been followed during the period. The covenants inherent to these borrowing 
arrangements are closely monitored on a regular basis.

There is no material difference between the fair value and book value of the Group’s borrowings.

18 Derivative financial instruments
At the balance sheet date, details of outstanding forward foreign exchange contracts that the Group has committed to are as follows:

Notional amount – sterling contract value

Fair value of (liability)/asset recognised

2018 
£m 

113.9

(6.0)

2017 
£m 

94.2

2.5

The fair value of foreign currency derivatives contracts is their market value at the balance sheet date. Market values are based on 
the duration of the derivative instrument together with the observable market data including interest rates, foreign exchange rates 
and market volatility at the balance sheet date.

Changes in the fair value of liabilities/assets recognised, being non-hedging currency derivatives, amounted to a charge of £8.5m 
(2017: credit of £0.2m) to income in the period.

The financial instruments that are measured subsequent to initial recognition at fair value are all grouped into Level 2 (2017: same).

Level 2 fair value measurements are those derived from inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable 
for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices).

There were no transfers between Level 1 and Level 2 during the period (2017: same).

113

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Group Accounts  
continued

19 Financial instruments
Capital risk management
The Group manages its capital to ensure that entities in the Group will be able to continue as going concerns while maximising 
the return to stakeholders through the optimisation of the debt and equity balance. The capital structure of the Group consists of 
debt, which includes the borrowings disclosed in note 17, cash and cash equivalents disclosed in note 25 and equity attributable 
to equity holders of the parent, comprising issued capital, reserves and retained earnings as disclosed in notes 23 to 24 and the 
Statement of Changes in Equity.

Gearing ratio
The gearing ratio at the year end is as follows:

Debt

Cash and cash equivalents

Net debt

Equity

Gearing ratio

2018 
£m 

405.0

58.2

346.8

459.7

75%

2017 
£m 

355.0

64.1

290.9

478.2

61%

Debt is defined as long and short-term borrowings, as detailed in note 17.

Equity includes all capital and reserves of the Group attributable to equity holders of the parent.

Externally imposed capital requirement
The Group is not subject to externally imposed capital requirements.

Significant accounting policies
Details of the significant accounting policies and methods adopted, including the criteria for recognition, the basis of measurement 
and the basis on which income and expenses are recognised, in respect of each class of financial asset, financial liability and equity 
instrument are disclosed in note 2.

Financial risk management objectives
The financial risks facing the Group include currency risk, credit risk, liquidity risk and cash flow interest rate risk. The Group seeks 
to minimise the effects of certain of these risks by using derivative financial instruments to hedge these risk exposures as governed 
by the Group’s policies. The Group does not enter into or trade financial instruments, including derivative financial instruments, for 
speculative purposes.

Foreign currency risk management
The Group undertakes certain transactions denominated in foreign currencies. Hence, exposures to exchange rate fluctuations 
arise. Exchange rate exposures are managed within approved policy parameters utilising forward foreign exchange contracts.

It is the policy of the Group to enter into forward foreign exchange contracts to cover specific foreign currency payments for the 
purchase of overseas sourced products. Group policy allows for these exposures to be hedged for up to three years ahead. At the 
balance sheet date, details of the notional value of outstanding US dollar forward foreign exchange contracts that the Group has 
committed to are as follows:

Less than 6 months

6 to 12 months

12 to 18 months

Greater than 18 months

2018 
£m 

32.9

35.3

38.6

7.1

113.9

2017 
£m 

32.6

47.4

14.2

–

94.2

Forward contracts outstanding at the period end are contracted at US dollar exchange rates ranging between 1.25 and 1.32.

The carrying amounts of the Group’s foreign currency denominated monetary assets and monetary liabilities at the reporting date 
are as follows:

Euro

US dollar

114

Liabilities

Assets

2018 
£m 

2.9

20.2

2017 
£m 

4.1

15.5

2018 
£m 

18.4

19.3

2017 
£m 

14.0

–

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Foreign currency sensitivity analysis
The following table details the Group’s hypothetical sensitivity to a 10% increase and decrease in sterling against the relevant 
foreign currencies. The sensitivity rate of 10% represents the Directors’ assessment of a reasonably possible change. The sensitivity 
analysis includes only outstanding foreign currency denominated monetary items and adjusts their translation at the period end for 
a 10% change in foreign currency rates. A positive number below indicates an increase in profit before tax.

Euro  
Currency Impact

US Dollar  
Currency Impact

Income statement

Sterling strengthens by 10%

Sterling weakens by 10%

Categories of financial instruments

Financial assets
Cash and bank balances

Derivatives at fair value through profit and loss – held for trading

Loans and receivables

Financial liabilities
Derivatives at fair value through profit and loss – held for trading

Amortised cost

2018 
£m 

(0.9)

1.7

2017 
£m 

(0.5)

1.6

2018 
£m 

0.6

0.5

2018 
£m 

58.2

–

598.8

657.0

2018 
£m 

6.0

494.2

500.2

2017 
£m 

1.3

(1.8)

2017 
£m 

64.1

2.5

534.8

601.4

2017 
£m 

–

419.2

419.2

Interest rate risk management
The Group is exposed to interest rate risk, as entities in the Group borrow funds at floating interest rates. Where appropriate, 
exposure to interest rate fluctuations on indebtedness is managed by using derivatives such as interest rate swaps.

Interest rate sensitivity analysis
If interest rates had increased by 0.5% and all other variables were held constant, the Group’s profit before tax for the 52 weeks 
ended 3 March 2018 would have decreased by £2.0m (2017: £1.8m).

This sensitivity analysis has been determined based on exposure to interest rates at the balance sheet date and assuming the net 
debt outstanding at the year end date was outstanding for the whole year.

Credit risk management
Credit risk refers to the risk that a counterparty will default on its contractual obligations resulting in a financial loss to the Group. 
Investments of cash surpluses, borrowings and derivative financial instruments are made through banks which are approved by  
the Board.

All customers who wish to trade on credit terms are subject to credit verification procedures, supplied by independent rating 
agencies, which together with assessment against credit policy, determines the terms and credit limit offered. Customer debtor 
balances are monitored on an ongoing basis and provision is made for estimated irrecoverable amounts, as detailed in note 16. 

While the Group has a number of support options for customers in financial difficulty, the majority are subject to the revision  
of payment terms.

The concentration of credit risk is limited due to the customer base being large and unrelated.

115

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Group Accounts  
continued

19 Financial instruments continued
Liquidity risk management
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due. The Group manages 
liquidity risk by maintaining adequate banking and borrowing facilities and by continuously monitoring forecast and actual  
cash flows and matching the maturity profiles of financial assets and liabilities. Included in note 17 is a description of additional 
undrawn facilities that the Group has at its disposal and details of the Group’s remaining contractual maturity for its non-derivative 
financial liabilities.

The following are the contractual maturities of financial liabilities, including estimated interest payments: 

2018
Non derivative financial liabilities

Secured bank loans
Trade payables
Derivative financial liabilities
Forward exchange contracts
Outflow

2017

Non derivative financial liabilities
Secured bank loans
Trade payables
Derivative financial assets
Forward exchange contracts
Inflow

2018
Carrying 
Amount 
£m

2018
Contractual 
Cash flows
£m

(405.0)
(89.2)

(420.2)
(89.2)

2018
1 year 
or less
£m

(9.3)
(89.2)

2018
1 to <2
years
£m

2018
2 to <5
years
£m

2018
5 years 
and over
£m

(9.3)
–

(401.6)
–

(6.0)

(6.0)

(4.4)

(500.2)

(515.4)

(102.9)

(1.6)

(10.9)

–

(401.6)

2017
Carrying 
Amount 
£m

2017
Contractual 
Cash flows
£m

(355.0)
(64.2)

(381.9)
(64.2)

2017
1 year 
or less
£m

(7.6)
(64.2)

2.5

2.5

–

(416.7)

(443.6)

(71.8)

2017
1 to <2
years
£m

(7.6)
–

2.5

(5.1)

2017
2 to <5
years
£m

(366.7)
–

–

(366.7)

2017
5 years 
and over
£m

–
–

–

–

–
–

–

–

Fair value of financial instruments
The fair value of each category of the Group’s financial instruments are the same as their carrying value in the Group’s balance 
sheet other than as noted below.

Trade receivables
As discussed in note 16, where a customer finds themselves in financial difficulty, we may offer revised payment terms. This 
maximises long term returns to the business, but may not maximise the present value of the receivables.

The Group believes that the fair value of interest bearing receivables, whether on a payment plan or not, is the same as their 
carrying value on the balance sheet, as interest rates are charged to reflect market rates.

For non interest bearing debt, fair value is estimated based on the recent sale prices of similar debt books. 

The fair value of receivables is calculated to be £606.7m (2017: £524.1m). This is considered a IFRS 13 Level 3 valuation (2017: same) 
as the valuation relies on unobservable inputs.

Derivative financial instruments are recorded at fair value (IFRS 13: Level 2) as discussed in note 18. A Level 2 valuation uses inputs 
other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e., as prices) or 
indirectly (i.e., derived from prices).

116

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 201820 Deferred tax
The following are the major deferred tax liabilities and assets recognised by the Group and movements thereon during the current 
and prior reporting periods.

At 27 February 2016

(Charge)/credit to income

Credit/(charge) to equity

At 4 March 2017

(Charge)/credit to income

Credit/(charge) to equity

At 3 March 2018

Debtor 
impairment 
provision 
£m

Share
based 
payments
£m

Accelerated 
tax 
depreciation
£m

Retirement 
benefit 
obligations
£m

2.6

(1.0)

–

1.6

(0.8)

–

0.8

1.1

0.1

(0.6)

0.6

0.1

0.1

0.8

(10.4)

4.0

–

(6.4)

(2.5)

–

(8.9)

(1.9)

–

0.6

(1.3)

(0.1)

(1.9)

(3.3)

Other
£m

(0.8)

0.5

–

(0.3)

1.5

–

1.2

Total
£m

(9.4)

3.6

–

(5.8)

(1.8)

(1.8)

(9.4)

Certain deferred tax assets and liabilities have been offset. The following is the analysis of the deferred tax balances (after offset) 
for financial reporting purposes:

Deferred tax assets

Deferred tax liabilities

2018 
£m 

2.8

(12.2)

(9.4)

2017 
£m 

2.4

(8.2)

(5.8)

At the balance sheet date, the Group has unused tax losses of £0.1m (2017: £0.1m) and capital losses of £3.2m (2017: £3.2m) 
available for offset against future profits. No deferred tax asset has been recognised due to the unpredictability of future profit 
streams within the relevant subsidiary.

21 Trade and other payables

Trade payables

Other creditors

Accruals and deferred income

2018 
£m 

89.2

0.1

42.4

131.7

2017 
£m 

64.2

0.1

34.6

98.9

Trade payables and accruals principally comprise amounts outstanding for trade purchases and ongoing costs. The average credit 
period taken for trade purchases is 34 days (2017: 26 days).

The Group has financial risk management policies in place to ensure that all payables are paid within agreed credit terms.

22 Provisions

Balance as at 4 March 2017 

Provisions made during the period

Provisions used during the period

Provisions reversed during the period

Balance as at 3 March 2018 

Non-current

Current

Balance as at 3 March 2018 

Customer 
redress 
£m 

Store  
closure 
£m

19.9

40.0

(17.1)

–

42.8

1.3

41.5

42.8

–

11.1

(4.2)

(0.5)

6.4

4.1

2.3

6.4

Total 
£m

19.9

51.1

(21.3)

(0.5)

49.2

5.4

43.8

49.2

Store Closures
In August 2017, five loss making stores were closed. The related costs of £13.8m have been treated as an exceptional item and 
detailed separately on the income statement, as reflected in note 6. Included within the charge was £11.1m in respect of onerous 
lease obligations and other related store closure costs, of which the majority of these costs have been settled by the year end 
leaving the onerous lease provision which will run to the earlier of the break clause or lease expiry for all four remaining store leases 
which will be between two to four years. The provision is net of an estimate of potential sub-letting income.

117

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Group Accounts  
continued

22 Provisions continued
Customer Redress
The provision relates to the Group’s liabilities in respect of costs expected to be incurred in respect of payments for historic 
financial services customer redress, which represents the best estimate of the known regulatory obligations, taking into account 
factors including risk and uncertainty.

As at 3 March 2018 the Group holds a provision of £42.8m (2017 £19.9m) in respect of the anticipated costs of historic financial 
services customer redress. Of this amount £39.8m relates to certain insurance products where management have identified flaws 
in the product design, the remaining £3.0m relates to historical customer redress. These amounts include a provision of £1.4m in 
relation to administration expenses. All liabilities will be settled in line with the current FCA deadline of August 2019. There are still 
a number of uncertainties as to the eventual customer redress costs, in particular the total number of claims and the cost per claim, 
however the Directors believe that the amounts provided at year end, (based on historical and forecasted claim rates and amounts, 
along with known legal and regulatory obligations) are a reasonable estimate of the cost to the Group. 

The principal sensitivities in the customer redress calculation are: volumes of policies affected; claim rate; uphold rate and average 
redress amount. 

+/- 10% in customer claims volumes
+/- 10% in uphold rate
+/- 10% in average redress amount

23 Share capital 

Allotted, called-up and fully paid

Ordinary shares of 111/19p each

At 3 March 2018 and 4 March 2017

2018  
£m

+/–9.9

+/–4.4

+/–9.9

2018 
Number 

2017 
Number 

2018 
£m 

2017 
£m 

284,458,148

283,429,454

31.4

31.3

The Company has one class of ordinary shares which carry no right to fixed income. The holders of ordinary shares are entitled  
to receive dividends as declared and are entitled to one vote per share at meetings of the Company.

24 Own shares

Balance at 4 March 2017

Issue of own shares

Balance at 3 March 2018

2018 
£m 

0.1

0.1

0.2

2017 
£m 

0.2

(0.1)

0.1

The own shares reserve represents the cost of shares in N Brown Group plc held by the N Brown Group plc Employee Share 
Ownership Trust to satisfy options under the Group’s various share benefit schemes (see note 28).

At 3 March 2018 the employee trusts held 85,171 shares in the Company (2017: 635,022).

25 Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents (which are presented as a single class of assets on the face of the balance sheet) comprise cash at bank 
and other short-term highly liquid investments with a maturity of three months or less.

A breakdown of significant cash and cash equivalent balances by currency is as follows:

Sterling

Euro

US Dollar

118

2018 
£m 

37.5

9.2

11.5

58.2

2017 
£m 

61.2

7.4

(4.5)

64.1

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 201826 Contingent liabilities
Parent Company bank overdrafts which at 3 March 2018 amounted to £40.2m (2017: £27.2m) have been guaranteed by certain 
subsidiary undertakings.

27 Operating lease arrangements

Minimum lease payments under operating leases recognised as an expense for the period

2018 
£m 

4.5

2017 
£m 

6.5

At the balance sheet date, the Group had outstanding commitments for future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable 
operating leases, which are payable as follows:

Within one year

In the second to fifth years inclusive

After five years

2018 
£m 

6.9

9.1

1.9

17.9

2017 
£m 

7.5

14.3

2.2

24.0

Operating lease payments represent rentals payable by the Group for certain buildings, plant and equipment and motor vehicles.

The Group’s operating leases include stores, certain buildings, plant and equipment and vehicles. These have varying terms, 
restrictions and renewal rights. The commercial terms of the Group’s operating leases vary, however they commonly include  
either market rent review or an index linked rent review. The timing of when rent reviews take place differs for each lease.

28 Equity settled share based payments
The Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 68 to 84 contains details of management and sharesave options/awards offered  
to employees of the Group.

Details of the share options/awards outstanding during the period are as follows:

Option scheme

2010 Savings related scheme

2010 Executive scheme

Unapproved executive scheme

Long-term incentive scheme awards (LTIPs)

July 2013

August 2013

August 2014

June 2015

August 2016

August 2017

Deferred annual bonus scheme awards (DABs)

May 2014

May 2015

May 2016

September 2017

Option price 
in pence

189 – 420 

nil – 459

211 – 459

Exercise  
period

Number of 
shares 
2018 

Number of 
shares 
2017 

May 2010 – February 2022 1,089,453

1,049,859

May 2010 – August 2024

May 2010 – August 2024

89,049

60,450

220,429

90,107

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

July 2016 – December 2016

August 2016 – February 2017

August 2017 – July 2024

–

–

–

June 2018 – June 2025

892,747

–

–

623,527

895,427

August 2019 – August 2026 2,516,884

2,619,067

August 2020 – August 2027 1,351,055

May 2016 – November 2016

May 2017 – November 2017

–

–

May 2018 – November 2018

September 2019 – March 2020

38,304

94,955

–

–

1,562

41,335

–

119

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Group Accounts  
continued

28 Equity settled share based payments continued
Movements in share options are summarised as follows:

Outstanding at the beginning of the period

Granted during the period

Forfeited during the period

Exercised during the period

Outstanding at the end of the period

Exercisable at the end of the period

2018

2017

Number of 
share 
options

1,360,395

462,183

(409,262)

(174,364)

1,238,952

149,499

Weighted 
average 
exercise 
price £

Number of 
share 
options

Weighted 
average 
exercise 
price £

2.78 2,634,203

2.26

543,146

3.48 (1,531,647)

1.89

(285,307)

2.45 1,360,395

2.49

151,597

3.20

2.18

3.72

0.51

2.78

2.51

Options were exercised on a regular basis throughout the period and the weighted average share price during this period was  
276 pence (2017: 225 pence). The options outstanding at 3 March 2018 had a weighted average remaining contractual life of  
2.6 years (2017: 3.5 years). The aggregate estimated fair values of options granted in the period is £409,956 (2017: £309,128).

Movements in management share awards (LTIPs and DABs) are summarised as follows:

Outstanding at the beginning of the period

Granted during the period

Forfeited during the period

Exercised during the period

Outstanding at the end of the period

Exercisable at the end of the period

2018

2017

Number of 
share 
awards

4,180,918

1,449,376

(736,849)

–

4,893,445

–

Weighted 
average 
exercise 
price £

Number of 
share  
awards

Weighted 
average 
exercise 
price £

–

–

2,737,614

2,696,993

– (1,253,689)

–

–

–

–

4,180,918

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

The awards outstanding at 3 March 2018 had a weighted average remaining contractual life of 8.3 years (2017: 8.8 years).  
The aggregate estimated fair values of options granted in the period is £4,162,242 (2017: £4,369,877).

The fair value of management and sharesave options/awards granted is calculated at the date of grant using a Black–Scholes 
option pricing model. The inputs into the Black–Scholes model are as follows:

Weighted average share price at date of grant (pence)

Weighted average exercise price (pence)

Expected volatility (%)

Expected life (years)

Risk-free rate (%)

Dividend yield (%)

2018 

322

55

2017 

189

37

38.0 29.2 – 35.0

2.5 – 3.5

2.5 – 5.5

0.2

4.6

0.1

4.0

Expected volatility was determined by calculating the historical volatility of the Group’s share price over a period equivalent to  
the expected life of the option. The expected life used in the model has been adjusted, based on management’s best estimate,  
for the effects of non-transferability, exercise restrictions and behavioural considerations.

The Group recognised total expenses of £0.6m and £0.5m related to equity-settled share based payment transactions in 2018  
and 2017 respectively.

120

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 201829 Retirement benefit schemes
Defined contribution schemes
The Group operates defined contribution retirement benefit schemes for all qualifying employees.

The Group is required to contribute a specified percentage of payroll costs to the retirement benefit scheme to fund the benefits. 
The only obligation of the Group with respect to the retirement benefit scheme is to make the specified contributions.

The total cost charged to income of £4.2m (2017: £3.9m) represents contributions payable to the schemes by the Group at rates 
specified in the rules of the plans. As at 3 March 2018, contributions of £0.1m (2017: £0.1m) due in respect of the current reporting 
period had not been paid over to the schemes.

Defined benefit scheme
The Group operates a defined benefit scheme, the N Brown Group Pension Fund. Under the scheme, the employees are  
entitled to retirement benefits based on final pensionable earnings and it was closed to new members from 31 January 2002.  
On 29 February 2016 the scheme was closed to future accrual. No other post-retirement benefits are provided. The scheme is a 
funded scheme and operates under UK trust law and the trust is a separate legal entity from the Group. The scheme is governed 
by a board of trustees. The trustees are required by law to act in the best interests of scheme members and are responsible for 
setting certain policies (e.g. investment funding) together with the Group. The scheme exposes the Group to actuarial risks such 
as longevity risk, interest rate risk and investment risk.

The most recent actuarial valuations of plan assets and the present value of the defined benefit obligation were carried out at 
30 June 2015 by an independent qualified actuary. The present value of the defined benefit obligation, the related current service 
cost and past service cost were measured using the projected unit credit method. The principal actuarial assumptions used in 
determining the Group’s net retirement benefit obligations at the balance sheet date were as follows:

Discount rate

Future pension increases

Inflation – Retail Price Index

Inflation – Consumer Price Index

Life expectancy at age 65 (years)

Pensioner aged 65

Non-pensioner aged 45

Amounts recognised in profit or loss in respect of these defined benefit schemes are as follows:

Current service cost

Past service credit

Net interest credit

Profit recognised in the income statement

The actual return on scheme assets was £4.6m (2017: £30.1m).

2018 

2.75%

2.05%

3.35%

2.35%

23.0

24.5

2018 
£m 

–

–

(0.2)

(0.2)

2017 

2.65%

2.3%

3.4%

2.4%

23.4

25.2

2017 
£m 

–

–

(0.4)

(0.4)

The amount included in the balance sheet arising from the Group’s obligations in respect of its defined benefit retirement benefit 
scheme is as follows:

Present value of defined benefit obligations

Fair value of scheme assets

Surplus in the scheme and asset recognised in the balance sheet

The amount included in the statement of comprehensive income is as follows:

Remeasurement gain/(loss)

Return on scheme assets

Gain/(Loss) recognised in the statement of comprehensive income

2018 
£m 

(120.7)

140.0

19.3

2018 
£m 

9.5

1.0

10.5

2017 
£m 

(135.2)

143.5

8.3

2017 
£m 

(28.7)

25.6

(3.1)

121

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Group Accounts  
continued

29 Retirement benefit schemes continued
The surplus reflects the economic benefit at the balance sheet date that the Group would be entitled to, through refund, in the 
event the scheme was wound up. There are no restrictions on the recovery of the surplus. There are no specific regulatory 
requirements that impact on the retirement benefit scheme.

Movements in the present value of defined benefit obligations were as follows:

At 4 March 2017

Current service cost

Past service cost/(credit)

Interest cost

Remeasurement (gain)/loss

a. Effect of changes in financial assumptions

b. Effect of experience adjustments

Benefits paid

At 3 March 2018

Movements in the fair value of the scheme assets were as follows:

At 4 March 2017

Interest income

Return on scheme assets excluding interest income

Contributions from sponsoring companies

Benefits paid

At 3 March 2018

The analysis of the scheme assets at the balance sheet date was as follows:

Equities

Fixed-interest government bonds

Index-linked government bonds

Corporate Bonds

Property

Growth fixed income

Alternatives

Cash and cash equivalents

2018 
£m 

135.2

–

–

3.5

(6.0)

(3.5)

(8.5)

120.7

2018 
£m 

143.5

3.7

1.0

0.3

(8.5)

140.0

2018

2017

£m

27.4

27.7

33.9

20.2

2.6

13.3

14.0

0.9

%

19.6

19.8

24.2

14.5

1.8

9.5

10.0

0.6

£m

38.1

16.5

40.2

14.7

2.4

16.9

13.5

1.2

2017 
£m 

108.1

–

–

4.1

42.2

(13.5)

(5.7)

135.2

2017 
£m 

118.9

4.5

25.6

0.2

(5.7)

143.5

%

26.6

11.5

28.0

10.2

1.7

11.8

9.4

0.8

140.0

100.0

143.5

100.0

122

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018All assets had an observable market price (2017: all). Significant actuarial assumptions for the determination of the defined benefit 
obligation are the discount rate, inflation and life expectancy.

•  An increase of 0.25% in the discount rate used would decrease the defined benefit obligation by £6.5m (2017: £7.4m). 
•  An increase of 0.25% in the inflation assumption would increase the defined benefit obligation by £5.4m (2017: £6.0m).
•  An increase of one year in the life expectancy assumption would increase the defined benefit obligation by £3.9m (2017: £4.2m)

The above sensitivities are applied to adjust the defined benefit obligation at the end of the reporting period. Whilst the analysis 
does not take account of the full distribution of cash flows under the scheme, it does provide an approximation to the sensitivity  
of the assumptions shown. No changes have been made to the method and assumptions used in this analysis from those used in 
the previous period.

The scheme is funded by the Group and current employee members. Funding the scheme is based on a separate actuarial 
valuation for funding purposes for which the assumptions may differ from the assumptions above. Funding requirements and 
deficit contributions are formally set out in the Statement of Funding Principles, Schedule of Contributions and Recovery Plan 
agreed between the trustees and the Group.

Whilst no commitment has been made as at the balance sheet date, the Group expects to contribute £0.5m (2017: £0.3m)  
to the defined benefit scheme in the next financial year.

The weighted average duration of the defined benefit obligation at 3 March 2018 is approximately 24 years (2017: 24 years).

The defined benefit obligation at 4 March 2017 can be approximately attributed to the scheme members as follows:

•  Active members: 0% (2017: 0%)
•  Deferred members: 67% (2017: 68%)
•  Pensioner members; 33% (2017: 32%)

All benefits are vested at 3 March 2018 (unchanged from 4 March 2017).

30 Related party transactions
Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties, have been eliminated on consolidation and are 
not disclosed in this note. Remuneration paid to key management personnel (who comprise the Group Directors and members of 
the Executive Board) was £4.8m (2017: £4.2m). This was split as follows: employment benefits of £3.9m (2017: £3.1m), other benefits 
of £0.4m (2017: £0.7m) and share based payments of £0.5m (2017: £0.4m). 

31 Post balance sheet event
To take advantage of strong market conditions and favourable pricing, on the 4 May 2018 the Directors completed the process for 
a new finance agreement which will replace the existing £280m securitisation and £125m RCF with a new £500m securitisation and 
£125m RCF, which will be committed until September 2021. In addition, the Group has retained its existing £27m overdraft facility.

123

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Company Balance Sheet

Fixed assets

Investments

Current assets

Debtors

Creditors

Amounts falling due within one year 

Net current liabilities

Total assets less current liabilities

Non current liabilities

Bank loans

Net assets 

Capital and reserves

Called-up share capital

Share premium account

Own shares

Profit and loss account

Shareholders’ funds

As at  
3 March 
2018 
£m 

As at  
4 March 
2017 
£m

Note

34

35

36

37

38

367.2

366.5

135.6

73.2

(232.7)

(97.1)

270.1

(125.0)

145.1

31.4

11.0

(0.2)

102.9

145.1

(212.7)

(139.5)

227.0

(85.0)

142.0

31.3

11.0

(0.1)

99.8

142.0

The financial statements of N Brown Group plc (Registered Number 814103) were approved by the Board of Directors and 
authorised for issue on 17 May 2018.

They were signed on its behalf by:

Craig Lovelace  
CFO and Executive Director 

124

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Company Statement of Changes in Equity

Changes in equity for the 52 weeks ended 3 March 2018 

Balance at 4 March 2017 

31.3

11.0

(0.1)

99.8

142.0

Share
capital
(note 38) 
£m

Share
premium
£m

Own Shares 
£m

Retained
earnings
£m

Total
£m

Comprehensive income for the period 

Profit for the period 

Total comprehensive income for the period 

Transactions with owners recorded directly in equity 

Equity dividends 

Issue of own shares by ESOT 

Share based payment charge 

Total contributions by and distributions to owners 

Balance at 3 March 2018 

–

–

–

0.1

–

–

31.4

–

–

–

–

–

–

11.0

–

–

–

(0.1)

–

(0.1)

(0.2)

42.8

42.8

42.8

42.8

(40.3)

(40.3)

–

0.6

(39.7)

102.9

–

0.6

(39.6)

145.1

Changes in equity for the 53 weeks ended 4 March 2017

Balance at 28 February 2016 

31.3

11.0

(0.2)

98.3

140.4

Comprehensive income for the period 

Profit for the period 

Total comprehensive income for the period 

Transactions with owners recorded directly in equity 

Equity dividends 

Issue of own shares by ESOT 

Share based payment charge 

Total contributions by and distributions to owners 

Balance at 4 March 2017 

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

0.1

–

0.1

41.2

41.2

41.2

41.2

(40.2)

(40.2)

–

0.5

39.7

0.1

0.5

39.8

31.3

11.0

(0.1)

99.8

142.0

125

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Company Accounts

32 Significant accounting policies
Basis of accounting
N Brown Group plc (’the Company’) is a company incorporated and domiciled in the UK. These financial statements present 
information about the Company as an individual undertaking and not about its Group. These financial statements were prepared 
in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework (‘FRS 101’). 

In preparing these financial statements, the Company applies the recognition, measurement and disclosure requirements of 
International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the EU (‘Adopted IFRSs’), but makes amendments where necessary 
in order to comply with the Companies Act 2006 and has set out below where advantage of the FRS 101 disclosure exemptions 
has been taken. 

The Company is the ultimate parent undertaking of the Group and also prepares consolidated financial statements. The 
consolidated financial statements of N Brown Group plc are prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting 
Standards and are available to the public and may be obtained from its registered office address.

In these financial statements, the Company has applied the exemptions available under FRS 101 in respect of the  
following disclosures:

•  Company cashflow statement and related notes
•  Disclosures in respect of transactions with wholly owned subsidiaries
•  Disclosures in respect of capital management
•  The effects of new but not yet effective IFRSs
•  Disclosures in respect of the compensation of key management personnel

As the consolidated financial statements of N Brown Group plc include equivalent disclosures the Company has also taken 
exemptions under FRS 101 available in respect of the following disclosures:

•  Certain disclosures required by IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement
•  Disclosures required by IFRS 7 Financial Instrument Disclosures

Investments
Fixed asset investments in subsidiaries are shown at cost less provision for impairment.

Bank borrowings
Interest bearing bank loans and overdrafts are recorded at the proceeds received. Finance charges are accounted for on an 
accruals basis in the profit and loss account using the effective interest rate method.

Taxation
Tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Tax is recognised in the profit and loss account except  
to the extent that it relates to items recognised directly in equity or other comprehensive income, in which case it is recognised 
directly in equity or other comprehensive income.

Current tax is the expected tax payable or receivable on the taxable income or loss for the year, using tax rates enacted or 
substantively enacted at the balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred tax is provided on temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting 
purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes. The following temporary differences are not provided for: the initial 
recognition of goodwill; the initial recognition of assets or liabilities that affect neither accounting nor taxable profit other than in  
a business combination; and differences relating to investments in subsidiaries to the extent that they will probably not reverse in 
the foreseeable future. The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the expected manner of realisation or settlement of the 
carrying amount of assets and liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. A deferred tax 
asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the temporary 
difference can be utilised.

126

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Dividends
Dividends receivable are recognised when the Company’s right to receive payment is established. Dividends payable to  
the Company’s shareholders are recognised as a liability and deducted from shareholders’ equity in the period in which  
the shareholders’ right to receive payment is established.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances and call deposits. Bank overdrafts that are repayable on demand and form  
an integral part of the Company’s cash management are included as a component of cash and cash equivalents on the basis there 
is right to offset.

Own shares held by ESOT
Transactions of the Company-sponsored Employee Share Ownership Trust (ESOT) are treated as being those of the Company and 
are therefore reflected in the Company financial statements. In particular, the trust’s purchases and sales of shares in the Company 
are debited and credited directly to equity.

Share-based payments
The Company issues equity-settled share-based payments to certain employees. Equity-settled share-based payments are 
measured at fair value at the date of grant. The fair value determined at the grant date of the equity-settled share-based payments 
is expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period, based on the Company’s estimate of shares that will eventually vest. 
This is recognised as an employee expense with a corresponding increase in equity. Fair value is measured by monte-carlo for 
options subject to a market based performance condition and by use of a Black–Scholes model for all others. For share-based 
payment awards with non-vesting conditions, the grant date fair value of the share-based payment is measured to reflect such 
conditions and there is no true-up for differences between expected and actual outcomes. Whilst the Company has no own 
employees of its own, it settles all share incentive schemes granted to employees of its subsidiaries. As subsidiaries are not 
recharged for the share based payment charge, the amount is debited to cost of investment.

33 Profit for the period
As permitted by section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 the Company has elected not to present its own profit and loss account 
for the period.

N Brown Group plc reported a profit after tax for the financial period ended 3 March 2018 of £42.8m (2017: profit £41.2m) which 
includes dividends received of £50.0m (2017: £48.2m).

The Non-Executive Directors’ remuneration was £549,000 (2017: £538,000) and eight Non-Executive Directors were remunerated 
(2017: seven). The Executive Directors were remunerated by a subsidiary company in both years, the total was £1,892,000 (2017: 
£1,954,000). Further details are provided on page 78 of the Directors’ Remuneration Report.

The auditor’s remuneration for audit services to the Company of £16,000 (2017: £15,000) was borne by subsidiary undertakings.

127

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Company Accounts  
continued

34 Fixed asset investment

Cost and net book value

The Company has investments in the following subsidiaries and joint ventures.

Company
Aldrex Ltd

Registered Office Address
Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Alexander Ross (Financial Services) Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Ambrose Wilson Ltd

Better Living Ltd

Classic Combination Ltd

Comfortably Yours Ltd

Crescent Direct Ltd

Cuss Contractors Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Dale House (Mail Order) Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Daly Harvey Morfitt Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

DHM (Management Services) Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

E Langfield & Co. Ltd

Eunite Limited

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Figleaves Global Trading Limited

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Financial Services (Edinburgh) Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

First Financial Ltd

Gray & Osbourn Ltd

Halwins Ltd

Hammond House Investments  
International Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Hammond House Investments Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Hartingdon House Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

HB Wainwright (Financial Services) Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Heather Valley (Woollens) Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Hilton Mailing Ltd

Holland & Heeley Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

House of Stirling (Direct Mail) Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

J.D. Williams & Co Ltd

J.D. Williams Group Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

J.D. Williams Merchandise Co Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

JDW Finance Ltd

JDW Malta Limited

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

JDW Pension Trustees Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Langley House Ltd

Mature Wisdom Ltd

Melgold Ltd

NB Finance (Eire Reg)

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

29 Earlsfort Terrace, Dublin 2, Ireland

N Brown Pension Trustees Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

N Brown Funding Ltd

N Brown Holdings Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

N Brown No. 2 Ltd (Guernsey Reg)

St Martin’s House, Le Bordage, St Peter Port, Guernsey, GY1 4AU

N Brown Property One Ltd 

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

N Brown Property Three Ltd 

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

N Brown Property Two Ltd 

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

NB Funding Guernsey Ltd (Guernsey Reg)

St Martin’s House, Le Bordage, St Peter Port, Guernsey, GY1 4AU

NB Holdings Guernsey Ltd (Guernsey Reg)

St Martin’s House, Le Bordage, St Peter Port, Guernsey, GY1 4AU

NB Insurance Guernsey Ltd (Guernsey Reg) St Martin’s House, Le Bordage, St Peter Port, Guernsey, GY1 4AU

NB Malta No1 Ltd  
(Malta Reg)

NB Malta No2 Ltd  
(Malta Reg)

128

The Hedge Business Centre, Level 3, Triq ir-Rampa ta’ San Giljan,  
St Julians STJ 1062, Malta

The Hedge Business Centre, Level 3, Triq ir-Rampa ta’ San Giljan,  
St Julians STJ 1062, Malta

2018 
£m 

367.2

2017 
£m 

366.5

Proportion held by 
the Group (%)

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Company
Nochester Holdings (Eire Reg)

Odhams Leisure Group Ltd

Oxendale & Company Ltd

Registered Office Address
29 Earlsfort Terrace, Dublin 2, Ireland

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Oxendale & Co. Ltd (Eire Reg)

Woodford Business Park, Santry, Dublin 17, Ireland

Reliable Collections Ltd

Sander & Kay Limited

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Speciality Home Shopping (US) Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Speciality Home Shopping (US Marketing) 
LLC (incorporated 5 January 2018)

Tagma Ltd

T-Bra Limited

1209 Orange Street, Wilmington, Delaware 19801

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

The Bury Boot & Shoe Co (1953) Ltd

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

The Value Catalogue Limited

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester M60 6ES

Vote It Ltd

Whitfords (Bury) Ltd

Whitfords (Cosytred) Ltd

Whitfords (Textiles) Ltd

Wingmark Ltd

35 Debtors

Amounts falling due within one year:

Amounts owed by Group undertakings

Prepayments and accrued income

36 Creditors

Amounts falling due within one year:

Bank overdrafts (note 37)

Amounts owed to Group undertakings 

Accruals and deferred income 

Proportion held by 
the Group (%)
100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

2017 
£m 

72.3

0.9

73.2

2018 
£m 

135.0

0.6

135.6

2018 
£m 

2017 
£m 

40.2

192.5

–

232.7

27.2

184.7

0.8

212.7

129

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes to the Company Accounts  
continued

37 Bank loans and overdrafts

Bank overdrafts 

Bank loans 

2018 
£m 

40.2

125.0

165.2

2017 
£m 

27.2

85.0

112.2

The Company has unsecured bank loans of £125.0m (2017: £85.0m) drawn down under a medium term bank revolving credit 
facility committed until September 2020.

At 3 March 2018, the Company had available £0m (2017: £40.0m) of undrawn committed borrowing facilities in respect of which all 
conditions precedent had been met, in addition to a £20m (2017: £20m) undrawn revolving credit facility.

The weighted average interest rates paid were as follows:

Bank overdrafts 

Bank loans 

38 Share capital

2018 
%

1.8

1.9

Allotted, called-up and fully paid ordinary shares of 111/19p each

2018 
Number 

2017 
Number 

2018 
£m 

2017 
% 

2.0

1.9

2017 
£m 

At 3 March 2018 and 4 March 2017

284,458,148 283,429,454

31.4

31.3

The Company has one class of ordinary share which carries no right to fixed income.

39 Guarantees
Parent Company bank overdrafts which at 3 March 2018 amounted to £40.2m (2017: £27.2m) have been guaranteed by certain 
subsidiary undertakings.

130

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Shareholder Information

Financial calendar

2018

2019

October

December

January

January

February

April 

June 

July

July

August 

Announcement of interim results

Closing of register for interim dividend

Payment of interim dividend

Christmas trading statement

Financial year-end

Preliminary announcement of annual results

Publication of 2018 Annual Report and Accounts

Closing of register for final dividend

Annual General Meeting

Payment of final dividend

An updated version of the financial calendar is available at www.nbrown.co.uk

Registered office
Griffin House  
40 Lever Street  
Manchester 
M60 6ES 
Registered No. 814103 
Telephone 0161 236 8256

Registrars
Link Asset Services  
PXS 1 
34 Beckenham Road 
Beckenham 
Kent BR3 4ZF 
Telephone 0871 664 0300 
(Calls cost 10 pence per minute  
plus network extras)

Auditor
KPMG LLP 
1 St Peter’s Square 
Manchester 
M2 3AE

Bankers 
HSBC Bank plc 
The Royal Bank of Scotland plc 

Solicitors 
Pinsent Masons LLP 
Eversheds LLP 
Addleshaw Goddard LLP

Corporate brokers
Jefferies Hoare Govett 
Shore Capital Stockbrokers Limited

Shareholder benefits
Subject to certain conditions, shareholders are entitled to a 20% privilege discount off the selling price of consumer merchandise 
in any of the Group catalogues. Shareholders interested in these facilities should write for further information to the Company 
Secretary, N Brown Group plc, Griffin House, 40 Lever Street, Manchester, M60 6ES stating the number of shares held and the 
catalogue or product of interest.

Capital gains tax
For the purpose of capital gains tax, the value of the Company’s ordinary shares of 10p each was 6.40625p per share on  
31 March 1982 and 1.328125p on 6 April 1965.

For more information and latest news on the Group, visit www.nbrown.co.uk

131

Financial statementsN Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Notes

132

N Brown Group plc  Annual Report & Accounts 2018Printed by Park Communications on FSC® certified paper. 
Park is an EMAS certified company and its Environmental Management System is certified to ISO 14001. 
100% of the inks used are vegetable oil based, 95% of press chemicals are recycled for further use and, 
on average 99% of any waste associated with this production will be recycled. 

This document is printed on Edixion Offset, a paper containing 100% Environmental Chlorine Free (ECF) 
virgin fibre sourced from well-managed, responsible, FSC® certified forests and other controlled sources.

Designed and produced by SampsonMay 
Telephone: 020 7403 4099 
www.sampsonmay.com

N Brown Group plc 
Griffin House
40 Lever Street
Manchester M60 6ES
www.nbrown.co.uk